2011 Nissan 370Z Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2011-370z

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 419 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2011 370Z Owner's Manual
OM1E-0Z34U0
Table of Contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (2,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of

driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide explains details

about maintaining and servicing your ve-

hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s lemon

law.

Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best.

When you require any service or have any

questions, we will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available to us.

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s

Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with

controls and maintenance requirements, assist-

ing you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA-

TION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

.NEVER drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

.ALWAYS observe posted speed lim-

its and never drive too fast for

conditions.

.ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle

features or taking other actions that

could distract you.

.ALWAYS use your seat belts and

appropriate child restraint systems.

.ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety

features to all occupants of the

vehicle.

.ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-

ual for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate

governmental regulations. In addition,

damage or performance problems result-

ing from modification will not be covered

under the NISSAN warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

This manual includes information for all

options available on this model. Therefore,

you may find some information that does

not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications or design at any time without

notice.

Foreword

Information Provided by:

Black plate (3,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or

serious personal injury. To avoid or

reduce the risk, the procedures must

be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed care-

fully.

SIC0697

If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not

do this” or “Do not let this happen”.

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to the front

of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

above call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and certain vehicle components

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of Cali-

fornia to cause cancer and birth defects

or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-

SORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material - special handling may

apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

Information Provided by:

Black plate (4,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Bluetooth®is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.

and licensed to Visteon Corpora-

tion and Clarion Co., Ltd.

Gracenote®is a registered tra-

demark of Gracenote, Inc. The

Gracenote logo and logo type,

and the “Powered by Gracenote”

logo are trademarks of Grace-

note.

XM Radio®requires a subscrip-

tion, sold separately. It is not

available in Alaska, Hawaii or

Guam. For more information, visit

www.xmradio.com.

C2010 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or

by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-

copying, recording or otherwise, without the

prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,

Ltd.

Information Provided by:

Black plate (5,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you

would like to provide NISSAN directly with

comments or questions, pleas2e contact the

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using

our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for

the following information:

— Your name, address, and telephone number

— Vehicle identification number (attached to

the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

— Date of purchase

— Current odometer reading

— Your NISSAN dealer’s name

— Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information on

the left at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE

PROGRAM

Information Provided by:

Black plate

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (1,1)

Table of

Contents

Model "Z34-D" Edited: 2010/ 7/ 27

Illustrated table of contents 0

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone

and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

Index 10

Information Provided by:

Black plate

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (1,1)

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) ................................................... 0-2

Coupe models............................................... 0-2

Roadster models............................................ 0-3

Exterior front ..................................................... 0-4

Exterior rear ...................................................... 0-5

Coupe models............................................... 0-5

Roadster models............................................ 0-6

Exterior (NISMO models) ..................................... 0-7

Passenger compartment ...................................... 0-8

Coupe models............................................... 0-8

Roadster models............................................ 0-9

Cockpit.......................................................... 0-10

Instrument panel .............................................. 0-11

Meters and gauges........................................... 0-12

Engine compartment ......................................... 0-13

VQ37VHR engine model................................ 0-13

Warning and indicator lights ............................... 0-14

0 Illustrated table of contents

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Information Provided by:

Black plate (4,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0648

COUPE MODELS

1. Seat belts (Page 1-8)

— Seat belts with pretensioners (P.1-37)

2. Head restraints (P.1-5)

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air

bags (P.1-26)

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bags (P.1-26)

5. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-26)

6. Child restraint anchor point (for top tether strap

child restraint) (P.1-18)

7. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)

(P.1-32)

8. Front seats (P.1-3)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (5,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0649

ROADSTER MODELS

1. Seat belts (P.1-8)

— Seat belts with pretensioners (P.1-37)

2. Head restraints (P.1-5)

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air

bags (P.1-26)

4. Door-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bags (P.1-26)

5. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-26)

6. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)

(P.1-32)

7. Front seats (P.1-3)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (6,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0594

1. Hood (P.3-16)

2. Headlight and turn signal

— Operation (P.2-29)

— Bulb replacement (P.8-25)

3. Windshield wiper and washer

— Operation (P.2-27)

— Maintenance (P.8-19)

4. Power windows (P.2-42)

5. Outside mirrors (P.3-38)

6. Recovery hook (P.6-19)

7. License plate installation (P.9-14)

8. Tires

— Wheels and tires (P.8-29, P.9-9)

— Flat tire (P.6-2)

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

(P.2-10, P.5-3)

9. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-4)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system (P.3-13)

EXTERIOR FRONT

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (7,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0811

COUPE MODELS

1. High-mounted stop light (bulb replacement)

(P.8-25)

2. Rear window defroster (P.2-29)

3. Satellite antenna (if so equipped) (P.4-31)

4. Rear view camera (P.4-17)

5. Rear hatch

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system (P.3-13)

— Rear hatch opener switch (P.3-17)

6. Rear fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-33)

7. Rear combination light (bulb replacement)

(P.8-25)

8. Fuel-filler door

— Operation (P.3-34)

— Fuel recommendation (P.9-4)

EXTERIOR REAR

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (8,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0812

ROADSTER MODELS

1. Trunk lid (P.3-19)

— Intelligent Key system (P.3-6)

— Remote keyless entry system (P.3-13)

— Rear hatch release switch (P.3-17)

— Trunk lid release switch (P.3-19)

2. High-mounted stop light (bulb replacement)

(P.8-26)

3. Antenna (P.4-31)

4. Rear window defroster (P.2-29)

5. Soft top (P.3-21)

6. Interior trunk lid release (P.3-20)

7. Rear view camera (P.4-17)

8. Rear fog light (if so equipped) (P.2-33)

9. Rear combination light (bulb replacement)

(P.8-26)

10. Fuel

— Fuel-filler door (P.3-34)

— Fuel recommendation (P.9-4)

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (9,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0585

For NISMO models, the vehicle parts listed

below require special care or caution for

treating. Refer to the additional information in

each section.

1. Performance dampers (P.5-30)

2. Front bumper with an aerodynamic splitter

(P.3-32, P.6-19)

3. Side sill extensions (P.3-32)

4. Rear spoiler (P.3-18, P.7-3)

5. Exhaust pipes (P.3-32, P.6-19)

6. Rear bumper with an aerodynamic diffuser

(P.3-32, P.6-19)

EXTERIOR (NISMO models)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (10,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0650

COUPE MODELS

1. Cargo cover (if so equipped) (P.2-41)

2. Secondary rear hatch release (P.3-18)

3. Power windows (P.2-42)

— Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-38)

4. Sun visors (P.3-36)

5. Map light (P.2-44)

6. Inside rearview mirror

— Operation (P.3-37)

— HomeLink®(if so equipped) (P.2-47)

7. Rear parcel box (P.2-40)

8. Console box

— Power outlet (P.2-37)

— USB memory operation (if so equipped)

(P.4-58)

—iPod

®player operation (if so equipped) (P.4-67)

9. Front cup holders (P.2-38)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (11,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0651

ROADSTER MODELS

1. Power windows (P.2-42)

— Outside mirror remote control switch (P.3-38)

2. Sun visors (P.3-36)

3. Map light (P.2-44)

4. Inside rearview mirror

— Operation (P.3-37)

— HomeLink®(if so equipped) (P.2-47)

5. Rear parcel box (P.2-40)

— Secondary trunk lid release (P.3-21)

6. Console box

— Power outlet (P.2-37)

— USB memory operation (if so equipped)

(P.4-58)

—iPod

®player operation (if so equipped) (P.4-67)

7. Front cup holders (P.2-38)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (12,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0652

1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P.5-28)

2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch (P.2-29)

3. Meters and Gauges (combimeter) (P.2-4)

4. Triple meter (P.2-7)

5. Windshield wiper and washer switch (P.2-27)

6. Hood release handle (P.3-16)

7. Intelligent Key port (P.5-10)

8. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-14)

9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

— Menu control switch or tuning switch (P.4-77)

— BACK switch (P.4-77)

— Phone switch (if so equipped) (P.4-80)

— Volume control switches (P.4-77)

— Source select switch (P.4-77)

10. Tilt steering lever (P.3-36)

11. Steering wheel

— Horn (P.2-34)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-26)

12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)

— Cruise control switches (P.5-21)

13. Selector lever for automatic transmission (P.5-12)/

Shift lever for manual transmission (P.5-16)

14. Parking brake (P.5-20)

COCKPIT

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (13,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0653

1. Ventilator (P.4-23)

2. Center display and multi-function control panel (if

so equipped) (P.4-2) or Instrument pocket (if so

equipped) (P.2-38)

— Navigation system* (if so equipped)

— Vehicle information and setting buttons

(if so equipped) (P.4-6)

— Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System

(if so equipped) (P.4-80, P.4-104)

3. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-32)

4. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-26)

5. Fuse box cover (P.8-21)

6. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-7)

7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-33)

8. Seat heater switch (if so equipped) (P.2-34) or

Climate controlled seat switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-36)

9. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster models)

(P.3-21)

10. SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) switch

(if so equipped) (P.5-17)

11. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-24)

— Rear window defroster switch (P.2-29)

12. Audio system (P.4-30)

13. Power outlet (P.2-37)

14. Glove box (P.2-39)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (14,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0509

1. ENTER/NEXT switch (P.2-20)

2. Fuel gauge (P.2-6)

3. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-8)

4. Tachometer (P.2-5)

5. Speedometer (P.2-5)

6. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-32)

7. Vehicle information display (P.2-16)

8. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-6)

9. Transmission position indicator (if so equipped)

(P.2-12)

— SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) indicator

(if so equipped) (P.5-17)

SSI0521

10. Odometer/Twin trip odometer control knob (P.2-5)

11. Odometer/Twin trip odometer (P.2-5)

12. Engine oil temperature gauge (P.2-7)

13. Voltmeter (P.2-7)

14. Clock (P.2-7, P.2-23)

METERS AND GAUGES

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (15,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0510

VQ37VHR ENGINE MODEL

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-21)

2. Battery (P.8-14)

3. Radiator filler cap (P.8-8)

4. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-9)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

7. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Transmission mod-

els) (P.8-13)

8. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-12)

9. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-14)

10. Air cleaner (P.8-18)

11. Drive belt location (P.8-17)

12. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (16,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Warning

light Name Page

Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light 2-9

Automatic Transmission (AT)

check warning light 2-9

Brake warning light 2-9

Charge warning light 2-10

Engine oil pressure warning

light 2-10

Intelligent Key system warning

light 2-10

Low tire pressure warning light 2-10

Master warning light 2-11

Seat belt warning light 2-11

Supplemental air bag warning

light 2-12

Warning

light Name Page

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light 2-12

Indicator

light Name Page

Cruise indicator light 2-13

Front passenger air bag status

light 2-13

High beam indicator light 2-13

Low beam indicator lights 2-13

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) 2-13

Rear fog light indicator light* 2-14

Security indicator light 2-14

Soft top indicator light (Road-

ster models) 2-14

SynchroRev Match mode (S-

MODE) indicator* 2-15

Transmission position indicator

light* 2-12

Indicator

light Name Page

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights 2-15

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light 2-15

*: if so equipped

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-14 Illustrated table of contents

Information Provided by:

Black plate (4,1)

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Seats .............................................................. 1-2

Front seats ................................................... 1-3

Head restraints .............................................. 1-5

Seat belts ........................................................ 1-8

Precautions on seat belt usage ......................... 1-8

Pregnant women.......................................... 1-11

Injured persons............................................ 1-11

Three-point type seat belt .............................. 1-11

Seat belt extenders....................................... 1-14

Seat belt maintenance................................... 1-14

Child safety .................................................... 1-15

Infants ....................................................... 1-15

Small children (for Coupe models) ................... 1-15

Larger children ............................................ 1-15

For Roadster models..................................... 1-16

Child restraints ................................................ 1-17

Precautions on child restraints......................... 1-17

Top tether strap child restraint

(for Coupe models) ...................................... 1-18

Forward-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts (for Coupe models) .................... 1-19

Installing top tether strap (for Coupe models) ..... 1-23

Booster seats.............................................. 1-23

Supplemental restraint system............................. 1-26

Precautions on supplemental restraint system ..... 1-26

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats) ................................................ 1-32

Front seat-mounted side-impact and roof/door-

mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air

bag systems ............................................... 1-36

Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ......... 1-37

Supplemental air bag warning labels................. 1-38

Supplemental air bag warning light................... 1-38

Repair and replacement procedure................... 1-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (20,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0133

WARNING

.Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined. This

can be dangerous. The shoulder belt

will not be against your body. In an

accident, you could be thrown into it

and receive neck or other serious

injuries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

.For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly. See “PRECAUTIONS ON

SEAT BELT USAGE” later in this

section.

.After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely

locked.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

.The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when

the passenger sits well back and

straight up in the seat. If the seat-

back is reclined, the risk of sliding

under the lap belt and being injured

is increased.

CAUTION

.When adjusting the seat positions,

be sure not to contact any moving

parts to avoid possible injuries and/

or damages.

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (21,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

FRONT SEATS

Front power seat adjustment

Operating tips:

.The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,

then reactivate the switch.

.Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

SSS0928

Forward and backward:

Moving the switch *

1forward or backward will

slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position.

Reclining:

Move the recline switch *

2backward until the

desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch *

2forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. (See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section.) The seatback may

also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in

the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with

the parking brake fully applied.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (22,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0394

Front manual seat adjustment

Forward and backward:

Pull the lever up *

1while you slide the seat

forward or backward to the desired position.

Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

Reclining:

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up *

2and

lean back. To bring the seatback forward again,

pull the lever and move your body forward. The

seatback will move forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. See “PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE” later in this section. The seatback may

also be reclined to allow occupants to rest when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in

the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position with

the parking brake fully applied.

SPA1715

Seat lifter (if so equipped)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and height of

the seat cushion to the desired position.

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (23,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0684

Lumbar support (if so equipped)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back

support to the driver.

Move the lever *

1up or down to adjust the

seatback lumbar area.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Head restraints supplement the other

vehicle safety systems. They may pro-

vide additional protection against injury

in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the

head restraints properly, as specified in

this section. Check the adjustment after

someone else uses the seat. Do not

attach anything to the head restraint

stalks or remove the head restraint. Do

not use the seat if the head restraint

has been removed. If the head restraint

was removed, reinstall and properly

adjust the head restraint before an

occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions

can reduce the effectiveness of the

head restraints. This may increase the

risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

SSS1007

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints. The head re-

straints are adjustable.

Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a head restraint.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (24,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0992

Components

1. Head restraint

2. Adjustment notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

SSS0997

Adjustment

Adjust the head restraint so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

SSS0993

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (25,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0994

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint down.

SSS0995

Removal

Use the following procedure to remove the

adjustable head restraints.

1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest

position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure

place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

5. Install and properly adjust the head restraint

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Models with climate controlled seats

are designed so that the head restraint

cannot be removed. The head restraint

may be damaged if the head restraint is

forcibly pulled out.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (26,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0996

Install

1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes

in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint

is facing the correct direction. The stalk with

the adjustment notches *

1must be in-

stalled in the hole with the lock knob *

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an

occupant uses the seating position.

SSS0508

The Active Head Restraint moves forward

utilizing the force that the seatback receives

from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The

movement of the head restraint helps support

the occupant’s head by reducing its backward

movement and helping absorb some of the

forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-

sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said

that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original position.

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as

described earlier in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well

back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your

chances of being injured or killed in an accident

and/or the severity of injury may be greatly

reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and

all of your passengers to buckle up every time

you drive, even if your seating position includes a

supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SEAT BELTS

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (27,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0136A

SSS0134A

SSS0016

SSS0014

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (28,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

.The seat belt should be properly

adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do

so may reduce the effectiveness of

the entire restraint system and in-

crease the chance or severity of

injury in an accident. Serious injury

or death can occur if the seat belt is

not worn properly.

.Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your

chest. Never put the belt behind

your back, under your arm or across

your neck. The belt should be away

from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder.

.Position the lap belt as low and

snug as possible AROUND THE

HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt

worn too high could increase the

risk of internal injuries in an acci-

dent.

.Be sure the seat belt tongue is

securely fastened to the proper

buckle.

.Do not wear the seat belt inside out

or twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

.Do not allow more than one person

to use the same seat belt.

.Never carry more people in the

vehicle than there are seat belts.

.If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and

all seat belts fastened, it may in-

dicate a malfunction in the system.

Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

.No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do

not modify the seat belt, add mate-

rial or install devices that may

change the seat belt routing or

tension. Doing so may affect the

operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the

seat belt system may result in

serious personal injury.

.Once a seat belt pretensioner has

activated, it cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.

.Removal and installation of the

pretensioner system components

should be done by a NISSAN dealer.

.All seat belt assemblies, including

retractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN

recommends that all seat belt as-

semblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was

minor and the belts show no da-

mage and continue to operate prop-

erly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use

during a collision should also be

inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is

noted.

.All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the

restraint manufacturer’s inspection

instructions and replacement re-

commendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (29,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as

possible around the hips, not the waist, and

place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and

across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder

belt over your abdominal area. Contact your

doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with

your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

.Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

.Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined. This

can be dangerous. The shoulder belt

will not be against your body. In an

accident, you could be thrown into it

and receive neck or other serious

injuries. You could also slide under

the lap belt and receive serious

internal injuries.

.For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the

seat should be upright. Always sit

well back in the seat with both feet

on the floor and adjust the seat belt

properly.

SSS0292

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. (See “SEATS” earlier in this

section.)

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until

you hear and feel the latch engage.

.The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

belt to move, and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

.If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (30,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

SSS0290

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

The three-point type seat belts have two modes

of operation:

.Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

.Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

allows the seat belt to extend and retract to

allow the driver and passengers some freedom

of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat

belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during impacts.

The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode

(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for

child restraint installation.

Pull the seat belt out until it is fully extended to

activate the ALR mode. Detach the seat belt

tongue from the buckle and retract the seat belt

completely to cancel the ALR mode and revert

back to the ELR mode.

When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. For additional information, see

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is

activated it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be

certain that seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (31,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

SSS0326

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the

buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat

belt movement by two separate methods:

.When the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

.When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

.Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and

restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any question about seat belt

operation, see a NISSAN dealer.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (32,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0588

Shoulder belt arm (for Coupe models)

Before fastening the seat belt, pull the shoulder

belt arm forward until it clicks at the detent

position.

Pulling the arm forward will allow an easy access

to the belt.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with

the installed seat belts is available that can be

purchased. The extender adds approximately 8

in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either

the driver or front passenger seating position.

See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with

purchasing an extender if an extender is

required.

WARNING

.Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with the

NISSAN seat belts.

.Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal

injury in the event of an accident.

.Never use seat belt extenders to

install child restraints. If the child

restraint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured in a

collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

.To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.

Then, wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

.If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

.Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt

assembly should be replaced.

1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (33,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2011/ 1/ 25

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

.Rear-facing child restraint

.Front-facing child restraint

.Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear-

facing child restraints. Front-facing child re-

straints are available for children who outgrow

rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1

year old. Booster seats are used to help position

a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a front-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly

fitting seat belt could cause serious or

fatal injury. Always use appropriate

child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. (See

“CHILD RESTRAINTS” later in this section.)

Also, there are other types of child restraints

available for larger children for additional pro-

tection.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

SMALL CHILDREN (for Coupe models)

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at

least 20 lb (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing

child restraint as long as possible up to the

height or weight limit of the child restraint.

Forward-facing child restraints are available for

children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints

and are at least 1 year old. Refer to the

manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommendations.

NISSAN recommends that small children be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits your

vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children who are too large for child restraints

should be seated and restrained by the seat

belts which are provided. The seat belt may not

fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5

cm) tall and weighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and

80 lb (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to

obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a

commercially availableboosterseatifthe

shoulder belt in the child’s seating position fits

close to the face or neck or if the lap portion of

the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The

booster seat should raise the child so that the

shoulder belt is properly positioned across the

top, middle portion of the shoulder and the lap

belt is low on the hips. A booster seat can only

be used in seating positions that have a three-

CHILD SAFETY

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (34,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2011/ 1/ 21

point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit

the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it

complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. Once the child has grown so the

shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face

and neck, use the shoulder belt without the

booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.

The child could be seriously injured or

killed in an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0927

FOR ROADSTER MODELS

WARNING

.Do not let infants and small children

ride in Roadster models.

.Roadster models are not designed

to accommodate Rear-facing child

restraints or Front-facing child re-

straints.

.If you let infants or small children

ride in Roadster models, they may

be killed or seriously injured in a

crash.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

.Rear-facing child restraint (should not be

installed in Roadster models)

.Front-facing child restraint (should not be

installed in Roadster models)

.Booster seat (only children large enough for

booster seats can ride in Roadster models)

WARNING

.Never let an infant or a small child

who requires the use of a rear or

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (35,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

front-facing child restraint ride in

this vehicle. Do not attempt to hold

a child in your lap or arms.

.Roadster models do not have an

anchor for a top tether strap re-

quired for most child restraints.

Never let children who require the

use of rear or front-facing child

restraints ride in this vehicle.

.Larger children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may

not fit them properly. The shoulder

belt may come too close to the face

or neck. The lap belt may not fit over

their small hip bones. In an acci-

dent, an improperly fitting seat belt

could cause serious or fatal injury.

Always use appropriate child re-

straints.

SSS0099

SSS0100

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

.Failure to follow the warnings and

instructions for proper use and in-

stallation of child restraints could

result in serious injury or death of a

child or other passengers in a

sudden stop or collision:

— The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always

follow all of the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for

installation and use.

— Infants and children should

never be held on anyone’s lap.

Even the strongest adult cannot

resist the forces of a collision.

— Do not put a seat belt around

both a child and another pas-

senger.

— NISSAN recommends that all

child restraints be installed in

the rear seat. Studies show that

children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat. If you must

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (36,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, see

“FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS (for Coupe

models)” later in this section.

— Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, never install a

rear-facing child restraint in the

front seat. An inflating air bag

could seriously injure or kill a

child.

—Besuretopurchaseachild

restraint that will fit the child

and vehicle. Some child re-

straints may not fit properly in

your vehicle.

— Child restraint anchor points are

designed to withstand loads

from child restraints that are

properly fitted.

— Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts or harnesses.

— A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

— Keep seatbacks as upright as

possible after fitting the child

restraint.

— Infants and children should al-

ways be placed in an appropri-

ate child restraint while in the

vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

In general, child restraints are designed to be

installed with the lap portion of a lap/shoulder

seat belt.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

children of various sizes. When selecting any

child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

.Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

.Check the child restraint in your vehicle to

be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s

seat and seat belt system.

.If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

The passenger seat is not suitable for use with a

rear-facing child restraint for infants. Therefore,

infants should not be transported in this vehicle.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on front-facing child

restraints to be secured to the designated

anchor point on the vehicle.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RE-

STRAINT (for Coupe models)

If the manufacturer of your child restraint

requires the use of a top tether strap, it must

be secured to an anchor point.

WARNING

.If the cargo cover (if so equipped)

contacts the top tether strap when it

is attached to the top tether anchor,

remove the cargo cover from the

vehicle or secure it on the cargo

floor below its attachment location.

1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (37,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

If the cargo cover is not removed, it

may damage the top tether strap

during a collision. A child could be

seriously injured or killed in a colli-

sion if the child restraint top tether

strap is damaged.

.Do not allow cargo to contact the

top tether strap when it is attached

to the top tether anchor. Properly

secure the cargo so it does not

contact the top tether strap. Cargo

that is not properly secured or that

contacts the top tether strap may

damage the top tether strap during

a collision. Your child could be

seriously injured or killed in a colli-

sion if the child restraint top tether

strap is damaged.

SSS0929

Top tether anchor point location

The anchor point is located on the floor of the

cargo area.

SSS0100

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE

SEAT BELTS (for Coupe models)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (38,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

passenger air bag. See “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” later in this

section.

SSS0640

Front-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety” and “Child restraints” sections before

installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a front-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the front

passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

front-facing direction only. Move the

seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and therefore

must not be used in this vehicle.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint to obtain the correct child restraint

fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in

a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint when the child restraint

is removed. See “HEAD RESTRAINTS”

earlier in this section for head restraint

adjustment, removal and installation informa-

tion.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint and it is interfering

with the proper child restraint fit, try another

seating position or a different child restraint.

1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (39,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0360B

Front-facing — step 3

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for belt routing.

SSS0651

Front-facing — step 4

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0652

Front-facing — step 5

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (40,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0653

Front-facing — step 6

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. (See “TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

RESTRAINT (for Coupe models)” earlier in

this section.)

SSS0641

Front-facing — step 8

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it from

side to side while holding the seat near the

seat belt path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm) from side to

side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, you may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode

by trying to pull more seat belt out of the

retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt

webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is

in the ALR mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3

through 9.

1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (41,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0988

Front-facing — step 11

11. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, push the ignition switch to

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated, see “Front passenger

air bag and status light” later in this section.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child

restraint mode) is canceled.

SSS0929

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP (for

Coupe models)

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

1. Flip down the flap marked with a label as

shown in the illustration.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top of

the seatback and secure it to the tether

anchor bracket that provides the straightest

installation.

3. Tighten the strap according to the manu-

facturer’s instructions to remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap child restraint, consult

your NISSAN dealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a sudden stop or collision

greatly increases:

— Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

— Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

— A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that has

a lap/shoulder belt.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (42,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

LRS0455

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

.Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

SSS0363

.Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

.Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat *

1is chosen, the

vehicle seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is

lower than the center of the child’s ears, a

high back booster seat *

2should be used.

LRS0454

.If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with

your child.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the front passenger seat.

1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (43,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Booster seat installation

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-

matic Locking Retractor mode when

using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats”

sections earlier in this section before installing a

child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

front passenger seat: SSS0640

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, adjust the seatback so that

it is upright and then move the seat to

the rearmost position. Do not move the

seat with the booster seat attached to

it.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions.

LRS0454

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint to obtain the correct booster seat

fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in

a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint when the booster seat is

removed. See “HEAD RESTRAINTS” ear-

lier in this section for head restraint adjust-

ment, removal and installation information.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint and it is interfering

with the proper booster seat fit, try another

seating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (44,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s

instructions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in the “THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT

BELT” earlier in this section. SSS0988

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, push the ignition switch to

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not illuminate

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat used. (See “Front

passenger air bag and status light” later in

this section.)

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

section contains important information concern-

ing the driver and passenger front impact

supplemental air bags (NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System), front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system, roof-mounted

(Coupe models) or door-mounted (Roadster

models) curtain side-impact supplemental air

bag and seat belt with pretensioners.

Supplemental front-impact air bag system:

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head and

chest of the driver and front passenger in certain

frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system: This system can help

cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvis

area of the driver and front passenger in certain

side impact collisions. The front seat side-

impact supplemental air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag system (for Coupe models):

This system can help cushion the impact force

to the head of the driver and front passenger in

certain side impact collisions. The curtain air

bags are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (45,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Door-mounted curtain side-impact supple-

mental air bag system (for Roadster mod-

els): This system can help cushion the impact

force to the heads of the driver and front

passenger in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to inflate on

the side where the vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection

provided by the driver and passenger seat belts

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the

occupant seated a suitable distance away from

the steering wheel, instrument panel and door

finishers. (See “SEAT BELTS” earlier in this

section for instructions and precautions on seat

belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

SSS0131B

SSS0132B

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (46,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower se-

verity frontal collision. Always wear

your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

.The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag

status light is lit or if the front

passenger seat is unoccupied. See

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” later in this section.

.The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the

seat with both feet on the floor. The

front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System, if you are

unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-

ting sideways or out of position in

any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may

also receive serious or fatal injuries

from the supplemental front air bag

if you are up against it when it

inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far-away as prac-

tical from the steering wheel or

instrument panel. Always use the

seat belts.

.The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with

sensors that detect if the seat belts

are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag

System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage then

inflates the air bags. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury

in an accident.

.The front passenger seat is

equipped with an occupant classifi-

cation sensor (pattern sensor) that

turns the front passenger air bag

OFF under some conditions. This

sensor is only used in this seat.

Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase

the risk or severity of injury in an

accident. See “Front passenger air

bag and status light” later in this

section.

.Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could in-

crease the risk of injury if the

supplemental front air bag inflates.

1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (47,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0007

SSS0006

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (48,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.Never let children ride unrestrained

or extend their hands or face out of

the window. Do not attempt to hold

them in your lap or arms. Some

examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the illustrations.

.Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side

air bags or curtain air bags inflate if

they are not properly restrained.

.Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating front air bag could

seriously injure or kill your child.

See “CHILD RESTRAINTS” earlier in

this section for details.

SSS0059A

SSS0162

SSS0159

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-

plemental air bags and roof-mounted

(Coupe models) or door-mounted

(Roadster models) curtain side-impact

supplemental air bags:

.The front seat-mounted side-impact

air bags and roof-mounted (Coupe

models) or door-mounted (Roadster

models) curtain air bags ordinarily

will not inflate in the event of a

frontal impact, rear impact, rollover

or lower severity side collision. Al-

1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (49,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

ways wear your seat belts to help

reduce the risk or severity of injury

in various kinds of accidents.

.The seat belts, side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side

air bag on the side of the seatback

of the front seat or near the side

roof rails (Coupe models)/door trim

(Roadster models). Do not allow

anyone sitting in the front seats to

extend their hand out of the window

or lean against the door. Some

examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the previous

illustrations.

.Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

supplemental side air bag inflation.

SSS1012

1. Crash zone sensor

2. Supplemental front air bag modules (NISSAN

Advanced Air Bags)

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bags (for Coupe models)

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bag inflators (for Coupe models)

5. Door-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bag inflators (for Roadster models)

6. Door-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental

air bags (for Roadster models)

7. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air

bags

8. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (50,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

9. Occupant classification system control unit

10. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

11. Satellite sensors

12. Seat belt with pretensioner

NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS-

TEM (front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is designed

to meet certification requirements under U.S.

regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.

However, all of the information, cautions

and warnings in this manual still apply and

must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

front passenger supplemental front-impact air

bag is mounted in the instrument panel above

the glove box. The front air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity frontal collisions,

although they may inflate if the forces in another

type of collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in

certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack

of it) is not always an indication of proper front

air bag operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has

dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors

information from the crash zone sensor, the Air

bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle

switches and the occupant classification sensor

(pattern sensor). Inflator operation is based on

the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for

the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant

classification sensor is also monitored. Based

on information from the sensors, only one front

air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the

crash severity and whether the front occupants

are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front

passenger air bag may be automatically turned

OFF under some conditions, depending on the

information provided by the occupant classifica-

tion sensor. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

the passenger air bag status light will be

illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light

will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off).

(See “Front passenger air bag and status light”

later in this section for further details.) One front

air bag inflating does not indicate improper

performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, contact a NISSAN dealer. If you are

considering modification of your vehicle due to a

disability, you may also contact a NISSAN

dealer. Contact information is contained in the

front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate

a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the head

and chest of the front occupants. They can help

save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,

an inflating front air bag may cause facial

abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do

not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the driver

and passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order

to help protect the front occupants. Because of

this, the force of the front air bag inflating can

increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too

close to, or is against, the air bag module during

inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The supplemental front air bags operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (51,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0988

Front passenger air bag status light

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protection.

Failure to follow all instructions in this

manual concerning the use of seats,

seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger air bag status light is

located on the instrument panel. After the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position,

the front passenger air bag status light illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or

illuminates depending on the front passenger

occupied status. The light operates as follows:

.Unoccupied passenger seat: The is

OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF

and will not inflate in a crash.

.Passenger seat occupied by a small adult,

child or child restraint as outlined in this

section: The illuminates to indicate that

the front passenger air bag is OFF and will

not inflate in a crash.

.Occupied passenger seat and the passen-

ger meets the conditions outlined in this

section: The light is OFF to indicate

that the front passenger air bag is opera-

tional.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as described

below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the

front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate

in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags

in your vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be

automatically turned OFF.

The occupant classification sensor (pattern

sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion

and is designed to detect an occupant and

objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in

the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag

System is designed to turn the passenger air

bag OFF in accordance with the regulations.

Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in

the regulations is on the seat, the occupant

classification sensor can detect it and cause the

air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as

outlined in this manual should not cause the

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat

properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by

sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise

being out of position), this could cause the

sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure

to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly

for the most effective protection by the seat belt

and supplemental air bag.

The occupant classification sensor is designed

to operate as described above to turn the front

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

Information Provided by:

Black plate (52,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

passenger air bag OFF for specified child

restraints. Failing to properly secure child

restrains and to use the ALR mode (child

restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or

move in an accident or sudden stop. This can

also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a

crash instead of being OFF. (See “CHILD

RESTRAINTS” earlier in this section for proper

use and installation.)

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a

crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object being detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could

also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle

occupants are seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you can

monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-

pied. The light will not illuminate when the front

passenger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

passenger air bag status light is illuminated

(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be

that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting

on the seat properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the passenger air bag status light may or may

not be illuminated, depending on the size of the

child and the type of child restraint being used. If

the passenger air bag status light is not

illuminated (indicating that the air bag might

inflate in a crash), it could be that the child

restraint or seat belt is not being used properly.

Make sure that the child restraint is installed

properly, the seat belt is used properly and the

occupant is positioned properly. If the passen-

ger air bag status light is still not illuminated, try

a different child restraint.

If the passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, the system may be sensing

an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is

OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the

system is OFF by using a special tool. However,

until you have confirmed with your dealer that

your air bag is working properly, do not transport

a child in this vehicle.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and

passenger air bag status light will take a few

seconds to register a change in the passenger

seat status. However, if the seat becomes

unoccupied, the air bag status light will remain

off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area

will blink. Have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

.Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instru-

ment panel. Also, do not place any

objects between any occupant and

the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bag inflates.

.Do not place objects with sharp

edges on the seat. Also, do not

place heavy objects on the seat that

will leave permanent impressions in

the seat. Such objects can damage

the seat or occupant classification

sensor (pattern sensor). This can

affect the operation of the air bag

system and result in serious perso-

nal injury.

.Do not use water or acidic cleaners

(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.

This can damage the seat or occu-

1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (53,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

pant classification sensor. This can

also affect the operation of the air

bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

.Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you

may severely burn yourself.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the air bag system. This is to

prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to

the supplemental air bag system.

.Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end

structure. This could affect proper

operation of the front air bag sys-

tem.

.Tampering with the front air bag

system may result in serious perso-

nal injury. Tampering includes

changes to the steering wheel and

the instrument panel assembly by

placing material over the steering

wheel pad and above the instrument

panel or by installing additional trim

material around the air bag system.

.Modifying or tampering with the

front passenger seat may result in

serious personal injury. For exam-

ple, do not change the front seats by

placing material on the seat cushion

or by installing additional trim ma-

terial, such as seat covers, on the

seat that is not specifically designed

to assure proper air bag operation.

Additionally, do not stow any ob-

jects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback.

Such objects may interfere with the

proper operation of the occupant

classification sensor.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the seat belt system. This may

affect the front air bag system.

Tampering with the seat belt system

may result in serious personal in-

jury.

.Work on and around the front air

bag system should be done by a

NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-

trical equipment should also be

done by a NISSAN dealer. The

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not

be modified or disconnected. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the air bag system.

.A cracked windshield should be

replaced immediately by a qualified

repair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

Information Provided by:

Black plate (54,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSS0982

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-

PACT AND ROOF/DOOR-MOUNTED

CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT SUPPLEMEN-

TAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS

The side air bags are located in the outside of

the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air

bags are located in the side roof rails (Coupe) or

upper side of the door trim (Roadster). These

systems are designed to meet voluntary guide-

lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-

position occupants. However, all of the

information, cautions and warnings in this

manual still apply and must be followed.

The side air bags and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate in higher severity side

collisions, although they may inflate if the forces

in another type of collision are similar to those of

a higher severity side impact. They are designed

to inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted. They may not inflate in certain side

collisions on the side where the vehicle is

impacted.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper supplemental side air bag

and curtain air bag operation.

When side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a

fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by

release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and

does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest

and pelvis of the front occupants. Curtain air

bags help to cushion the impact force to the

head of occupants. They can help save lives and

reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating

side air bags and curtain air bags may cause

abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and

curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the

lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bag, and seated

as far away as practical from the door finishers

and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain

air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the out-of-position occupants. Because of this,

the force of the side air bags and curtain air

bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the

occupant is too close to, or is against, these air

bag modules during inflation. The side air bags

and curtain air bags will deflate quickly after the

collision is over.

The side air bags and curtain air bags operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the

systems are operational.

WARNING

.Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door

finisher and the front seat. Such

objects may become dangerous

projectiles and cause injury if a side

air bag inflates.

.Right after inflation, several side air

bags and curtain air bag system

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (55,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

components will be hot. Do not

touch them; you may severely burn

yourself.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent acciden-

tal inflation of the side air bag and

curtain air bag or damage to side air

bag and curtain air bag systems.

.Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel.

This could affect proper operation

of the side air bag and curtain air

bag systems.

.Tampering with the air bag system

may result in serious personal in-

jury. For example, do not change the

front seats by placing material near

the seatback or by installing addi-

tional trim material, such as seat

covers, around the side air bags.

.Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems should

be done by a NISSAN dealer. In-

stallation of electrical equipment

should also be done by a NISSAN

dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side-

impact air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to

the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS

(front seats)

WARNING

.The pretensioners cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

.If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but a pretensioner is not

activated, be sure to have the pre-

tensioner system checked and, if

necessary, replaced by a NISSAN

dealer.

.No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring

of the pretensioner system. This is

to prevent damage to or accidental

activation of the pretensioners.

Tampering with the pretensioner

system may result in serious perso-

nal injury.

.Work around and on the preten-

sioner system should be done by a

NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-

trical equipment should also be

done by a NISSAN dealer. Un-

authorized electrical test equipment

and probing devices should not be

used on the pretensioner system.

.If you need to dispose of the

pretensioner or scrap the vehicle,

contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct

pretensioner disposal procedures

are set forth in the appropriate

NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect

disposal procedures could cause

personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the

supplemental air bag system in certain types of

collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, it

helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

Information Provided by:

Black plate (56,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

becomes involved in certain types of collisions,

helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt

retractor. These seat belts are used the same

way as conventional seat belts.

When a pretensioner seat belt activates, smoke

is released and a loud noise may be heard. The

smoke is not harmful, and it does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow

the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to

reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is

used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner

system. (See “SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT” later in this section for more

details.) If the supplemental air bag warning light

indicates there is a malfunction, have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the seat belt preten-

sioners and guide the buyer to the appropriate

sections in this Owner’s Manual.

SSS1016

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag are placed in the vehicle as

shown in the illustration.

1SRS air bag

The warning labels are located on the surface of

the sun visors.

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, display-

ing in the instrument panel, monitors the

circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag,

front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental

air bag, roof-mounted (Coupe models) or door-

mounted (Roadster models) curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag, and seat belt pretensioner

systems. The monitored circuits include the air

bag systems, pretensioners and all related

wiring.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.

1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Information Provided by:

Black plate (57,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and

pretensioner systems need servicing:

.The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on approximately 7 seconds after

the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

.The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may

not operate properly. They must be checked and

repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-

CEDURE

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags

and pretensioners are designed to activate on a

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light

will remain illuminated after inflation has oc-

curred. Repair and replacement of these sys-

tems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain

air bags, pretensioners and related parts should

be pointed out to the person conducting the

maintenance. The ignition switch should always

be in the LOCK position when working under

the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

.Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioner must

also be replaced. The air bag mod-

ule and pretensioner system should

be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.

The air bag module and preten-

sioner system cannot be repaired.

.The front air bag, side air bag and

curtain air bag systems and the

pretensioner system should be in-

spected by a NISSAN dealer if there

is any damage to the front end or

side portion of the vehicle.

.If you need to dispose of the

supplemental air bag or preten-

sioner systems or scrap the vehicle,

contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct

supplemental air bag and seat belt

pretensioner system disposal pro-

cedures are set forth in the appro-

priate NISSAN Service Manual.

Incorrect disposal procedures could

cause personal injury.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (7,1)

2 Instruments and controls

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Cockpit............................................................ 2-2

Instrument panel ................................................ 2-3

Meters and gauges............................................. 2-4

Speedometer and odometer ............................. 2-5

Tachometer................................................... 2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge ..................... 2-6

Fuel gauge ................................................... 2-6

Triple meter .................................................. 2-7

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ......... 2-8

Checking bulbs ............................................. 2-8

Warning lights ............................................... 2-9

Indicator lights............................................. 2-12

Audible reminders ........................................ 2-15

Vehicle information display.................................. 2-16

Indicators for operation.................................. 2-16

Warnings and alerts...................................... 2-18

Indicators for maintenance.............................. 2-19

Trip computer.............................................. 2-20

Security systems.............................................. 2-25

Vehicle Security System................................. 2-25

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ................. 2-26

Windshield wiper and washer switch .................... 2-27

Rear window defroster switch ............................. 2-29

Headlight and turn signal switch .......................... 2-29

Xenon headlights ......................................... 2-29

Headlight switch .......................................... 2-30

Turn signal switch ........................................ 2-33

Fog light switch (if so equipped)...................... 2-33

Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-33

Horn ............................................................. 2-34

Heated seats (if so equipped) ............................. 2-34

Climate controlled seats (if so equipped) ............... 2-36

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ........... 2-37

Power outlet ................................................... 2-37

Storage ......................................................... 2-38

Instrument pocket (except for navigation system

equipped models) ........................................ 2-38

Cup holders................................................ 2-38

Glove box .................................................. 2-39

Console box ............................................... 2-40

Rear parcel box ........................................... 2-40

Cargo cover (if so equipped) .......................... 2-41

Windows ....................................................... 2-42

Power windows ........................................... 2-42

Interior lights ................................................... 2-44

Map lights .................................................. 2-44

Interior light control switch ............................. 2-44

Vanity mirror lights............................................ 2-45

Cargo area courtesy light (Roadster models) .......... 2-46

Cargo light (Coupe models) ............................... 2-46

Trunk light (Roadster models).............................. 2-46

Information Provided by:

Black plate (8,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) .... 2-47

Programming HomeLink®............................... 2-47

Programming HomeLink®for Canadian

customers .................................................. 2-49

Operating the HomeLink®Universal

Transceiver ................................................. 2-49

Programming trouble-diagnosis ....................... 2-49

Clearing the programmed information................ 2-49

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®button ........ 2-49

If your vehicle is stolen .................................. 2-50

Information Provided by:

Black plate (60,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0652

1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch

(P.5-28)

2. Headlight, fog light and turn signal switch (P.2-29)

3. Meters and Gauges (combimeter) (P.2-4)

4. Triple meter (P.2-7)

5. Windshield wiper and washer switch (P.2-27)

6. Hood release handle (P.3-16)

7. Intelligent Key port (P.5-10)

8. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-14)

9. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)

— Menu control switch or tuning switch (P.4-77)

— BACK switch (P.4-77)

— Phone switch (if so equipped) (P.4-80)

— Volume control switches (P.4-77)

— Source select switch (P.4-77)

10. Tilt steering lever (P.3-36)

11. Steering wheel

— Horn (P.2-34)

— Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-26)

12. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side)

— Cruise control switches (P.5-21)

13. Selector lever for automatic transmission (P.5-12)/

Shift lever for manual transmission (P.5-16)

14. Parking brake (P.5-20)

COCKPIT

2-2 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (61,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0653

1. Ventilator (P.4-23)

2. Center display and multi-function control panel (if

so equipped) (P.4-2) or Instrument pocket (if so

equipped) (P.2-38)

— Navigation system* (if so equipped)

— Vehicle information and setting buttons

(if so equipped) (P.4-6)

— Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System

(if so equipped) (P.4-80, P.4-104)

3. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-32)

4. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-26)

5. Fuse box cover (P.8-21)

6. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-7)

7. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-33)

8. Seat heater switch (if so equipped) (P.2-34) or

Climate controlled seat switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-36)

9. Soft top operating switch (for Roadster models)

(P.3-21)

10. SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) switch

(if so equipped) (P.5-17)

11. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-24)

— Rear window defroster switch (P.2-29)

12. Audio system (P.4-30)

13. Power outlet (P.2-37)

14. Glove box (P.2-39)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instruments and controls 2-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (62,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0509

1. ENTER/NEXT switch (P.2-20)

2. Fuel gauge (P.2-6)

3. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-8)

4. Tachometer (P.2-5)

5. Speedometer (P.2-5)

6. Instrument brightness control switch (P.2-32)

7. Vehicle information display (P.2-16)

8. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-6)

9. Transmission position indicator (if so equipped)

(P.2-12)

— SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) indicator

(if so equipped) (P.5-17)

SSI0521

10. Odometer/Twin trip odometer control knob (P.2-5)

11. Odometer/Twin trip odometer (P.2-5)

12. Engine oil temperature gauge (P.2-7)

13. Voltmeter (P.2-7)

14. Clock (P.2-7, P.2-23)

METERS AND GAUGES

2-4 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (63,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3973

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in

miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour

(km/h).

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer *

1and twin trip odometer *

are displayed when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET knob *

changes the display as follows:

TRIP A ?TRIP B ?TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET knob *

3for more

than 1 second resets the trip odometer to zero.

SIC3974

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the

engine into the red zone *

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce

engine speed. Operating the engine in

the red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

Instruments and controls 2-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (64,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3975

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-

perature.

The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range when the gauge points within the

zone *

1shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant

temperature near the hot (H) end of the

normal range, reduce vehicle speed to

decrease temperature. If gauge is over

the normal range, stop the vehicle as

soon as safely possible. If the engine is

overheated, continued operation of the

vehicle may seriously damage the en-

gine. See “IF YOUR VEHICLE OVER-

HEATS” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section for immediate action required. SIC3976

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge

registers “E” (Empty).

The low fuel warning appears on the

vehicle information display when the amount of

fuel in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as

it is convenient, preferably before the gauge

reaches “E”. There will be a small reserve of fuel

in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches “E”.

2-6 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (65,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

.If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon

as possible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by

a NISSAN dealer.

.For additional information, see

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

later in this section.

SIC4003

Triple meter

1. Engine oil temperature gauge

2. Voltmeter

3. Clock

TRIPLE METER

Engine oil temperature gauge

If the engine oil temperature gauge *

indicates more than 2808F (1408C) while

driving, reduce the engine speed (RPM)

and drive at a slow speed.

When the engine oil temperature is high,

the engine protection mode, which helps

reduce the chance of engine damage,

could activate and automatically decrease

engine power. Driving while the engine oil

temperature is high may result in engine

damage.

Voltmeter

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the volt meter *

2indicates the battery

voltage. When the engine is running, it indicates

the generator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop below

the normal range. If the needle is not in the

normal range (11 to 15 volts) while the engine is

running, it may indicate that the charging system

is not functioning properly. Have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Clock

If necessary, adjust the clock *

3on the setting

screen of the vehicle information display. (See

“CLOCK” later in this section.)

If the power supply is disconnected, the clock

will not indicate the correct time. Readjust the

time.

Instruments and controls 2-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (66,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light

Master warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Seat belt warning light and chime Rear fog light indicator light*

Automatic transmission check warning light* Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Brake warning light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light Soft top indicator light (Roadster models)

Transmission position indicator* SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) indi-

cator*

Charge warning light Cruise indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator

light

Intelligent Key system warning light High beam indicator light *: if so equipped

Low tire pressure warning light Low beam indicator light

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake

and push the ignition switch to the ON position

without starting the engine. The following lights

will come on (if so equipped):

, or , , ,

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off (if so equipped):

, or , , , , ,

If any light does not come on, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the

electrical system. Have the system checked by

a NISSAN dealer.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-

played on the vehicle information display. (See

“VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” later in

this section.)

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-8 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (67,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING LIGHTS

or Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates

the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running, or while driving, it may

indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-

tance. (See “BRAKE SYSTEM” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

Automatic transmission check

warning light (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the light comes on for 2 seconds. If the

light comes on at any other time, it may indicate

the transmission is not functioning properly.

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair

the transmission.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake

and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light comes on when the parking brake is

applied.

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the

light comes on while the engine is running with

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle

and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. (See “BRAKE AND CLUTCH

FLUID” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warningsystemcheckedbyaNISSAN

dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator:

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

brake system checked, and if necessary re-

paired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See

“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”

earlier in this section.)

WARNING

.Your brake system may not be

working properly if the warning light

is on. Driving could be dangerous. If

you judge it to be safe, drive care-

fully to the nearest service station

for repairs. Otherwise, have your

vehicle towed because driving it

could be dangerous.

.Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or low brake

fluid level may increase your stop-

ping distance and braking will re-

quire greater pedal effort as well as

pedal travel.

.If the brake fluid level is below the

minimum or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked at a

NISSAN dealer.

Instruments and controls 2-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (68,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not

functioning properly. Turn the engine off and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,

broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a

NISSAN dealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See

“ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.)

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Such damage is not cov-

ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as

soon as it is safe to do so.

Intelligent Key system warning light

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds

and then turns off.

This light warns of a malfunction with the

electrical steering lock system (if so equipped)

or the Intelligent Key system.

If the light comes on while the engine is

stopped, it may be impossible to free the

steering lock (if so equipped) or to start the

engine. If the light comes on while the engine is

running, you can drive the vehicle. However in

these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for repair

as soon as possible.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is pushed ON, this light

illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label. The low tire pressure warning

light does not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to

the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-

SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section and “TIRE

PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”

in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

pushed ON. The light will remain on after the 1

2-10 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (69,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

For additional information, see “TIRE PRES-

SURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

.If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch pushed ON, have

the vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

.If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle

speed, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop the vehicle as

soon as possible. Driving with un-

der-inflated tires may permanently

damage the tires and increase the

likelihood of tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shownontheTireandLoading

Information label to turn the low

tire pressure warning light OFF. If

the light still illuminates while driv-

ing after adjusting the tire pressure,

a tire may be flat. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible.

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after the 1 minute. Con-

tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

CAUTION

.The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure

to check the tire pressure regularly.

.If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 16 MPH (25

km/h), the TPMS may not operate

correctly.

.Be sure to install the specified size

of tires to the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the master warning light illuminates if any of the

following are displayed on the vehicle informa-

tion display:

.No key warning

.Low fuel warning

.Low washer fluid warning

.Parking brake release warning

.Door/rear hatch open warning

.Loose fuel cap warning

See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” later

in this section.

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat

belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition

switch is pushed to the ON position, and will

remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is

fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound

for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt

Instruments and controls 2-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (70,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the front

passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not

fastened when the front passenger’s seat is

occupied. For 5 seconds after the ignition

switch is in the ON position, the system does

not activate the warning light for the front

passenger.

See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning light

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

will illuminate. The air bag warning light will turn

off after about 7 seconds if the front air bag, side

air bag and curtain air bag systems and/or

pretensioner system are operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag systems

and/or pretensioner system need servicing, and

your vehicle must be taken to your nearest

NISSAN dealer.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

.The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

.The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental

Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioner seat

belt may not function properly.

For additional information, see “SUPPLEMEN-

TAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag

systems and/or pretensioner system

will not operate in an accident. To help

avoid injury to yourself or others, have

your vehicle checked by a dealer as

soon as possible.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

warning light

The light will blink when the VDC system or the

traction control system is operating, thus alerting

the driver that the vehicle is nearing its traction

limits. The road surface may be slippery.

When the vehicle dynamic control warning light

illuminates when the vehicle dynamic control

system is turned on, this light alerts the driver to

the fact that the vehicle dynamic control

system’s fail-safe mode is operating, for example

the vehicle dynamic control system may not be

functioning properly. Have the system checked

by a NISSAN dealer. If a malfunction occurs in

the system, the vehicle dynamic control system

function will be canceled but the vehicle is still

driveable. For additional information, see “VE-

HICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Transmission position indicator

(if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, the indicator shows the transmission

position.

For AT models:

In the manual shift mode, when the transmission

does not shift to the selected gear due to the

transmission protection mode, the AT position

indicator light will blink and a buzzer will sound.

(See “DRIVING THE VEHICLE” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.)

2-12 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (71,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Cruise indicator light

Cruise main switch indicator:

This light illuminates when the cruise control

main switch is pushed. The light turns off when

the main switch is pushed again. When the

cruise main switch indicator light illuminates, the

cruise control system is operational. (See

“CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.)

Cruise malfunction:

If the cruise indicator light blinks while the

engine is running, it may indicate the cruise

control system is not functioning properly. Have

the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See

“CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.)

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light ( ),

located on the center of the instrument panel,

will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be

OFF depending on how the front passenger

seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status light opera-

tion,see“NISSANADVANCEDAIRBAG

SYSTEM (front seats)” in the “1. Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

This light comes on when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam is

selected.

Low beam indicator light

The light illuminates when the headlight switch is

turned to the position.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on

steady or blinks while the engine is running, it

may indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

The malfunction indicator light may also come on

steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or

if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make

sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 US

gallons (14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine

is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not

ready for an emission control system inspection/

maintenance test. (See “READINESS FOR

INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST” in

the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section.)

Operation:

The malfunction indicator light will come on in

one of two ways:

.Malfunction indicator light on steady — An

emission control system malfunction has

been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if

the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in

the vehicle information display. If the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install

the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a few

driving trips. If the light does not turn

off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not

need to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

.Malfunction indicator light blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system.

To reduce or avoid emission control system

damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

Instruments and controls 2-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (72,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

(72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop

blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN

dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

Rear fog light indicator light (if so

equipped)

The rear fog light indicator light illuminates when

the rear fog light is on. (See “FOG LIGHT

SWITCH” later in this section.)

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the

ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This function

indicates the security system equipped on the

vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning, this light

will remain on while the ignition switch is in the

ON position. For additional information, see

“SECURITY SYSTEMS” later in this section.

Soft top indicator light (Roadster

models)

This light illuminates when the soft top is being

operated or it is stopped before reaching a full

open/close state. When the top is fully opened

or closed, the light will turn off.

The light blinks while the soft top is not fully

opened or closed under the following condi-

tions:

.When the vehicle is driven.

.When the selector lever or shift lever is in

the R (Reverse) position.

Be sure to fully open or close the soft top when

driving the vehicle.

The soft top can be moved with the soft top

operating switch only under all of the following

conditions:

.When the vehicle is stopped.

.When the ignition switch is ON.

.When the trunk is closed.

.When the selector lever or shift lever is in a

position other than the R (Reverse) position.

CAUTION

Operate the soft top with the engine

running to prevent a discharged battery.

When the soft top is operating, if any of the

above conditions are discontinued or any of the

following conditions are met, the top will stop

operating.

.When the selector lever or shift lever is in

the R (Reverse) position.

.When the vehicle moves at a speed of 3

MPH (5 km/h) or more.

.When the battery voltage is extremely low.

.When the temperature of the soft top

system becomes extremely high.

Release the operating switch, and push it again

under the above conditions until the top is fully

opened or closed. The soft top indicator light will

turn off when the top operation is completely

2-14 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (73,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

finished.

If the soft top indicator light illuminates with the

ignition switch ON, it may indicate the electric

soft top control unit is not functioning properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible.

For more details about the electric soft top

operation, see “SOFT TOP (Roadster models)”

in the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”

section.

SynchroRev Match mode

(S-MODE) indicator

(if so equipped)

This indicator will illuminate when the

SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) is acti-

vated. (“SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) (if

so equipped for Manual Transmission models)”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

The light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off

indicator light

The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic

control off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates that the vehicle dynamic control

system and traction control system are not

operating.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side door is

opened while the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC position or pushed to the OFF or

LOCK position with the Intelligent Key left in the

Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position, and take

the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the

vehicle.

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver side door is

opened with the light switch in the or

position and the ignition switch in the ACC, OFF

or LOCK position.

Turn the light switch off when you leave the

vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chime

A chime will sound if the vehicle speed is above

4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking brake applied.

Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will

first occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake pad

the sound will always be heard even if the brake

pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the warning

sound is heard.

Instruments and controls 2-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (74,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3977

The vehicle information display *

1displays the

warnings and information.

SIC3991

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. Engine start operation indicator

This indicator appears when the selector lever is

in the P (Park) position.

This indicator means that the engine will start by

pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal

depressed.

2. Steering lock release malfunction

indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator appears when the steering wheel

cannot be released from the LOCK position.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

2-16 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (75,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

If this indicator appears, push the push-button

ignition switch while lightly turning the steering

wheel right and left.

3. Key insertion indicator

This indicator appears when the key needs to be

inserted into the key port. (For example, the

Intelligent Key battery is discharged.)

If this indicator appears, insert the key into the

key port in the correct direction. (See “PUSH-

BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section.)

4. Intelligent Key removal indicator

This indicator appears when the driver’s door is

opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and the Intelligent Key placed in

the key port. A key reminder chime also sounds.

If this indicator appears, remove the Intelligent

Key from the key port and take it with you when

leaving the vehicle.

5. NO KEY warning

This warning appears in either of the following

conditions.

No Intelligent Key inside the vehicle:

The warning appears when the door is closed

with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle

and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key:

The warning appears when the ignition switch is

pushed from the LOCK position and the

Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the

system. You cannot start the engine with an

unregistered key. Use the registered Intelligent

Key.

See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section for

more details.

6. SHIFT “P” warning (Automatic Trans-

mission models)

This warning appears when the ignition switch is

pushed to stop the engine with the selector lever

in any position except the P (Park) position.

If this warning appears, move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position or push the ignition

switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound. (See

“INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM” in the “3. Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” section.)

7. “PUSH” warning (Automatic Trans-

mission models)

This warning appears when the selector lever is

moved to the P (Park) position with the ignition

switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT “P”

warning appears.

To push the ignition switch to the OFF position,

perform the following procedure:

SHIFT “P” warning ?(Move the selector

lever to “P”) ?PUSH warning ?(Push the

ignition switch ?ignition switch position is

turned to ON) ?PUSH warning ?(Push the

ignition switch ?ignition switch position is

turned to OFF)

8. Intelligent Key battery discharge in-

dicator

This indicator appears when the Intelligent Key

battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the battery with

a new one. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.)

9. Engine start operation indicator

(Manual Transmission models)

This indicator means that the engine will start by

pushing the ignition switch with the clutch pedal

depressed.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (76,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC4677

WARNINGS AND ALERTS

1. Parking brake release warning

This warning appears when the vehicle speed is

above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is

applied.

2. Low fuel warning

This warning appears when the fuel level in the

tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

reaches the empty (E) position.

There is a small reserve of fuel remaining

in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches

the empty (E) position.

3. Low washer fluid warning

This warning appears when the washer tank fluid

is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary.

(See “WINDOW WASHER FLUID” in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)

4. Door/rear hatch/trunk open warning

(ignition switch is in the ON position)

This warning appears if any of the doors and/or

the rear hatch/trunk are open or not closed

securely. The vehicle icon indicates which door

is open on the display.

5. Loose fuel cap warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is

not tightened correctly after the vehicle has

been refueled. (See “FUEL-FILLER CAP” in the

“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion.)

6. “TIMER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set “TIMER”

indicator activates. You can set the time for up to

6 hours. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later in this

section.)

2-18 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (77,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

7. Low outside temperature warning

This warning appears if the outside temperature

is below 378F(38C). The warning can be set not

to be displayed. (See “TRIP COMPUTER” later

in this section.)

8. SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE)

warning

This warning appears if a system malfunction

occurs. When the warning appears, the S-

MODE function will not operate, but the manual

transmission will operate normally and driving

can be continued. Have the system checked by

a NISSAN dealer.

SIC4237

INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE

1. Engine oil replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for changing the engine oil. You can set or reset

the distance for changing the engine oil. (See

“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

2. Oil filter replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing the oil filter. You can set or reset

the distance for replacing the oil filter. (See

“TRIP COMPUTER” later in this section.)

3. Tire replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing tires. You can set or reset the

distance for replacing tires. (See “TRIP COM-

PUTER” later in this section.)

4. “OTHER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set time comes

for replacing items other than the engine oil, oil

filter and tires. You can set or reset the distance

for replacing the items. (See “TRIP COMPU-

TER” later in this section.)

More maintenance reminders are also available

on the center display. (See “HOW TO USE

INFO BUTTON” in the “4. Center display,

heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems” section.)

Instruments and controls 2-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (78,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3978

TRIP COMPUTER

Switches for the trip computer are located on

the left side of the combination meter panel. To

operate the trip computer, push the switches as

shown above.

AENTER switch

BNEXT switch

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can be

selected by pushing the switch *

Each time the switch *

Ais pushed, the

display will change as follows:

Current fuel consumption ?Average fuel

consumption and speed ?Elapsed time and

trip odometer ?Distance to empty ?Outside

air temperature ?Setting ?Warning check

SIC3673

Current fuel consumption (MPG or l

(liter)/100 km)

The current fuel consumption mode shows the

current fuel consumption.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (79,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3674

Average fuel consumption (MPG or l

(liter)/100 km) and speed (MPH or km/h)

Fuel consumption:

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pushing the switch *

for longer than 1 second. (The average speed is

also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the

display shows “——”.

Speed:

The average speed mode shows the average

vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is

done by pushing the switch *

Bfor longer

than 1 second. (The average fuel consumption is

also reset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds. The

first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows

“——”.

SIC4226

Elapsed time and trip odometer (MILES

or km)

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode shows the time since

the last reset. The displayed time can be reset

by pushing the switch *

Bfor longer than

1 second. (The trip odometer is also reset at the

same time.)

Trip odometer:

The trip odometer mode shows the total

distance the vehicle has been driven since the

last reset. Resetting is done by pushing the

switch *

Bfor longer than 1 second. (The

elapsed time is also reset at the same time.)

Instruments and controls 2-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (80,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3676

Distance to empty (MILES or km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The dte is constantly

being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in

the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warning

feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is

displayed on the screen.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte

display will change to “——”.

.If the amount of fuel added is small, the

display just before the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position may continue to

be displayed.

.When driving uphill or rounding curves, the

fuel in the tank shifts, which may momenta-

rily change the display.

SIC4037

Outside air temperature (8For8C)

The outside air temperature is displayed in 8For

8C in the range of −22 to 1318F(−30 to 558C).

The outside air temperature mode includes a low

temperature warning feature. If the outside air

temperature is below 378F(38C), the warning

“ICY” is displayed on the screen.

The outside temperature sensor is located in

front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected

by road or engine heat, wind directions and

other driving conditions. The display may differ

from the actual outside temperature or the

temperature displayed on various signs or bill-

boards.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (81,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3992

Setting

Setting cannot be made while driving. A

message “Setting can only be operated

when stopped” is also displayed on the

vehicle information display.

The switch *

Aand switch *

Bare

used in the setting mode to select and decide a

menu.

SKIP:

Push the switch *

Ato move to the

warning check mode.

Push the switch *

Bto select other menus.

ALERT:

Alert menu can be set to notify the following

items.

.UPSHIFT

Select this submenu to set the engine speed

(RPM) of the upshift indicator. (See “Upshift

indicator” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section.)

.TIMER

Select this submenu to specify when the

“TIMER” indicator activates.

.ICY

Select this submenu to display the low

outside temperature warning.

To return to the top page of the setting mode,

select “BACK”.

CLOCK:

Clock adjustment can be set on this menu.

.SETTING

Adjust the time (hour and minute) of the

clock on the triple meter.

.RESET

Select this submenu to set the time quickly

to the previous or next hour.

MAINTENANCE:

The maintenance intervals of the following items

can be set or reset for the reminders.

.OIL

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for changing the engine oil.

.FILTER

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for replacing the oil filter.

.TIRE

Select this submenu to set or reset the

distance for replacing tires.

.OTHER

Select this submenu and set or reset the

distance for replacing items other than the

engine oil, oil filter and tires.

To return to the top page of the setting mode,

select “BACK”.

OPTIONS:

The 3 option menus can be set to your

preference.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (82,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.LANGUAGE

Select this submenu to choose English or

French for display.

.UNIT

Select this submenu to choose the unit from

US or METRIC.

.EFFECTS

Select this menu to set the dial effects

described below to on or off.

— The indicator needles sweep in the

meters when the engine is started.

To return to the top page of the setting mode,

select “BACK”.

SIC3993

Warning check

To see if there are any of the following warnings

and corresponding details, select this menu.

.No key warning

.Low fuel warning

.Low washer fluid warning

.Parking brake release warning

.Door/rear hatch open warning

.Loose fuel cap warning

SKIP:

Push the switch *

Ato move to the

warning check mode.

Push the switch *

Bto select other menus.

DETAIL:

This item is available only when a warning is

displayed.

Select this menu to see the details of warnings.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (83,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC2132

Your vehicle has two types of security systems,

as follows:

.Vehicle security system

.NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown by the

security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors,

hood or rear hatch when the system is armed. It

is not, however, a motion detection type system

that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior

or exterior vehicle components in all situations.

Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s)

in the vehicle, and always lock it when un-

attended. Be aware of your surroundings, and

park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection,

such as component locks, identification markers,

and tracking systems, are available at auto

supply stores and specialty shops. Your

NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment.

Check with your insurance company to see if

you may be eligible for discounts for various

theft protection features.

SIC2045

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the

windows are open.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

4. Close all doors, hood and rear hatch/trunk.

Lock all doors and trunk (Roadster models).

The doors can be locked with the Intelligent

Key, door handle request switch, power

door lock switch or mechanical key.

5. Confirm that the security indicator light

comes on. The security indicator light stays

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Instruments and controls 2-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (84,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle

security system is now pre-armed. After

about 30 seconds the vehicle security

system automatically shifts into the armed

phase. The security light begins to flash

once every approximately 3 seconds. If,

during this 30-second pre-arm time period,

the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is

pushed to ACC or ON, the system will not

arm.

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will activate

with all doors, hood and rear hatch locked

withtheignitionswitchintheLOCK

position. When pushing the ignition switch

to the ACC or ON position, the system will

be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the follow-

ing alarm:

.The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

.The alarm automatically turns off after

approximately 1 minute. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with

again.

The alarm is activated by:

.Unlocking the door or opening the rear

hatch without using the button on the

Intelligent Key, the door handle request

switch or the mechanical key. (Even if the

door is opened by releasing the door inside

lock knob, the alarm will activate.)

.Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by

pushing the unlock button on the Intelligent Key,

the door handle request switch or using the

mechanical key. The alarm will not stop if the

ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON

position.

If the system does not operate as de-

scribed above, have it checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS-

TEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered Intelligent Key. Never leave these

keys in the vehicle.

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (85,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC2045

Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located on the

meter panel. It indicates the status of the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the ignition switch is in the

LOCK, ACC or OFF position. This function

indicates the security systems equipped on the

vehicle are operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer

for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

service as soon as possible. Please bring

all Intelligent Keys that you have when

visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm windshield with

the defroster before you wash the

windshield.

CAUTION

.Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

.Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

.Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based washer fluid

concentrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

window washer reservoir tank.

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (86,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir tank. Do not use the

window washer reservoir tank to

mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

SIC3787

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

1Intermittent — intermittent operation can be

adjusted by turning the knob toward *

(Slower) or *

B(Faster).

When the speed sensing wiper interval

function (for models with navigation system)

is turned on, the intermittent operation

speed varies in accordance with the vehicle

speed. (For example, when the vehicle

speed is high, the intermittent operation

speed will be faster.)

Note that the function is set to disabled as

the factory default setting. To turn this

function on and off, see “HOW TO USE

SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Center dis-

play, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone

and voice recognition systems” section.

2Low — continuous low speed operation

3High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up *

4to have one sweep

operation of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you *

5to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (87,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3980

Type A

SIC3979

Type B

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and

outside mirrors, start the engine and push the

switch *

1on. The indicator light *

2will come

on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster

off.

It will automatically turn off in approximately 15

minutes.

CAUTION

.When cleaning the inner side of the

rear window, be careful not to

scratch or damage the rear window

defroster.

.Do not use the rear window defros-

ter switch while the soft top is being

operated or fully opened. The heat

may damage the top material and/

or components (for Roadster mod-

els).

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

.When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent

an electric shock, never attempt to

modify or disassemble. Always have

your xenon headlights replaced at a

NISSAN dealer.

.Xenon headlights provide consider-

ably more light than conventional

headlights. If they are not correctly

aimed, they might temporarily blind

an oncoming driver or the driver

ahead of you and cause a serious

accident. If headlights are not aimed

correctly, immediately take your ve-

hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have

the headlights adjusted correctly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,

its brightness or color varies slightly. However,

the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

.The life of xenon headlights will be

shortened by frequent on-off opera-

tion. It is generally desirable not to turn

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (88,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

off the headlights for short intervals

(for example, when the vehicle stops at

a traffic signal). Even when the daytime

running lights are active (Canada only),

the xenon headlights do not turn on.

This way the life of the xenon head-

lights is not reduced.

.If the xenon headlight bulb is close to

burning out, the brightness will drasti-

cally decrease, the light will start

blinking, or the color of the light will

become reddish. If one or more of the

above signs appear, contact a NISSAN

dealer. SIC3994

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

1Turn the switch to the position:

The front park, side marker, tail, license

plate and instrument lights will come on.

2Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

SIC3995

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights to be

set so they turn on and off automatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position *

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch

to the OFF, or position.

The autolight system can turn on the headlights

2-30 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (89,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

automatically when it is dark and turn off the

headlights when it is light.

If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position and one of the doors is opened and this

condition is continued, the headlights remain on

for 5 minutes.

Automatic headlights off delay:

You can keep the headlights on for up to 180

seconds after you push the ignition switch to

OFF and open any door then close all the doors.

You can adjust the period of the automatic

headlights off delay from 0 seconds (OFF) to

180 seconds. The factory default setting is 45

seconds.

For automatic headlights off delay setting, see

“Light Off Delay” in the “4. Center display,

heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems” section.

SIC3784A

Be sure not to put anything on top of the

photo sensor *

Alocated on the top of the

instrument panel. The photo sensor con-

trols the autolight; if it is covered, the

photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the

headlights will illuminate.

SIC3996

Headlight beam select

1To select the low beam, put the lever in the

neutral position as shown.

2To select the high beam, push the lever

forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to select the low beam.

3Pulling the lever toward you will flash the

headlight high beam even when the head-

light switch is in the OFF position.

Battery saver system

A chime will sound when the driver side door is

opened with the light switch in the or

position and the ignition switch in the ACC, OFF

or LOCK position.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (90,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

When the headlight switch is in the or

position while the ignition switch is in the ON

position, the lights will automatically turn off 5

minutesaftertheignitionswitchhasbeen

pushed to the OFF position.

When the headlight switch remains in the

or position after the lights automatically

turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition

switch is pushed to the ON position.

CAUTION

.When you turn on the headlight

switch again after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will not

turn off automatically. Be sure to

turn the light switch to the OFF

position when you leave the vehicle

for extended periods of time, other-

wise the battery will be discharged.

.Never leave the light switch on

when the engine is not running for

extended periods of time even if the

headlights turn off automatically.

Daytime running light system (Canada

only)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi-

nate when the engine is started with the parking

brake released. The daytime running lights

operate with the headlight switch in the OFF

position or in the position. Turn the

headlight switch to the position for full

illumination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine

is started, the daytime running lights do not

illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate

once the parking brake is released. The daytime

running lights will remain on until the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position.

WARNING

It is necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could cause

an accident injuring yourself and

others.

SIC3981

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control operates

when the headlight control switch is in the

, or AUTO position (with the autolights

activated).

Push the upper *

Aor lower *

Bswitch to

brighten or dim the instrument panel lights when

driving at night.

2-32 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (91,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3997

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

1Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning

direction. When the turn is completed, the turn

signals cancel automatically.

2Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where lights begin flashing.

SIC4066

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn on the rear fog light, turn the headlight

switch to the position, then turn the fog

light switch to the position.

The switch returns to the OFF position auto-

matically, and the rear fog light will illuminate.

Make sure the indicator light on the instrument

panel illuminates.

To turn off the rear fog light, turn the fog light

switch to the position again.

Make sure the indicator light on the instrument

panel turns off.

SIC2574

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights will flash.

WARNING

.If stopping for an emergency, be

sure to move the vehicle well off the

road.

.Do not use the hazard warning

flashers while moving on the high-

way unless unusual circumstances

force you to drive so slowly that

your vehicle might become a hazard

to other traffic.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-33

Information Provided by:

Black plate (92,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are

on.

The flasher can be actuated with the ignition

switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

SIC3982

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of

the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

those body parts in contact with the

seat. Use of the seat heater by such

people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

.The battery could run down if the

seat heater is operated while the

engine is not running.

.Do not use the seat heater for

extended periods or when no one

is using the seat.

.Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a

blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.

Otherwise, the seat may become

overheated.

.Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in

damage to the heater.

HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

2-34 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (93,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately

with a dry cloth.

.When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar

materials.

.If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SIC2770

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

The switches located on the center console can

be operated independently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select the desired heat range.

.For high heat, push the HI side of the

switch *

.For low heat, push the LO side of the

switch *

.The indicator light *

3will illuminate

when the heater is on.

3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to

the level position. Make sure that the

indicator light turns off.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or

before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

off the switch.

Instruments and controls 2-35

Information Provided by:

Black plate (94,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC2771

The climate controlled seat warms up or cools

down the front seats by blowing warm or cool air

from the surface of the seat. The switches

located on the center console can be operated

independently of each other.

The surface temperature of the climate con-

trolled seats is automatically controlled at an

optimum temperature. However, adjust the

temperature using the control knob if the seats

are too hot or cold.

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob *

Ato the heat side

1or to the cool side *

2. The indicator

light *

Bon the control knob will illuminate.

3. Adjust the desired amount of the air using

the control knob *

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or

cooled, and/or before you leave the vehicle,

be sure to turn the control knob to the OFF

position (center). The indicator light *

Bon

the control knob goes off at the OFF

position.

To check the air filter for the climate

controlled seat, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

.Do not place objects in front of the

intake inlets located behind and

under the front seat. Doing so could

cause improper operation or inter-

ruption of the operation.

.The battery could run down if the

climate controlled seat is operated

while the engine is not running.

.Do not use the climate controlled

seat for extended periods or when

no one is using the seat.

.Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a

blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.

Otherwise, the seat may become

overheated.

.Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in

damage to the climate controlled

seat.

.Any liquid spilled on the seat should

be removed immediately with a dry

cloth.

.The climate controlled seat has air

filters. Do not operate the climate

controlled seat without the air fil-

ters. This may result in damage to

the system.

.When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar

materials.

.If any malfunctions are found or the

climate controlled seat does not

operate, turn the switch off and

have the system checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (if

so equipped)

2-36 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (95,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSD1161

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most

driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor.

If maximum engine power is needed to free a

stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will illuminate.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. (See “VEHICLE

DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM” in the

“5. Starting and driving” section.)

SIC3984

Center console

SIC3985

Lower glove box

The power outlet is located in the center console

and on the lower glove box.

CAUTION

.The outlet and plug may be hot

during or immediately after use.

.Do not use with accessories that

exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

draw. Do not use double adapters or

more than one electrical accessory.

.Use power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

.Avoid using power outlet when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear

window defroster is on.

.This power outlet is not designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit.

.Push the plug in as far as it will go.

If good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may blow.

.Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical acces-

sory being used is turned OFF.

.When not in use, be sure to close

the cap. Do not allow water to

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH POWER OUTLET

Instruments and controls 2-37

Information Provided by:

Black plate (96,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

contact the outlet.

SIC3987

INSTRUMENT POCKET (except for na-

vigation system equipped models)

To open the lid, push the knob up *

To close, push the lid down.

WARNING

Keep the pocket lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

.Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used

to prevent spilling the drink. If the

liquid is hot, it can scald you or your

passenger.

.Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

STORAGE

2-38 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (97,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC4071

A cup holder is located on the center console.

SIC3988

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

.Do not use bottle holder for any

other objects that could be thrown

about in the vehicle and possibly

injure people during sudden braking

or an accident.

.Do not use bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

SIC3999

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle *

To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.

To lock *

2/unlock *

3the glove box, use the

mechanical key. For the mechanical key usage,

see “KEYS” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section.

Instruments and controls 2-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (98,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC4070

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, push the button *

and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until latched.

SIC3989

REAR PARCEL BOX

The rear parcel box is located behind the right-

side seat.

To open the rear parcel box, pull the upper part

of the lid to position *

1or *

To remove the rear parcel box, pull the lid to

position *

3with a greater force until it

unlatches. And then, pull the rear parcel box to

direction *

To install, make sure the two hinges of the rear

parcel box engaged with the holders, then

perform the steps above in the reverse order.

WARNING

Keep the rear parcel box lid closed

while driving to help prevent injury in an

accident or a sudden stop.

2-40 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (99,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC4026

CARGO COVER (if so equipped)

The cargo cover keeps the contents in the cargo

area hidden from the outside.

To use the cargo cover, pull it out and hang both

sides on the hooks *

1located on the inside of

the rear hatch.

SIC3990

To remove the cargo cover unit, stow the cover

and pull the holder *

2to the opposite side.

WARNING

.Never put anything on the cargo

cover, no matter how small. Any

object on it could cause an injury

in an accident or sudden stop.

.Do not leave the cargo cover in the

vehicle with it disengaged from the

holder.

.Properly secure all cargo with ropes

or straps to help prevent it from

sliding or shifting. Do not place

cargo higher than the seatbacks. In

a sudden stop or collision, unse-

cured cargo could cause personal

injury.

.Your child could be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the child

restraint top tether strap is da-

maged.

— If the cargo cover contacts the

top tether strap when it is at-

tached to the top tether anchor,

remove the cargo cover from the

vehicle or secure it on the cargo

floor below its attachment loca-

tion. If the cargo cover is not

removed, it may damage the top

tether strap during a collision.

— Do not allow cargo to contact

the top tether strap when it is

attached to the top tether an-

chor. Properly secure the cargo

so it does not contact the top

tether strap. Cargo that is not

properly secured or that con-

tacts the top tether strap may

damage the top tether strap

during a collision.

Instruments and controls 2-41

Information Provided by:

Black plate (100,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

.Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before

closing the windows. Use the win-

dow lock switch to prevent unex-

pected use of the power windows.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols and become trapped in the

window. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is in the ON position or for about 45

seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to

the OFF position. If the driver’s or front

passenger’s door is opened during this period

of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is

canceled.

The power window switches will be deactivated

during soft top operation (Roadster models).

SIC3286

Main power window switch (driver’s

side)

1. Driver side window

2. Front passenger side window

3. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push down *

Aor

pull up *

Bthe switch and hold it. The main

switch (driver side switches) will open or close

all the windows.

Locking passengers’ window

When the lock button *

Cis pushed in, only the

driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

SIC3241

Passenger side power window switch

The passenger side switch will open or close

only the corresponding window. To open or

close the window, push down or pull up the

switch and hold it.

WINDOWS

2-42 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (101,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3288

Automatic operation

To fully open or close the window, completely

push down or pull up the switch and release it; it

need not be held. The window will automatically

open or close all the way. To stop the window,

just push or lift the switch in the opposite

direction.

A light push or pull on the switch will cause the

window to open or close until the switch is

released.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

window.

If the control unit detects something caught in

the window as it is closing, the window will be

immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the window is closed by automatic operation

when the ignition switch is in the ON position or

for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is

pushed to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window

occurs.

Automatic window lowering (Roadster

models)

When the soft top operating switch is pressed,

the power windows will automatically be low-

ered completely. The windows do not rise

automatically after the soft top open/close

operation is completed. Use the power window

switches to raise them.

Automatic adjusting function

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from

the battery terminal, do not close either

of the front doors. The automatic win-

dow adjusting function will not work

and the side roof panel may be da-

maged.

The power window has an automatic adjusting

function. When the door is being opened, the

window is automatically lowered slightly to avoid

contact between the window and the side roof

panel. When the door is closed, the window is

automatically raised slightly.

While the automatic adjusting function does not

work, the window will be controlled as follows:

.When the door is opened, the window

lowers for approximately 2 seconds.

Instruments and controls 2-43

Information Provided by:

Black plate (102,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.While the door is open, the window cannot

be raised.

If the windows do not close automatically

If the power window automatic function (closing

only) does not operate properly, perform the

following procedure to initialize the power

window system.

1. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

2. Close the door and soft top (Roadster

models).

3. Open the window completely by operating

the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to

close the window, and then hold the switch

more than 3 seconds after the window is

closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Operate

the window by the automatic function to

confirm the initialization is complete.

6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for other

windows.

If the power window automatic function does

not operate properly after performing the pro-

cedure above, have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

SIC4238

MAP LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on

or off.

SIC4239

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

The interior light control switch has three

positions: ON, DOOR and OFF.

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position *

1the

map lights will illuminate.

DOOR position

When the switch is in the DOOR position *

the map lights will illuminate under the following

conditions:

.ignition switch is switched to the OFF or

LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-44 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (103,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.doors are unlocked by pushing the UN-

LOCK button on the Intelligent Key or door

handle request switch with the ignition

switch in the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.any door is opened and then closed with the

ignition switch in the LOCK position

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

.any door is opened with the ignition switch

in the ACC or ON position

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go off.

The lights will also turn off after 15

minutes when the lights remain illumi-

nated after the ignition switch has been

pushed to the OFF or LOCK position to

prevent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

When the auto interior illumination is set to the

OFF position (see “VEHICLE INFORMATION

AND SETTINGS (models with navigation sys-

tem)” in the “4. Center display, heater, air

conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition

systems” section), the lights will illuminate under

the following condition:

.any door is opened with the ignition switch

in any position

— remain on while the door is opened.

When the door is closed, the lights go off.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position *

3, the

lights will not illuminate, regardless of the

condition.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could

result in a discharged battery.

SIC3869

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when

the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.

The lights will also turn off after 15

minutes when the lights remain illumi-

nated to prevent the battery from becom-

ing discharged.

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS

Instruments and controls 2-45

Information Provided by:

Black plate (104,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

The light illuminates simultaneously with the map

light. See “INTERIOR LIGHTS” earlier in this

section.

The light illuminates when the rear hatch is

opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light

will turn off.

The light will also turn off after 15 minutes

when the light remains illuminated after

the ignition switch has been pushed to the

OFF or LOCK position to prevent the

battery from becoming discharged.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is

opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light

turns off.

CARGO AREA COURTESY LIGHT

(Roadster models) CARGO LIGHT (Coupe models) TRUNK LIGHT (Roadster models)

2-46 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (105,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver provides a

convenient way to consolidate the functions of

up to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver:

.Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates, home

and office lighting, entry door locks and

security systems.

.Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the

vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-

connected, HomeLink®will retain all pro-

gramming.

Once HomeLink®Universal Transceiver is

programmed, retain the original transmit-

ter for future programming procedures

(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon

sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes.

For additional information, see “PRO-

GRAMMING HomeLink®” later in this sec-

tion.

WARNING

.Do not use HomeLink®Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by

federal safety standards. (These

standards became effective for

opener models manufactured after

April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener

which cannot detect an object in the

path of a closing garage door and

then automatically stop and reverse,

does not meet current federal safety

standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features in-

creases the risk of serious injury or

death.

.During programming procedure,

your garage door or security gate

may open or close. Make sure that

people and objects are clear of the

garage door, gate, etc. that you are

programming.

.Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink®

To program your HomeLink®Transceiver to

operate a garage door, gate, or entry door

opener, home or office lighting, you need to be

at the same location as the device. Note:

Garage door openers (manufactured after

1996) have “rolling code protection”. To pro-

gram a garage door opener equipped with

“rolling code protection”; you will need to use

a ladder to get up to the garage door opener

motor to be able to access the “smart or learn”

program button.

HomeLink®UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-47

Information Provided by:

Black plate (106,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SIC3612

1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer Home-

Link®buttons (to clear the memory) until the

indicator light *

Ablinks (after 20 seconds).

Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter

1 to 3 in (20 to 70 mm) away from the

HomeLink®surface.

SIC3613

3. Using both hands, simultaneously push and

hold both the HomeLink®button you want to

program and the hand-held transmitter

button.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has

been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator

light on HomeLink®flashes, changing from a

“slow blink” to a “rapid blink”. This could

take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator

light blinks rapidly, both buttons may be

released. The rapidly flashing light indicates

successful programming. To activate the

garage door or other programmed device,

push and hold the programmed HomeLink®

button - releasing when the device begins to

activate.

5. If the indicator light on HomeLink®blinks

rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid,

HomeLink®has picked up a “rolling code”

garage door opener signal. You will need to

proceed with the next steps to train Home-

Link®, completing the programming may

require a ladder and another person for

convenience.

6. Push and release the program button

located on the garage door opener’s motor

to activate the “training mode”. This button is

usually located near the antenna wire that

hangs down from the motor. If the wire

originates from under a light lens, you will

need to remove the lens to access the

training button.

NOTE:

Once you have pushed and released

the training button on the garage door

opener’s motor and the “training light”

is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to

perform step 7. For convenience, use

the help of a second person to assist

when performing this step.

7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing and

releasing the garage door opener training

button) and firmly push and release the

HomeLink®buttonyouhavejustpro-

grammed. Push and release the HomeLink®

2-48 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (107,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

button up to three times to complete the

training.

8. Your HomeLink®button should now be

programmed. To program the remaining

HomeLink®buttons for additional door or

gate openers, follow steps 2 through 8 only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to

“clear” all previously programmed Home-

Link®buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLink®buttons, please

refer to the HomeLink®web site at: www.

homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink®FOR CA-

NADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required

hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after

2 seconds. To program your hand-held trans-

mitter to HomeLink®, continue to push and hold

the HomeLink®button (note steps 2 through 4

under “Programming HomeLink®”) while you

push and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held

transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator

light flashes rapidly (indicating successful pro-

gramming).

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener, etc.,

it is advised to unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possible

damage to the garage door opener com-

ponents.

OPERATING THE HomeLink®UNIVER-

SAL TRANSCEIVER

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver (once pro-

grammed) may now be used to activate the

garage door, etc. To operate, simply push the

appropriate programmed HomeLink®Universal

Transceiver button. The red indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNO-

SIS

If HomeLink®does not quickly learn the hand-

held transmitter information:

.replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

.position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from the Home-

Link®surface.

.push and hold both the HomeLink®and

hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-

ruption.

.position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in

(50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink®

surface. Hold the transmitter in that position

for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink®is not

programmed within that time, try holding the

transmitter in another position - keeping the

indicator light in view at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,

please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs

Department. The phone numbers are located in

the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN-

FORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to

clear all programming, push and hold the two

outside buttons and release when the indicator

light begins to flash (in approximately 20

seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE Home-

Link®BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink®Universal Transcei-

ver button, complete the following.

1. PushandholdthedesiredHomeLink

button. Do not release the button until step

4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position the

hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127

Instruments and controls 2-49

Information Provided by:

Black plate (108,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

mm) away from the HomeLink®surface.

3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter

button.

4. The HomeLink®indicator light will flash, first

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator

light begins to flash rapidly, release both

buttons.

The HomeLink®Universal Transceiver button has

now been reprogrammed. The new device can

be activated by pushing the HomeLink®button

that was just programmed. This procedure will

not affect any other programmed HomeLink®

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the

manufacturer or dealer of those devices for

additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink®Univer-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

2-50 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (109,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

MEMO

Instruments and controls 2-51

Information Provided by:

Black plate (110,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

MEMO

2-52 Instruments and controls

Information Provided by:

Black plate (10,1)

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Keys ............................................................... 3-2

Intelligent Key................................................ 3-2

Valet hand-off................................................ 3-3

Doors.............................................................. 3-4

Locking with mechanical key............................. 3-4

Opening and closing windows with the

mechanical key .............................................. 3-4

Locking with inside lock knob ........................... 3-5

Locking with power door lock switch .................. 3-5

Automatic door locks ...................................... 3-5

Intelligent Key system.......................................... 3-6

Intelligent Key operating range .......................... 3-8

Door locks/unlocks precaution .......................... 3-8

Intelligent Key operation................................... 3-9

Battery saver system..................................... 3-11

Warning signals........................................... 3-11

Troubleshooting guide ................................... 3-12

Remote keyless entry system .............................. 3-13

How to use remote keyless entry system ........... 3-13

Hood ............................................................ 3-16

Rear hatch (Coupe models)................................ 3-17

Rear hatch opener switch .............................. 3-17

Secondary rear hatch release.......................... 3-18

Trunk lid (Roadster models) ................................ 3-19

Trunk lid opener switch.................................. 3-19

Trunk release power cancel switch ................... 3-19

Interior trunk lid release ................................. 3-20

Secondary trunk lid release ............................ 3-21

Soft top (Roadster models) ................................ 3-21

Before operating the top................................ 3-21

When operating the top................................. 3-23

Opening the top .......................................... 3-25

Closing the top............................................ 3-26

Opening the top using the Intelligent Key........... 3-26

Troubleshooting guide ................................... 3-27

If the top does not open or close electrically ...... 3-28

Care of the soft top and the vehicle body .......... 3-32

Front, side and rear unique parts (NISMO

models) ......................................................... 3-32

Fuel-filler door ................................................. 3-34

Opening the fuel-filler door............................. 3-34

Fuel-filler cap .............................................. 3-34

Tilt steering..................................................... 3-36

Manual operation ......................................... 3-36

Sun visors ...................................................... 3-36

Mirrors........................................................... 3-37

Inside mirror................................................ 3-37

Outside mirrors............................................ 3-38

Vanity mirror................................................ 3-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (112,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe

place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If

you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN

does not record any key numbers so it is very

important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, this key can be

duplicated by a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2406

1. Intelligent Keys (2 sets)

2. Mechanical keys (inside the Keys) (2 sets)

3. Key number plate (1 set)

INTELLIGENT KEY

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to your

vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-

nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. The new

keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer

prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your

vehicle. Since the registration process requires

erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-

nents when registering new keys, be sure to take

all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN

dealer.

It is possible that the Intelligent Key functions

become canceled. Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

.Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when driving. The Intelli-

gent Key is a precision device with a

built-in transmitter. To avoid dama-

ging it, please note the following.

— The Intelligent Key is water

resistant; however, wetting may

damage the Intelligent Key. If

the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is com-

pletely dry.

— Do not bend, drop or strike it

against another object.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key

foranextendedperiodina

place where temperatures ex-

ceed 1408F (608C).

— Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key.

— Do not use a magnet key holder.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (113,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

near an electric appliance such

as a television set, personal

computer or cellular phone.

— Do not allow the Intelligent Key

to come into contact with water

or salt water, and do not wash it

in a washing machine. This

could affect the system function.

.If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,

NISSAN recommends erasing the ID

code of that Intelligent Key. This will

prevent the Intelligent Key from

unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding

the erasing procedure, please con-

tact a NISSAN dealer.

SPA2033

Mechanical key

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob at the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

doors, and glove box.

See “DOORS” later in this section and “STO-

RAGE” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-

stalled in the Key.

VALET HAND-OFF

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give

them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the

mechanical key with you to protect your

belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being opened

during valet hand-off, follow the procedures

below.

1. Push the trunk release power cancel switch

to the OFF side (Roadster models).

2. Remove the mechanical key from the In-

telligent Key.

3. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, keeping

the mechanical key in your pocket or bag for

insertion into the Intelligent Key when you

retrieve your vehicle.

See “STORAGE” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (114,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping

to prevent persons from being

thrown from the vehicle. This also

helps keep children and others from

unintentionally opening the doors,

and will help keep out intruders.

.Before opening any door, always

look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

SPA2565

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock

or unlock all doors simultaneously using the

mechanical key.

.Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the

front of the vehicle *

1will lock all doors.

.Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once

to the rear of the vehicle *

2will unlock the

driver’s door. After returning the key to the

neutral position *

3, turning it to the rear

again within 60 seconds will unlock all

doors.

.You can switch the lock system to the mode

that allows you to open all the doors when

the key is turned once. (See “HOW TO USE

SETTING BUTTON” in the “4. Center dis-

play, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone

and voice recognition systems” section.)

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWS

WITH THE MECHANICAL KEY

The driver’s door key operation also allows you

to open and close the window that is equipped

with the automatic open/close function. (See

“POWER WINDOWS” in the “2. Instruments

and controls” section.)

To open the window, turn the driver’s door key

cylinder to the rear of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second. The door is unlocked and the

window keeps opening while turning the key.

This function can also be performed by pushing

and holding the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key. (See “REMOTE KEYLESS EN-

TRY SYSTEM” later in this section.)

To close the window, turn the driver’s door key

cylinder to the front of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second. The door is locked and the

window keeps closing while turning the key.

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (115,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SPA2566

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door individually, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position *

1then close the

door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the

unlock position *

When locking the door without an Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the Intelli-

gent Key inside the vehicle.

SPA2300

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

Operating the power door lock switch will lock

or unlock all the doors and trunk lid. The

switches are located on the driver’s and front

passenger’s door armrests.

To lock the doors and trunk lid, push the power

door lock switch to the lock position *

1with the

driver’s or front passenger’s door open, then

close the door and trunk lid.

When locking the door this way, be certain

not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock the doors, the fuel-filler door and the

trunk, push the power door lock switch to the

unlock position *

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver or front

passenger) is moved to the lock position with

the Intelligent Key in the port and any door open,

all doors and the trunk lid will lock and unlock

automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the

vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any

door open, all doors and the trunk lid will unlock

automatically and a chime will sound after the

door and/or the trunk lid are closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelligent

Key from being accidentally locked inside the

vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

.All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

.All doors unlock automatically when the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The automatic unlock function can be

deactivated or activated. To deactivate or

activate the automatic door unlock system,

perform the following procedure:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (116,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,

push and hold the power door lock switch to

the position (UNLOCK) for more than 5

seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will

flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard

indicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the

OFF and ON position again between each

setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is

deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. To

unlock the door manually, use the inside lock

knob or the power door lock switch (driver’s or

front passenger’s side).

WARNING

.Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

.The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are

pushed. The FAA advises that the

radio waves may affect aircraft na-

vigation and communication sys-

tems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane.

Makesurethebuttonsarenot

operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored during a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door and rear hatch/trunk lid locks using the

remote controller function or pushing the re-

quest switch on the vehicle without taking the

key out from a pocket or purse. The operating

environment and/or conditions may affect the

Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

.Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehi-

cle.

.Never leave the Intelligent Key in

the vehicle when you leave the

vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The

Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio

waves. Environmental conditions may interfere

with the operation of the Intelligent Key system

under the following operating conditions.

.When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such

as a TV tower, power station and broad-

casting station.

.When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,

and CB radio.

.When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

.When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

.When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (117,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

computer.

.When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged, insert the Intelligent Key into the

Intelligent Key port to start the engine. Replace

the discharged battery with a new one as soon

as possible. For more details, see “PUSH-

BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-

ing radio waves, if the key is left near equipment

which transmits strong radio waves, such as

signals from a TV and personal computer, the

battery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a

battery, see “INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.

For models with a steering wheel lock mechan-

ism: Because the steering wheel is locked

electrically, unlocking the steering wheel with

the ignition switch in the LOCK position is

impossible when the vehicle battery is comple-

tely discharged. Pay special attention that the

vehicle battery is not completely discharged.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered

and used with one vehicle. For information about

the purchase and use of additional Intelligent

Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

.Do not allow the Intelligent Key,

which contains electrical compo-

nents, to come into contact with

water or salt water. This could affect

the system function.

.Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

.Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

.Do not change or modify the Intel-

ligent Key.

.Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,

immediately wipe until it is comple-

tely dry.

.If the outside temperature is below

148F(−108C), the battery of the

Intelligent Key may not function

properly.

.Do not place the Intelligent Key for

an extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).

.Do not attach the Intelligent Key

with a key holder that contains a

magnet.

.Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a mag-

netic field, such as a TV, audio

equipment, personal computer or

cellular phone.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent

the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to

operate the vehicle. For information regarding

the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN deal-

er.

The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For

information about disabling the Intelligent Key

function, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (118,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SPA2567

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING

RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch *

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-

ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent

Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)

from each request switch *

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone who does not

carry the Intelligent Key to push the request

switch to lock/unlock the doors including the

rear hatch/trunk lid. SPA2568

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-

TION

.Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the In-

telligent Key is outside the vehicle.

.After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

.To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

key with you and then lock the doors.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (119,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

.The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing

doors with the door handle request switch)

can be set to remain inactive. (See “VEHI-

CLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS

(models with navigation system)” in the “4.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems” sec-

tion.)

SPA2569

Coupe models

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the key out from your pocket or bag.

SPA2570

SPA2571

Coupe models

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (120,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SPA2680

Roadster models

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors and the rear hatch/

trunk lid by pushing the door handle request

switch (driver’s or front passenger’s) *

Aor the

rear hatch/trunk request switch *

Bwithin the

range of operation.

When you lock or unlock the doors and the rear

hatch/trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash and

the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a

confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard

indicator and horn mode” later in this section.

Locking doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and

fuel-filler door

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position

and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key

with you.*1

2. Close all the doors and the rear hatch/trunk

lid.*2

3. Push the door handle request switch (dri-

ver’s or front passenger’s) or the rear hatch/

trunk request switch while carrying the

Intelligent Key with you.*3

4. All the doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and fuel-

filler door will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will lock

with the Intelligent Key while the ignition

switch is in the ACC or ON position.

*2: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will not

lock with the Intelligent Key while any door

or the rear hatch/trunk lid is open.

*3: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will not

lock by pushing the door handle request

switch or the rear hatch/trunk request switch

with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.

However, when an Intelligent Key is inside

the vehicle, doors and the rear hatch/trunk

lid can be locked with another registered

Intelligent Key.

Unlocking doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and

fuel-filler door

1. Push the door handle request switch (dri-

ver’s or front passenger’s) or the rear hatch/

trunk request switch once while carrying the

Intelligent Key with you.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-

side chime sounds once. The corresponding

door and the fuel-filler door or the rear

hatch/trunk lid will unlock.

3. Push the door handle request switch or the

rear hatch/trunk request switch again within

60 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-

side chime sounds once again. All the doors

and the rear hatch/trunk lid will unlock.

All doors, the rear hatch/trunk lid and the fuel-

filler door will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within 1

minute after pushing the request switch while

the doors are locked.

.Opening any door and/or the rear hatch/

trunk lid

.Pushing the ignition switch

.Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (121,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

gent Key port.

During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all

doors will be locked automatically after another

1 minute.

Opening rear hatch/trunk lid

To open only the rear hatch/trunk lid, perform the

following procedure.

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the rear hatch/trunk lid opener switch

3. The rear hatch/trunk lid will open.

Lockout protection:

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protec-

tion is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent

Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will

sound and all doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid

will unlock.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are met for 60

minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the

power supply to prevent battery discharge.

.The ignition switch is in the ACC position,

and

.All doors are closed, and

.The selector lever is in the P (Park) position

(Automatic Transmission models).

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the

Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or

to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen,

chime or beep sounds inside and outside the

vehicle and a warning displays in the vehicle

information display.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warning

displays, be sure to check the vehicle and

Intelligent Key.

See “TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE” later in

this section and “VEHICLE INFORMATION

DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (122,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch

to stop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display

and the inside warning chime sounds con-

tinuously (Automatic Transmission models).

The selector lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

When opening the driver’s door

to get out of the vehicle The inside warning chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent

Key port.

Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-

gent Key port.

When closing the door after get-

ting out of the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the display,

the outside chime sounds 3 times and the

inside warning chime sounds for approximately

a few seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-

tion.

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display

and the outside chime sounds continuously

(Automatic Transmission models).

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF

position and the selector lever is not in

the P (Park) position.

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position and push the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

When closing the door with the

inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds

and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle

and cargo/trunk room area. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle

request switch to lock the door The outside chime sounds for a few seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle

and cargo/trunk room area. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

When closing the trunk lid

(Roadster models)

The outside chime sounds for a few seconds

and all doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When shifting the selector lever

to the P (Park) position The inside warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ON position. The ignition switch is in the OFF position.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (123,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pushed.

The FAA advises that the radio waves

may affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate the

Intelligent Key while on an airplane.

Make sure the buttons are not operated

unintentionally when the unit is stored

during a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel-filler

door, activate the panic alarm and open the

windows by pushing the buttons on the Intelli-

gent Key from outside the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelligent

Key can operate at a distance of approximately

33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective

distance depends upon the conditions around

the vehicle.)

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with

one vehicle. For information concerning the

purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys,

contact a NISSAN dealer.

The lock and unlock buttons on the Intelligent

Key will not operate when:

.the distance between the Intelligent Key and

the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m).

.the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

After locking with the remote keyless entry

function, pull the door handle to make sure the

doors are securely locked.

The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range varies

depending on the environment. To securely

operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach

the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door. SPA2252B

1. LOCK button

2. UNLOCK button

3. PANIC button

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

When you lock or unlock the doors and rear

hatch/trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash and

the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a

confirmation. For details, see “Setting hazard

indicator and horn mode” later in this section.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (124,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Locking doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and

fuel-filler door

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position

and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key

with you.*1

2. Close all the doors and the rear hatch/trunk

lid.*2

3. Push the LOCK button *

1on the

Intelligent Key.

4. All the doors, the rear hatch/trunk lid and

fuel-filler door will lock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

*1: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will lock

with the Intelligent Key while the ignition

switch is in the ACC or ON position.

*2: Doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will not

lock with the Intelligent Key while any door

or the rear hatch/trunk lid is open.

Unlocking doors, rear hatch/trunk lid and

fuel-filler door

1. Push the UNLOCK button *

2on the

Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

driver’s door and fuel-filler door will unlock.

3. Push the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key again within 60 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again. All

the doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will

unlock.

All doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will be

locked automatically unless one of the following

operations is performed within 1 minute after

pushing the UNLOCK button on the

Intelligent Key while the doors are locked. If

during this 1-minute time period, the UNLOCK

button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all

doors and the rear hatch/trunk lid will be locked

automatically after another 1 minute.

.Opening any door

.Pushing the ignition switch

.Inserting the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-

gent Key port

Opening windows

The UNLOCK button operation also allows

you to open a window that is equipped with the

automatic open/close function. (See “POWER

WINDOWS” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.)

To open the window, push the door UNLOCK

button *

2on the Intelligent Key for about

3 seconds after the door is unlocked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCK

button.

Window cannot be closed using the Intelligent

Key.

The door window can be opened or closed by

turning the metal key in a door lock. (See

“DOORS” earlier in this section.)

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the alarm to call attention as

follows:

1. Push the PANIC button *

3on the Key

for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will

stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

.It has run for 25 seconds, or

.Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key

are pushed. (Note: Panic button should

be pushed for more than 1 second.)

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode

This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn

mode when you first receive the vehicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

LOCK button *

1is pushed, the hazard

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (125,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.

When the UNLOCK button *

2is pushed,

the hazard indicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the system can be

switched to the hazard indicator mode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes

twice. When the UNLOCK button is

pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the

horn operates.

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle or rear hatch/trunk request switch)

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once

OUTSIDE CHIME - once

Remote keyless entry system

(Using or button) HAZARD - twice

HORN - once

HAZARD - once

HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system

(Using door handle or rear hatch/trunk request switch)

HAZARD - twice

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

HAZARD - none

OUTSIDE CHIME - none

Remote keyless entry system

(Using or button) HAZARD - twice

HORN - none

HAZARD - none

HORN - none

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (126,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Switching procedure:

To switch the hazard indicator and horn (chime)

operation, push the LOCK *

1and UN-

LOCK *

2buttons on the Intelligent Key

simultaneously for more than 2 seconds.

.When the hazard indicator mode is set, the

hazard indicator flashes 3 times.

.When the hazard indicator and horn mode is

set, the hazard indicator flashes once and

the horn chirps once.

SPA2572

1. Pull the hood lock release handle *

located below the instrument panel; the

hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever *

2up at the front of the hood

with your fingertips and raise the hood.

3. Hold the insulator *

3of the support rod

and insert its end into the slot *

4on the

front edge of the hood.

4. When closing the hood, store the support

rod to its original position, then slowly close

the hood and make sure it locks into place.

WARNING

.Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the

hood to fly open and result in an

accident.

.If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

HOOD

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (127,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

Do not drive with the rear hatch open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

See “EXHAUST GAS (carbon monox-

ide)” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

SPA2573

REAR HATCH OPENER SWITCH

The rear hatch can be opened by pushing the

rear hatch opener switch when the Intelligent

Key is within the operating range of the rear

hatch lock/unlock function regardless of the

inside lock knob position. (See “INTELLIGENT

KEY SYSTEM” earlier in this section.)

To close the rear hatch, push it down securely. SPA2646

REAR HATCH (Coupe models)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (128,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

NISMO models

CAUTION

Do not use the rear spoiler *

Ato open

or close the rear hatch. Doing so may

damage the rear spoiler.

Always hold area *

Bto open or close the rear

hatch.

SPA2580

SECONDARY REAR HATCH RELEASE

The secondary rear hatch release mechanism

allows opening the rear hatch in the event of

discharged battery or emergency.

The release handle is located under the cargo

room floor. To open the rear hatch from the

passenger compartment, perform the following

procedure.

1. Remove the cargo floor mat.

2. Find the rear hatch release handle *

1as

shown in the illustration.

3. Free the release handle that is fixed with

velcro.

4. Firmly pull the release handle until the rear

hatch releases.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (129,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

See “EXHAUST GAS (carbon mon-

oxide)” in the “5. Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

.Closely supervise children when

they are around cars to prevent

them from playing and becoming

locked in the trunk where they could

be seriously injured. Keep the car

locked, with the trunk closed, when

not in use, and prevent children’s

access to Intelligent Keys.

SPA2692

TRUNK LID OPENER SWITCH

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the

trunk lid opener switch when the Intelligent Key

is within the operating range of the trunk lock/

unlock function regardless of the inside lock

knob position. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY SYS-

TEM” earlier in this section.)

SPA2681

TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCEL

SWITCH

When the switch located inside the glove box is

in the OFF position *

A, the power to the trunk

lid will be canceled and the trunk lid cannot be

opened by the trunk lid opener or trunk request

switch.

When you have to leave the vehicle with a valet

and want to keep your belongings safe in the

glove box and the trunk, push this switch to OFF

and lock the glove box with the mechanical key.

Then leave the vehicle and the Intelligent Key

with the valet and keep the mechanical key with

you.

TRUNK LID (Roadster models)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (130,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

See “KEYS” earlier in this section.

To connect the power to the trunk lid, push the

switch to the ON *

Bposition.

SPA2682

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

trunk lid securely latched, when not in

use, and prevent children’s access to

Intelligent Keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism allows

opening of the trunk lid in the event that people

become locked inside the trunk.

Releasing inside the trunk

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the

release handle *

Auntil the lock releases and

push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is

made of a material that glows in the dark after a

brief exposure to ambient light.

The handle *

Ais located inside the trunk

compartment as illustrated.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (131,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SPA2683

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE

The secondary trunk lid release mechanism

allows opening the trunk lid in the event of

discharged battery or emergency.

1. Open the rear parcel box.

2. Remove the cap *

1with a suitable tool *

3. Insert the key into the key cylinder and turn it

counterclockwise. The trunk lid will open.

SPA2685

Interior/exterior view

1. Soft top indicator light (on the combination meter)

2. Soft top operating switch

3. Top lock hole

4. Soft top

5. Top storage lid

6. Trunk lid

7. Rear window

BEFORE OPERATING THE TOP

The soft top of this vehicle is electrically

operated. You can fully open or close the top

only by pressing the operating switch located on

the center console.

The soft top operating switch must be operated

under all of the following conditions:

.When the trunk is closed.

.When the vehicle is stopped.

.When the engine is running.

.When the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

SOFT TOP (Roadster models)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (132,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.When the selector lever or shift lever is in a

position other than the R (Reverse) position.

CAUTION

Always keep the engine running while

operating the soft top. The top will also

operate when the ignition switch is in

the ON position, but run the engine to

prevent a discharged battery.

Be sure to follow the operating instructions, and

all the warnings and cautions in this section.

Improper operation of the top could cause

a system malfunction, damage, or dete-

rioration of the top material and related

parts.

WARNING

.Park the vehicle in a safe and level

place and apply the parking brake.

.Make sure the area is clear of

obstacles and there is enough clear-

ance over the top (for example, in a

garage or a covered area). More

than approximately 6.6 ft (2 m) from

the ground is required to open or

close the top safely. Otherwise, the

top may damage any objects above

it while moving. The top operating

system could also be damaged.

.Do not operate the top in a strong

wind. It could be blown by the wind,

striking someone or damage the

top.

.Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the opening while the vehicle is in

motion or while the top is being

operated.

.In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle with an open top.

Always use seat belts and proper

child restraints.

CAUTION

.Do not operate the top when the

temperature is below 328F(08C).

This may result in damage to the

top material or operating system.

.Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the top, and dry the

surface of the top completely before

opening it.

.Do not open the top when it is wet

or damp. This may cause interior

water damage, stains or mildew on

the top material.

.Be sure to turn off the rear window

defroster switch. Never turn it on

while the top is being operated or

fully opened. The heat may damage

the top material.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (133,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SPA2691

CAUTION

.Do not place any objects between

the top cloth and the structure.

Doing so could interfere with top

operation and cause damage to the

top operating system or the objects.

.Do not place anything on the top

and the storage lid. Even small

items may interfere with the top

operation and could cause damage

to the top or the vehicle body.

.Do not place anything in the top

storage area. The top will not fit

there properly, and this could da-

mage the top and/or the vehicle

body.

.Do not sit or place excessive weight

on the top and the storage lid,

especially when the top is being

operated. The top may be damaged.

.Do not drive the vehicle with the top

partially opened. Always make sure

the top is either fully opened or

closed before driving.

.Secure items so that they cannot be

blown from the vehicle while driving

with the top open.

.Do not operate the top manually

except for emergency cases. Manual

operation may damage the top.

.Be sure to fully open or fully close

the top. Do not release the switch

half way through the roof opening

or closing process. If the top is only

partially opened, significant da-

mage to the top could occur.

Make sure the trunk lid is securely closed before

operating the top.

SPA2706

WHEN OPERATING THE TOP

WARNING

Keep hands and other parts of the body

away from moving parts such as the

top, storage lid, side flap *

Aand power

windows.

CAUTION

Keep all parts of the top linkage clear of

obstructions, or the top latch may not

be securely locked.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (134,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

NOTE:

.In case of low battery or low tempera-

ture, the top may temporarily stop

moving during the operation. This func-

tions to protect the top control me-

chanism, and it is not a malfunction.

.If the top is opened and closed repeat-

edly in a short period of time or the top

operation is stopped while opening or

closing, the top operation may be

automatically stopped to protect the

system. Wait for approximately 5 min-

utes before operating the top again.

SPA1691

Soft top indicator light

The soft top indicator light in the instrument

panel shows the conditions of top operation.

The light illuminates when the soft top is being

operated or if it is stopped before reaching the

fully opened or closed position. When the top is

fully opened or closed, the light will turn off.

The light blinks while the soft top is not fully

opened or closed under the following condi-

tions:

.When the vehicle is driven.

.When the selector lever or shift lever is in

the R (Reverse) position.

Be sure to fully open or close the soft top when

driving the vehicle.

When the soft top is operating, and any of the

following conditions occur, the top will stop

operating.

.When the selector lever or shift lever is in

the R (Reverse) position.

.When the vehicle moves at a speed of 3

MPH (5 km/h) or more.

.When the battery voltage is extremely low.

.When the temperature of the soft top

system becomes extremely high.

Release the soft top operating switch, and push

the switch again to move the top to the fully

opened or closed position. The soft top indicator

light will turn off when the top operation is

completely finished.

If the soft top indicator light illuminates with the

ignition switch ON (whether the top is operated

or not, and when the top is engaged), it may

indicate the top operating system is not

functioning properly. Have your vehicle checked

by a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Automatic window lowering

When the soft top operating switch is pressed,

the power windows will automatically be low-

ered completely. The windows do not rise

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (135,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

automatically after the top operation is com-

pleted. Use the power window switches to raise

them.

SPA2632

OPENING THE TOP

1. Start the engine.

2. Push OPEN on the soft top operating switch

and hold it until the top is fully opened.

.The soft top indicator light will illuminate

while the top is in motion. (In about 20

seconds, the opening movement will

finish and the indicator light turns off.)

.Windows will automatically be fully

opened.

3. Release the switch when the top is fully

opened. (The indicator light turns off.)

NOTE:

If you release the switch and press it again

while the top is being opened, the top will

slightly move to the closing direction, then

start moving to the opening direction

again. The top is designed to move in this

way. It is not a malfunction.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (136,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SPA2633

CLOSING THE TOP

1. Start the engine.

2. Push CLOSE on the soft top operating

switch and hold it until the top is fully closed.

.The soft top indicator light will illuminate

while the top is in motion. (In about 20

seconds, the closing movement will

finish.)

.Windows will automatically be fully

opened.

3. Release the switch when the top is fully

closed. (The indicator light will turn off.)

SPA2570

OPENING THE TOP USING THE IN-

TELLIGENT KEY

The soft top can be opened using the request

switch.

Opening the soft top

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position and

make sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Push the door handle request switch (driver’s or

passenger’s) *

Aand hold it until the soft top is

fully open.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (137,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

If the soft top stops halfway during operation or does not operate normally, follow the procedures shown in the following table. If the procedures in the

following table do not solve the symptom, immediately contact a NISSAN dealer for the inspection.

Symptom Beep Possible cause Possible solution

The OPEN side of the soft top operating

switch is pushed, but the soft top does not

operate.

Sounds twice

The OPEN side of the soft top operating switch is

pushed while the soft top is fully open, or the

CLOSE side of the soft top operating switch is

pushed while the soft top is fully closed.

Push the CLOSE side of the soft top operating

switch when the soft top is fully open. Push the

OPEN side of the soft top operating switch when the

soft top is fully closed.

Sounds twice

The selector lever (automatic transmission models

only) or the shift lever (manual transmission models

only) is in the R (Reverse) position.

Shift the selector lever (automatic transmission

models only) to the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position, or

shift the shift lever (manual transmission models only)

to the N (Neutral) position, and then operate the soft

top.

Sounds twice The trunk lid is opened. Fully close the trunk lid.

Does not sound The battery voltage is low. Start the engine again and operate the soft top.

Does not sound The operation stops to protect the system. Wait for approximately 5 minutes.

The soft top stops halfway during opera-

tion.

Sounds twice Objects are trapped in the moving structure of the

soft top.

Check that an object is not trapped inside the rear

parcel shelf, side flap and soft top. After the check,

turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, start the

engine again and then operate the soft top.

Sounds twice The battery voltage is low. Start the engine again and operate the soft top.

When the vehicle is being driven, the beep

sounds.

Sounds continu-

ously The soft top is partially opened. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe location and

fully open or fully close the soft top.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (138,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

IF THE TOP DOES NOT OPEN OR

CLOSE ELECTRICALLY

If you cannot operate the soft top with the

operating switch, first check whether all the

following operating conditions are met.

.vehicle is stopped

.ignition switch is ON (Run the engine when

operating the top.)

.the trunk is closed

.the selector lever or shift lever is in a position

other than the R (Reverse) position

If the top still does not move under the above

conditions or has any system malfunction, see a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. When you

must close the top by yourself, in the event of

emergency or when an immediate dealer service

is not available, close the top manually accord-

ing to the procedures shown in this section.

When closing the soft top manually:

.Move the vehicle to a safe place, away from

traffic.

.Two people should perform this procedure,

as some of the top parts are extremely

heavy.

The top cannot be opened manually.

WARNING

.Do not drive with the top partially

opened.

.If the top cannot be operated prop-

erly, see a NISSAN dealer as soon

as possible to have your vehicle

checked.

CAUTION

The storage lid is extremely heavy. The

storage lid should be manually opened

or closed by two people.

SPA2715

1. Open the trunk lid. In the event of a

discharged battery, the secondary trunk

release mechanism should be operated.

(See “SECONDARY TRUNK LID RE-

LEASE” earlier in this section.)

2. Open the top storage lid

a. Remove the board *

2inside of the

trunk by removing the clips *

b. Pull the lock release cables (right and

left) *

3as illustrated, then close the

trunk lid.

NOTE:

Use a cloth or other tool to protect your

hands when pulling on the lock release

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (139,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

cables *

SPA2686

c. Pull up the storage lid from the left and

right side of the vehicle by hand.

CAUTION

Make sure to close the trunk lid before

opening the storage lid. The storage lid

may contact the trunk lid and damage it.

SPA2703

3. Close the soft top.

a. Pull up the top simultaneously from the

right and left side of the vehicle while

holding the storage lid.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (140,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SPA2704

b. When the rear top *

Ais pulled up from

the storage area, one person must hold

the storage lid and another person must

pull up the soft top.

c. Pull up the top using both hands,

holding the rear top *

Aas illustrated.

CAUTION

Make sure to hold the rear top *

Ato

avoid the front and rear parts separat-

ing. Otherwise the top may be da-

maged.

SPA2705

d. Pull down and slide the storage lid to

close while holding the rear soft top

from the right and left side of the vehicle.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (141,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

CAUTION

Make sure to close the storage lid

completely. The storage lid may contact

the soft top and damage it.

SPA2688

e. Close the front and rear parts of the soft

top at the same time as illustrated.

SPA2689

4. Lock the front part of the soft top.

a. Remove the cap *

1as illustrated.

b. Insert a suitable tool *

2(located in the

trunk) into the hole and turn clockwise.

CAUTION

.After closing the top manually, have

the system checked and/or repaired

by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

.Avoid leaving the vehicle outside for

long periods or driving at high

speeds. The rear of the top is not

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (142,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

locked completely, and this may

allow wind and rain to get into your

vehicle.

CARE OF THE SOFT TOP AND THE

VEHICLE BODY

To use your Roadster safely and comfortably,

you need to observe all the warnings and

cautions shown in the previous pages. Also, to

maintain a good appearance of the soft top and

the vehicle body, you need to care for them by

cleaning and/or washing properly.

CAUTION

.Do not use an automatic car wash or

a high-pressure car wash to clean

your vehicle. The top may be da-

maged and water may leak into the

inside of the vehicle.

.Store the vehicle with the top closed

if it is not to be used for long

periods. Keeping the top stowed

for long periods may cause wrinkles

on the surface of the top.

See “CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Ap-

pearance and care” section for detailed instruc-

tions.

.A protective clear tape is applied to the top

storage lid painted surface where the soft

top contacts the surface. When the top is

fully closed, the tape may transmit some

light, visible from the inside of the vehicle.

This does not affect the water and air

tightness of the seal.

.The inner surface of the trunk and top

storage lids may show a fibrous, or marbled

pattern. This is the normal appearance of the

material used in these parts.

SPA2647

FRONT, SIDE AND REAR UNIQUE

PARTS (NISMO models)

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (143,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

The NISMO models have the following unique

parts on the front, side and rear of the vehicle.

— Front bumper with an aerodynamic splitter

— Side sill extensions

— Rear bumper with an aerodynamic diffuser

— Large-diameter exhaust pipes

These parts are close to the ground and may be

damaged if they contact objects such as curbs,

parking blocks, etc.

CAUTION

Reduce vehicle speed to decrease the

possibility of damaging these parts

when:

.driving on bumpy or rutted roads

.entering or exiting parking garages

and driveways

.driving over speed bumps

SPA2648

CAUTION

The approach and departure angles are

small. Reduce vehicle speed when the

vehicle approaches or leaves a steep

hill. Otherwise, the front bumper with

an aerodynamic splitter, rear bumper

with an aerodynamic diffuser and ex-

haust pipes may contact the road sur-

face and be damaged.

SPA2649

CAUTION

Do not step on the front bumper with an

aerodynamic splitter. Doing so could

damage it.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

Information Provided by:

Black plate (144,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SPA2581

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock the fuel-filler

door by using one of the following operations,

then push the left side of the door.

.Push the door handle request switch with

the Intelligent Key carried with you.

.Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent

Key.

.Insert the mechanical key into the door lock

cylinder and turn it to the rear of the vehicle.

.Push the power door lock switch to the

UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and

lock all doors by operating the door handle

request switch, the LOCK button on the

Intelligent Key, the mechanical key or the power

door lock switch.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

.Gasoline is extremely flammable

and highly explosive under certain

conditions. You could be burned or

seriously injured if it is misused or

mishandled. Always stop engine

and do not smoke or allow open

flames or sparks near the vehicle

when refueling.

.Do not attempt to top off the fuel

tank after the fuel pump nozzle

shuts off automatically. Continued

refueling may cause fuel overflow,

resulting in fuel spray and possibly

a fire.

.Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It

has a built-in safety valve needed

for proper operation of the fuel

system and emission control sys-

tem. An incorrect cap can result in a

serious malfunction and possible

injury. It could also cause the mal-

function indicator light to come on.

.Never pour fuel into the throttle

body to attempt to start your vehi-

cle.

.Do not fill a portable fuel container

in the vehicle or trailer. Static elec-

tricity can cause an explosion of

flammable liquid, vapor or gas in

any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the

risk of serious injury or death when

filling portable fuel containers:

— Always place the container on

the ground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices

when filling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

— Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

.If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid

paint damage.

.Insert the cap straight into the fuel-

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (145,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

filler tube, then tighten until the

fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tight-

en the fuel-filler cap properly may

cause the malfunction indicator

light (MIL) to illuminate. If the

light illuminates because the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, tighten

or install the cap and continue to

drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving

trips. If the light does not turn

off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by a NISSAN deal-

er.

.The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will

appear if the fuel-filler cap is not

properly tightened. Failure to tight-

en the fuel-filler cap properly after

the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap-

pears may cause the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to

illuminate.

SPA2837

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to

remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder on

the hook *

Awhile refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

SPA2810

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on the

vehicle information display when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle

has been refueled.

To turn off the warning, perform the following

steps:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon

as possible. (See “FUEL-FILLER CAP”.)

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Push the switch *

Afor about 1

second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning after tightening the fuel cap.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

Information Provided by:

Black plate (146,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving. You could lose control

of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent.

.Do not adjust the steering wheel

any closer to you than is necessary

for proper steering operation and

comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates

with great force. If you are unrest-

rained, leaning forward, sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way,

you are at greater risk of injury or

death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from

the air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back

against the seatback and as far

away as practical from the steering

wheel. Always use the seat belts.

SPA2583

MANUAL OPERATION

Tilt operation

Push the lock lever *

1down and adjust the

steering wheel up or down to the desired

position.

Pull the lock lever up securely to lock the

steering wheel in place. SIC2872

1. To block out glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor *

2. To block glare from the side, remove the

main sun visor from the center mount and

swing it to the side *

TILT STEERING SUN VISORS

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (147,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SPA2447

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the height and the angle of the inside

mirror to the desired position.

SPA2143

Manual anti-glare type

The night position *

1will reduce glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position *

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when ne-

cessary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

SPA2450

Automatic anti-glare type

The inside mirror is designed so that it

automatically changes reflection according to

the intensity of the headlights of the following

vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automatically

turned on when the ignition switch is pushed

to the ON position.

When the anti-glare system is turned on, the

indicator light *

Awill illuminate and excessive

glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind

you will be reduced.

Push the “*” switch *

Cto make the inside

rearview mirror operate normally. The indicator

MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

Information Provided by:

Black plate (148,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

light will turn off. Push the “I” switch *

Dto turn

the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the

sensors *

Eor apply glass cleaner on

them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity

of the sensor, resulting in improper opera-

tion.

For the HomeLink®Universal Transceiver opera-

tion, see “HomeLink®UNIVERSAL TRANSCEI-

VER” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

SPA2319

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is located on

the armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Turn the switch right or left to select the right or

left side mirror *

1, then adjust using the control

switch *

Defrosting outside mirrors

The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear

window defroster switch is operated.

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Information Provided by:

Black plate (149,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SPA1829

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the

rear of the vehicle.

SIC3869

VANITY MIRROR

To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun

visor and pull up the cover.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (13,1)

4Center display, heater, air conditioner,

audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Safety note ....................................................... 4-2

Center multi-function control panel

(models with navigation system) ............................ 4-2

How to use multi-function controller ................... 4-3

How to use touch screen................................. 4-3

Menu options ................................................ 4-5

How to select menus on the screen ................... 4-6

Vehicle information and settings

(models with navigation system) ............................ 4-6

How to use STATUS button.............................. 4-6

How to use brightness control and display ON/

OFF button................................................... 4-6

How to use INFO button.................................. 4-6

How to use SETTING button .......................... 4-10

RearView monitor (models with navigation

system).......................................................... 4-17

How to read displayed lines............................ 4-18

How to park with predicted course lines............ 4-18

Difference between predicted and actual

distances ................................................... 4-20

How to adjust screen.................................... 4-22

Operating tips ............................................. 4-22

Ventilators ...................................................... 4-23

Center ventilators ......................................... 4-23

Side ventilators............................................ 4-23

Heater and air conditioner .................................. 4-24

Automatic air conditioner (Type A).................... 4-25

Automatic air conditioner (Type B).................... 4-27

Operating tips ............................................. 4-29

In-cabin microfilter........................................ 4-29

Servicing air conditioner ................................ 4-30

Audio system .................................................. 4-30

Audio operation precautions ........................... 4-30

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player ..... 4-42

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

changer (models without navigation system) ....... 4-47

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player (models with navigation system) .............. 4-51

DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player operation

(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-55

USB memory operation

(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-58

Bluetooth®streaming audio

(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-62

iPod®player operation

(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-67

Music Box®(models with navigation system)....... 4-69

Auxiliary input jacks

(models with navigation system) ...................... 4-75

CD/DVD/USB memory care and cleaning .......... 4-76

Steering-wheel-mounted controls for audio ........ 4-77

Antenna ..................................................... 4-79

Car phone or CB radio...................................... 4-80

Information Provided by:

Black plate (14,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System

(models with navigation system) .......................... 4-80

Regulatory information ................................... 4-81

Voice commands.......................................... 4-82

Control buttons ........................................... 4-82

Connecting procedure................................... 4-83

Phone selection ........................................... 4-83

Vehicle phonebook ....................................... 4-83

Making a call............................................... 4-86

Receiving a call ........................................... 4-87

During a call ............................................... 4-88

Phone setting.............................................. 4-88

Troubleshooting guide ................................... 4-90

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System (models

without navigation system) (if so equipped) ............ 4-91

Regulatory information ................................... 4-92

Using the system ......................................... 4-93

Control buttons ........................................... 4-95

Getting started ............................................ 4-95

List of voice commands ................................. 4-97

Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode ..................... 4-100

Troubleshooting guide ................................. 4-103

NISSAN Voice Recognition System

(models with navigation system) ........................ 4-104

NISSAN voice recognition Standard Mode ....... 4-104

Using the system ....................................... 4-106

NISSAN voice recognition Alternate Command

Mode ...................................................... 4-116

Using the system ....................................... 4-122

Troubleshooting guide ................................. 4-127

Information Provided by:

Black plate (152,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

.Do not use this system if you notice

any abnormality, such as a frozen

screen or lack of sound. Continued

use of the system may result in

accident, fire or electric shock.

.In case you notice any foreign

object in the system hardware, spill

liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell

coming from it, stop using the

system immediately and contact

your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignor-

ing such conditions may lead to

accidents, fire, or electric shock.

.Park the vehicle in a safe location

and apply the parking brake to view

the images on the front center dis-

play screen using devices connected

to the auxiliary input jacks.

Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme temperature conditions [below

−48F(−208C) and above 1588F(708C)].

Operating this system under these condi-

tions may result in system malfunctions.

SAA2273

1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-6)

2, 3, 7, 8, 9.

For navigation system control buttons (Refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.)

4. Multi-function controller (P.4-3)

5. “PHONE” Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System

button (P.4-80)

6. “ OFF” brightness control and display ON/

OFF button (P.4-6)

10. “INFO” vehicle and navigation information button

(P.4-6)

11. “SETTING” button (P.4-10)

SAFETY NOTE

CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION

CONTROL PANEL (models with

navigation system)

4-2 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (153,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2274

HOW TO USE MULTI-FUNCTION

CONTROLLER

Choose an item on the display using the main

directional buttons *

2(or additional directional

buttons *

3with navigation system) or center

dial *

5, and push the ENTER button *

1for

operation.

Push the BACK button *

4to return the display

to the previous screen or delete characters.

Pushing BACK may or may not save the settings

depending on the menu.

For the VOICE button *

6functions, refer to the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN

CAUTION

.The glass screen on the liquid

crystal display may break if it is hit

with a hard or sharp object. If the

glass screen breaks, do not touch it.

Doing so could result in an injury.

.To clean the display, use a soft, dry

cloth. If additional cleaning is ne-

cessary, use a small amount of

neutral detergent with a soft cloth.

Never use a rough cloth, alcohol,

benzine, thinner or any kind of

solvent or paper towel with a che-

mical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

.Do not splash any liquid such as

water or car fragrance on the dis-

play. Contact with liquid will cause

the system to malfunction.

To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot

be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not available

while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then

operate the navigation system.

WARNING

.ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

.Avoid using vehicle features that

coulddistractyou.Ifdistracted,

you could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (154,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2473

Touch screen operation

With this system, the same operations as those

for the multi-function controller are possible

using the touch screen operation.

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select it. To select the “Audio”

settings, touch the “Audio” area *

1on the

screen.

Touch the BACK *

2button to return to the

previous screen.

SAA2474

Adjusting an item:

Touch the +*

1or −*

2button to adjust the

settings.

Touch the *

3or *

4button to move

to the previous or next item.

Touch the *

5or *

6button to move

to the previous or next page.

SAA2475

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter or number *

There are some options available when inputting

characters.

.Uppercase:

Shows uppercase characters.

.Lowercase:

Shows lowercase characters.

.Symbols:

Shows symbols such as the question mark

(?).

4-4 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (155,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Space:

Inserts a space.

.Delete:

Deletes the last character that has been

input with one touch. Push and hold the

button to delete all of the characters.

.OK:

Completes character inputs.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft

cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a

small amount of neutral detergent with a soft

cloth. Never spray the screen with water or

detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe

the screen.

SAA2143

MENU OPTIONS

The start menu can be displayed using the menu

control switch on the steering-wheel-mounted

controls.

1. While the MAP or STATUS screen is

displayed, push and hold the menu control

switch until the “Menu Options” screen

appears.

2. Highlight the preferred item by tilting the

menu control switch up or down, and then

push the menu control switch to select it.

SAA2476

Available items

Destination/Route:

These items are for the navigation system. See

the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual for details.

Info:

Displays the information screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you push the INFO

button.

Settings:

Displays the settings screen. It is the same

screen that appears when you push the SET-

TING button.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (156,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2477

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE

SCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the display

screen in menus. To select each key item,

highlight the preferred item using the multi-

function controller and push the ENTER button.

Whenever a menu selection is made or menu

item is highlighted, different areas on the screen

provide you with important information. See the

following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the current

screen. (i.e. push SETTING button >

choose “Comfort” menu item.)

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose within that

menu screen.

3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:

Shows that the multi-function controller may

be used to move UP/DOWN on the screen

and select more options.

4. Menu Items Counter:

Shows the total number of items listed

across all pages for the current menu (i.e.

3/7).

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if available)

about the menu selection currently high-

lighted. (i.e. Adjust head lamp on time after

shut-off.)

HOW TO USE STATUS BUTTON

To display the status of the audio, air conditioner

system, fuel consumption and navigation sys-

tem, push the STATUS button. The following

information will appear when the STATUS button

is pushed repeatedly.

Audio and Air conditioner system ?Audio and

fuel economy ?Audio and Navigation system

HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON-

TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON

Push the “ OFF” button to switch the

display brightness to the daytime mode or the

nighttime mode, and to adjust the display

brightness using the multi-function controller

while the indicator is displayed at the bottom of

the screen.

The display brightness can also be adjusted

using the brightness UP button (+) or bright-

ness DOWN button (−).

Push and hold the “ OFF” button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Push the

button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE INFO BUTTON

The display screen shows vehicle and navigation

information for your convenience.

The information shown on the screen should be

VEHICLE INFORMATION AND

SETTINGS (models with navigation

system)

4-6 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (157,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

a guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.

See the following for details.

SAA2478

Vehicle information display

1. Push the INFO button on the control panel.

2. Select an item from the INFO menu.

3. After viewing or adjusting the information on

the following screens, push the BACK

button to return to the INFO menu.

See the separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual for the following items:

.Where am I?

.Traffic Info

.Weather Info

.Map Update

.Navigation Version

*When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the “Navigation Version” key is displayed after

selecting the “Others” key.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (158,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2479

SAA2480

Fuel Economy information

The distance to empty, average fuel economy

and current fuel economy will be displayed for

reference.

To reset the average fuel economy (Avg Fuel

Econ), select the “Reset Fuel Eco” key.

If the “Fuel Eco History” key is selected, the

average fuel consumption history will be dis-

played in graph form along with the average for

the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between “US” and

“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING

BUTTON” later in this section.)

The fuel economy information may differ from the

information displayed on the vehicle information

display. This is due to the timing difference in

updating the information and does not indicate a

malfunction.

SAA2481

Maintenance information

The maintenance intervals can be displayed for

the engine oil, oil filter, tire and other reminders.

To set a maintenance interval, select a preferred

item from the list.

You can also set to display a message to remind

you that the maintenance needs to be per-

formed.

The following example shows how to set the

engine oil maintenance information. Use the

same steps to set the other maintenance

information.

4-8 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (159,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2482

1. Set the interval (mileage) of the maintenance

schedule. To determine the recommended

maintenance interval, refer to your “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

2. To display the reminder automatically when

the desired distance is reached, select the

“Reminder” key.

3. Reset the driving distance to the new

maintenance schedule.

4. To return to the previous screen, push the

BACK button.

The unit can be converted between “US” and

“Metric”. (See “HOW TO USE SETTING

BUTTON” later in this section.)

SAA3003

Example

The Reminder will be automatically displayed

when the specified distance has been driven

and every time the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position. The reminder will not

appear while driving.

Select the “OK” key to hide the reminder for the

rest of the current drive.

To stop the reminder from appearing, perform

one of the following actions:

.Select the “Reset Distance”.

.Deactivate the “Reminder”.

.Increase the “Interval” distance to be more

than the current distance being tracked.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (160,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2483

Others information

The Others information display will appear when

pushing the INFO button and selecting the

“Others” key.

GPS Position:

For the details of this item, see the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Voice Recognition:

For the details of this item, see “NISSAN VOICE

RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with naviga-

tion system)” later in this section.

SAA2484

HOW TO USE SETTING BUTTON

The display as illustrated will appear when the

SETTING button is pushed.

For navigation settings, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SAA2485

Example

Audio settings

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Audio” key.

Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade:

To adjust the speaker tone quality and sound

balance, select the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Balance”

or “Fade” key and adjust it with the multi-

function controller.

These items can also be adjusted by pushing

and turning the AUDIO knob.

4-10 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (161,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Speed Sensitive Vol.:

The audio system’s volume is increased with the

vehicle speed. Select the “Speed Sensitive Vol.”

and adjust the effect level with the multi-function

controller. The Speed Sensitive Volume function

is turned off when the level is set to “OFF”.

Increasing the value will cause the volume to

increase faster with vehicle speed.

DivX®Registration Code:

The registration code for a device that is used to

download DivX®files will be displayed on the

screen. If a disc is loaded or a USB memory is

connected to the audio system, this function will

not be activated.

Display Album Cover Art:

When this item is turned to ON, the album cover

image is displayed when playing iPod®or MP3

music files through a CD, DVD or USB memory.

When the image is not properly embedded in

the file or device, the image will not be

displayed.

Phone settings

For details of the “Phone” settings, see “BLUE-

TOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

(models with navigation system)” later in this

section.

Bluetooth®settings

For details of the “Bluetooth” settings, see

“BLUETOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE SYS-

TEM (models with navigation system)” later in

this section or “BLUETOOTH®STREAMING

AUDIO (models with navigation system)” later in

this section.

SAA2554

Example

Volume and Beeps settings

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button, selecting the

“Volume & Beeps” key.

Audio Volume:

To increase or decrease the audio volume,

select the “Audio Volume” and adjust it with

the multi-function controller. You can also adjust

the audio volume by turning the VOLUME

control knob.

Guidance Volume:

To adjust the guidance voice volume louder or

softer, select the “Guidance Volume” and adjust

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (162,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

it with the multi-function controller.

You can also adjust the guidance voice volume

by turning the VOLUME control knob while voice

guidance is being announced.

Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call:

For the details of these items, see “BLUE-

TOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

(models with navigation system)” later in this

section.

Switch Beeps:

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear a

beep sound when you use a button.

Guidance Voice:

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear

voice guidance in the navigation operation or in

other operations.

NOTE:

When the voice guidance is being an-

nounced during audio playback, turning

the volume knob does not adjust the music

level; it adjusts the guidance volume level.

If voice guidance is not being heard,

please check the Guidance Volume level.

SAA2486

Display settings

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Display” key.

Display Adjustment:

To adjust the display settings, select the “Dis-

play Adjustment” key. The following settings are

available.

.Display

To turn off the screen, push the ENTER button

and turn the “Display” indicator off. The other

method is to push and hold the “ OFF”

button for more than 2 seconds.

When any mode button is pushed with the

screen off, the screen turns on for further

operation. The screen will turn off automatically

5 seconds after the operation is finished.

To turn on the screen, set this item to the ON

position, or push and hold the “ OFF”

button.

.Brightness/Contrast/Background Color

To adjust the brightness and contrast of the

screen, select the “Brightness” or “Contrast”

key.

Then, you can adjust the brightness and contrast

using the multi-function controller.

For information on the “Background Color” key,

refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual.

For Roadster models:

Depending on the driver’s seat position, the

display could be hard to read. Adjust the

brightness and contrast of the display on the

setting screen.

Color Theme:

Choose the theme color of the menu screen

from “Black”, “Blue” or “Red”.

4-12 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (163,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2487

Clock settings

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Clock” key.

The clock settings display cannot be operated

while driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe place

and apply the parking brake before setting the

clock.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned to ON, a clock is

always displayed in the upper right corner of the

screen.

This clock will indicate the time almost exactly

because it is always adjusted by the GPS

system.

Clock Format (24h):

When this item is turned to ON, the 24-hour

clock is displayed. When this item is not turned

to ON, the 12-hour clock is displayed.

Offset (hour)/(min):

Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing per

hour or per minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

Turn this item to ON for daylight saving time

application.

Time Zone:

Choose the time zone from the following

.Pacific

.Mountain

.Central

.Eastern

.Atlantic

.Newfoundland

.Hawaii

.Alaska

SAA2489

Others settings

The Others settings display will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Others” key.

The following items are available:

.Comfort

.Language & Units

.Voice Recognition

.Image Viewer

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (164,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2488

Example

Comfort settings

The display as illustrated will appear when

pushing the SETTING button and selecting the

“Others” key, and then selecting the “Comfort”

key. This key does not appear on the display until

the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

Auto Interior Illumination:

When this item is turned to ON, the interior

lights will illuminate if any door is unlocked.

Light Sensitivity:

Adjust the sensitivity of the automatic headlights

higher (right) or lower (left).

Light Off Delay:

Choose the duration of the automatic headlight

off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150 and

180 second periods.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval:

When this item is turned to ON, the wiper

interval is adjusted automatically according to

the vehicle speed.

Selective Door Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, only the driver’s

door is unlocked first after the door unlock

operation. When the door handle request switch

on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is

pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding

door is unlocked first. All the doors can be

unlocked if the door unlock operation is per-

formed again within 60 seconds.

When this item is turned to OFF, all the doors

will be unlocked after the door unlock operation

is performed once.

Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, door lock/

unlock function by pushing the door handle

request switch will be activated.

Return All Settings to Default:

Select this item and then select “YES” to return

all settings to the default.

4-14 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (165,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2490

Language & Units settings

The Language & Units settings display will

appear when pushing the SETTING button,

selecting the “Others” key, and then selecting

the “Language & Units” key.

Select Language:

Select the “Select Language” key. Choose

“English”, “Franc¸ais” or “Espan

˜ol” for your

favorite display appearance.

If you select the “Franc¸ ais” key, the French

language will be displayed, so please use the

French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a French

Owner’s Manual, see “OWNER’S MANUAL/

SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in

the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section.

Select Units:

Select the “Select Units” key. Choose “US”

(Mile, 8F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, 8C, L/100 km)

for your favorite display appearance.

Voice Recognition settings

For details about the “Voice Recognition”

settings, see “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later

in this section.

SAA2404

CAMERA settings

The “CAMERA” screen will appear when select-

ing the “Camera” key.

For details about the camera system operation,

see “REARVIEW MONITOR (models with navi-

gation system)” later in this section.

Predictive Course Lines:

When this item is turned ON, the predicted

course lines will be displayed on the monitor

when the selector/shift lever is in the R

(Reverse) position.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (166,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2491

Image Viewer

The image files in the USB memory will be

displayed. To display the Image Viewer, push the

SETTING button, select the “Other” key and

then select the “Image Viewer” key. The image of

the selected file is displayed on the right side of

the screen.

When a number of folders are included in the

USB memory, select a folder from the list to

display the file list.

Images will not be shown on the display while

the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce

driver distraction. To view images, stop the

vehicle in a safe location and apply the parking

brake.

SAA2492

Full Screen Display:

The full screen display will appear when select-

ing the “Full Screen Display” key.

To operate the Image Viewer or to change the

settings, select the desired key using the multi-

function controller.

.(Start)

Select the “ ” key to start playing the

slideshow.

.(Stop)

Select the “ ” key to stop the slideshow.

.(Next)

Select the “ ” key to display the next file.

.(Previous)

Select the “ ” key to display the previous

file.

Setting the Image Viewer:

The Image Viewer setting display will appear

when selecting the “Settings” key on the full

screen display. The following settings are

available for the full screen display.

.Slideshow Speed

Select the “Slideshow Speed” key. From the

following display, select the changing time

from 5, 10, 30, 60 seconds or “No Auto

Change”.

.Slideshow Order

Select the “Slideshow Order” key. From the

following display, select “Random” or “Order

List”. For “Order List”, the image order is the

order of the files as stored on the USB

memory.

4-16 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (167,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Operating tips:

.Only files that meet the following conditions

will be displayed.

— Image type: JPEG

— File Extensions: *.jpg, *jpeg

— Maximum Resolution: 2048 61536

pixels

— Maximum Size: 2-MB

— Colors: 32768 (15-bit)

— Maximum File Name lengths: 253-Bytes

— Maximum Folders: 500

— Maximum Images per Folder: 1024

.If an electronic device (such as a digital

camera) is directly connected to the vehicle

using a USB cable, no image will be

displayed on the screen.

.If the file name is too long, some file names

may not be entirely displayed.

.When the total number of characters in the

file name exceeds 100 or if 1 file name in a

directory exceeds 100 characters, all files

will show a shortened 8-character version.

The image will still be displayed when

selected.

When the selector lever is shifted into the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows

view to the rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to the driver in

detecting large stationary objects to help avoid

damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect

small objects below the bumper and may not

detect objects close to the bumper or on the

ground.

WARNING

.The rearview camera is a conveni-

ence but it is not a substitute for

proper backing up. Always turn and

check that it is safe to do so before

backing up. Always back up slowly.

.Objects viewed in the RearView

Monitor differ from actual distance

because a wide-angle lens is used.

Objects in the RearView Monitor

will appear visually opposite like

ones viewed in the inside and out-

side mirrors.

.Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

.Underneath the bumper and the

corner areas of the bumper cannot

be viewed on the RearView monitor

because of its monitoring range

limitation.

.Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is

installed above the license plate.

.When washing the vehicle with

high-pressure water, be sure not to

spray it around the camera. Other-

wise, water may enter the camera

unit causing water condensation on

the lens, a malfunction, fire or an

electric shock.

.Do not strike the camera. It is a

precision instrument. Otherwise, it

may malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric

shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera.

Do not scratch the cover when cleaning

dirt or snow from the cover.

REARVIEW MONITOR (models with

navigation system)

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (168,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA1896

HOW TO READ DISPLAYED LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

bumper line *

Aare displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines:

Indicate distances from the bumper.

.Red line *

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

.Yellow line *

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

.Green line *

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

.Green line *

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines *

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines *

Indicate the predicted course when backing up.

The predicted course lines will be displayed on

the monitor when the selector lever is in the R

(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is

turned. The predicted course lines will move

depending on how much the steering wheel is

turned and will not be displayed while the

steering wheel is in the neutral position.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

.Always turn and check that it is safe

to park your car before backing up.

Always back up slowly.

.Use the displayed lines as a refer-

ence. The lines are highly affected

by the number of occupants, fuel

level, vehicle position, road condi-

tion and road grade.

.If the tires are replaced with differ-

ent sized tires, the predicted course

line may not be displayed correctly.

.On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course line and the

actual course line.

.If the battery is disconnected or

becomes discharged, the predicted

course lines may not be displayed

correctly. If this occurs, drive the

vehicle on a straight road for more

than 5 minutes.

.The displayed lines will appear

slightly off to the right because the

rearview camera is not installed in

the rear center of the vehicle.

.The distance guide line and the

vehicle width guide line should be

used as a reference only when the

vehicle is on a level paved surface.

The distance viewed on the monitor

is for reference only and may be

different than the actual distance

between the vehicle and displayed

objects.

.When backing up the vehicle up a

hill, objects viewed in the monitor

are further than they appear. When

backing up the vehicle down a hill,

objects viewed in the monitor are

4-18 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (169,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

closer than they appear. Use the

inside mirror or glance over your

shoulder to properly judge dis-

tances to other objects.

The vehicle width and predicted course

lines are wider than the actual width and

course.

SAA1897

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

2. The rearview of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen *

Aas illustrated when the

selector lever is moved to the R (Reverse)

position.

SAA1898

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted course

lines *

Benter the parking space *

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width guide lines *

Dparallel to the

parking space *

Cwhile referring to the

predicted course lines.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (170,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the selector lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The distance guide line and the vehicle width

guide line should be used as a reference only

when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface.

The distance viewed on the monitor is for

reference only and may be different from the

actual distance between the vehicle and dis-

played objects.

SAA1899

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to

the place *

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)

distance on the hill is the place *

B. Note that

any object on the hill is further than it appears on

the monitor.

4-20 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (171,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA1900

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown further than the actual distance.

For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to

the place *

A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)

distance on the hill is the place *

B. Note that

any object on the hill is closer than it appears on

the monitor.

SAA1923

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines *

Ado not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may

hit the object if it projects over the actual

backing up course.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (172,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA1924

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position *

Cis shown further than the

position *

Bin the display. However, the

position *

Cis actually at the same distance

as the position *

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position *

Aif

the object projects over the actual backing up

course.

HOW TO ADJUST SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,

Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView

monitor, push the SETTING button with the

RearView monitor on, select the “Display” key on

the screen and select the item key and adjust

the level using the multi-function controller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,

Contrast and Black Level of the RearView

monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure

the parking brake is firmly applied and the

engine is not running.

The display of the predicted course lines can be

set to ON or OFF. For details, see “CAMERA

settings” earlier in this section.

OPERATING TIPS

.When the selector lever is shifted to the R

(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto-

matically changes to the RearView monitor

mode.

.It may take some time until the RearView

monitor is displayed after the selector lever

has been shifted to R from another position

or to another position from “R”. Objects may

be distorted momentarily until the RearView

monitor screen is displayed completely.

.When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display

objects. This is not a malfunction.

.When strong light directly enters the cam-

era, objects may not be displayed clearly.

This is not a malfunction.

.Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

.The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light. This is not a malfunction.

.The colors of objects on the RearView

monitor may differ somewhat from those of

the actual object.

.Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark place or at night. This is not a

malfunction.

.If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,

the RearView monitor may not clearly display

objects. Clean the camera.

.Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to

clean the camera. This will cause discolora-

tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth

dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent

and then wipe with a dry cloth.

.Do not damage the camera as the monitor

screen may be adversely affected.

4-22 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (173,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Do not use wax on the camera window.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with mild detergent diluted with

water.

SAA2275

CENTER VENTILATORS

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction

of ventilators.

SAA2288

SIDE VENTILATORS

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction

of ventilators as illustrated.

VENTILATORS

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (174,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

.Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. On

hot, sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

.Do not use the recirculation mode

for long periods as it may cause the

interior air to become stale and the

windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the heater and air

conditioner system.

SAA2493

For the models with navigation system, push the

“STATUS” button to display the heater and air

conditioner status screen. (See “HOW TO USE

STATUS BUTTON” earlier in this section.)

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

4-24 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (175,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2277

1. “ ” fan speed control dial

2. Temperature control dial*

* The display of degrees:

“60-75-90” is used for 8F (US).

“18-25-32” is used for 8C (Canada).

3. Air flow control dial

4. “A/C” air conditioner button

5. Intake air control button (“ ” outside air and

“” air recirculation)

6. “ ” rear window defroster button (See “REAR

WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section.)

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER

(Type A)

In your vehicle, the air conditioner system

is designed to automatically activate the

cooling function when operating the air

flow control dial, the “ ” fan speed

control dial or the “ ” intake air

control button. (The indicator light on the

“A/C” button will illuminate.) Push the

“A/C” button off when the cooling function

is not necessary.

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO):

This mode may be used all year round. The

system works automatically to control the inside

temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed

after the preferred temperature is set manually.

1. Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial and

air flow control dial to the “AUTO” position.

The air conditioner will automatically turn on.

(The “A/C” button indicator light illuminates.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

.The temperature can be set within the

following range.

— For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C)

— For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to 328C)

.The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also

controlled automatically.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (176,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Heating (A/C OFF):

The air conditioner does not activate. When you

need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial and

air flow control dial to the “AUTO” position.

(The air conditioner will turn on.)

2. Push the “A/C” button to turn off the air

conditioner. (The “A/C” button indicator light

will turn off.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

.The temperature of the passenger com-

partment will be maintained automati-

cally. Air flow distribution and fan speed

are also controlled automatically.

.Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Otherwise

the system may not work properly.

.Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:

1. Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to the

desired position.

2. Turn the air flow control dial to the “ ”

position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

.To quickly remove ice from the outside

of the windows, turn the “ ” fan

speed control dial to the maximum

position.

.As soon as possible after the windshield

is clean, turn the air flow control dial to

the “AUTO” position to return to the auto

mode.

.When the air flow control dial is turned

to the “ ”or“ ” position, the air

conditioner will automatically be turned

on at outside temperatures above 238F

(−58C) to defog the windshield, and the

air recirculation mode will automatically

be turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging

performance.

Manual operation

Fan speed control:

Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial clockwise

(+) or counterclockwise (−) to manually control

the fan speed.

Turn the dial to the “AUTO” position to return to

automatic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation:

Push the “ ” intake air control button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The

indicator light on the “ ” side will come on.

The air recirculation mode cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting

mode “ ”.

Outside air circulation:

Push the “ ” intake air control button to

draw outside air into the passenger compart-

ment. The indicator light on the “ ” side will

come on.

Automatic intake air control:

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be

controlled automatically. To manually control

the intake air, push the “ ” intake air

control button. To return to the automatic control

mode, push the “ ” intake air control

button for approximately 2 seconds. The indi-

cator lights (both air recirculation and outside air

circulation sides) will flash twice, and then the

intake air will be controlled automatically.

4-26 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (177,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Air flow control:

Turning the air flow control dial selects the air

outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors.

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot out-

lets.

: Air flows mainly from defroster outlets.

To turn the system off

Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to the

“OFF” position.

SAA2876

Type B

1. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button/“ ” fan

speed control dial

2. “ ” front defroster button

3. “ ” intake air control button

4. “AUTO” automatic air conditioner ON button/

Temperature control dial

5. “ ” rear window defroster button (See “REAR

WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the “2.

Instruments and controls” section.)

6. “MODE” manual air flow control button

7. “OFF” button

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER

(Type B)

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO):

This mode may be used all year round. The

system works automatically to control the inside

temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed

after the preferred temperature is set manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indicator

on the button will illuminate and AUTO will

be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (178,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

desired temperature.

.The temperature can be set within the

following range.

— For U.S.: 60 to 908F (16 to 328C)

— For Canada: 64 to 908F (18 to 328C)

.The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed will also be

controlled automatically.

A visible mist may be seen coming from the

ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

Heating (A/C OFF):

The air conditioner does not activate in this

mode. When you need to heat only, use this

mode.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on.

2. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indicator

will turn off.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

.The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also

controlled automatically.

.Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise the

system may not work properly.

.Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:

1. Push the “ ” front defroster button. (The

indicator light on the button will come on.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

.To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, turn the “ ” fan speed control

dial and set it to the maximum position.

.As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, push the “AUTO” button to return to

the auto mode.

.When the “ ” front defroster button is

pushed, the air conditioner will automatically

be turned on at outside temperatures above

238F(−58C) to defog the windshield, and

the air recirculate mode will automatically be

turned off.

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging

performance.

Manual operation

Fan speed control:

Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial to

manually control the fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation:

Push the “ ” intake air control button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The

indicator light “ ” will come on.

The air recirculation mode cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting

mode “ ”.

Outside air circulation:

Push the “ ” intake air control button to

change the air circulation from the intake air to

the outside air. The indicator light “ ” will turn

off.

Automatic air intake control:

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be

controlled automatically. To manually control

the intake air, push the “ ” intake air control

button. To return to the automatic control mode,

push the “ ” intake air control button for

approximately 2 seconds. The indicator lights

will flash twice, and then the intake air will be

4-28 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (179,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

controlled automatically.

Air flow control:

Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow control

button selects the air outlet to:

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors.

: Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and foot out-

lets.

To turn the system off

Push the “OFF” button.

SAA2324

SAA2315

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow

from the foot outlets may not operate for a

maximum of 150 seconds. This is not a

malfunction. After the coolant temperature

warms up, air will flow normally from the foot

outlets.

The sensors *

Aand *

Bon the instrument

panel helps maintain a constant temperature. Do

not put anything on or around this sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioning system is equipped with an

in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,

dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,

defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the

filter in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in the NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide. To replace the filter, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

The filter should be replaced if air flow is

extremely decreased or when windows fog

up easily when operating heater or air

conditioning system.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (180,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN is

charged with a refrigerant designed with the

environment in mind. This refrigerant will not

harm the earth’s ozone layer. However,

special charging equipment and lubricant are

required when servicing your NISSAN air con-

ditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-

cants will cause severe damage to your air

conditioning system. (See “CAPACITIES AND

RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the

“9. Technical and consumer information” section

for air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations.)

Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your

environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under

high pressure. To avoid personal injury,

any air conditioner service should be

done only by an experienced technician

with the proper equipment.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and push the radio band select button

to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with

the engine not running, the ignition switch

should be pushed to the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external

influences. Intermittent changes in reception

quality normally are caused by these external

influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the

vehicle may influence radio reception

quality.

Radio reception:

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance

radio reception. These circuits are designed to

extend reception range, and to enhance the

quality of that reception.

However there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the finest equipment is used. These

characteristics are completely normal in a given

reception area, and do not indicate any mal-

function in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change

because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other

vehicles can work against ideal reception.

Described below are some of the factors that

can affect your radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the

device in a different location may reduce or

eliminate the noise.

AUDIO SYSTEM

4-30 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (181,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA0306

FM radio reception:

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30

miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if the

FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The

strength of the FM signal is directly related to the

distance between the transmitter and receiver.

FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting

many of the same characteristics as light. For

example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,

usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter, static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the

treble setting to reduce the treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-

flected signals reach the receiver at the same

time. The signals may cancel each other,

resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception:

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics. AM signals are also

subject to interference as they travel from

transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped):

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a

malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with the

satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any

metal or large building for the satellite radio to

receive all of the necessary data.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is

not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

The satellite radio performance may be affected

if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite

radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite

antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna

can affect satellite radio performance. Remove

the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (182,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA0480

Compact Disc (CD) player

.Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD and/

or CD changer/player.

.Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed

could damage the CD and/or CD changer.

.During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to the humidity. If this

occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or

ventilate the player completely.

.The player may skip while driving on rough

roads.

.The CD player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-

perature before use.

.Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round

discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGI-

TAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.

.Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

.CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched,

covered with fingerprints, or that have pin

holes may not work properly.

.The following CDs may not work properly:

— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

.Do not use the following CDs as they may

cause the CD player to malfunction.

— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

— CDs that are not round

— CDs with a paper label

— CDs that are warped, scratched, or have

abnormal edges

.This audio system can only play prerecorded

CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn

CDs.

.If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

— Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly

(the label side is facing up, etc.).

— Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped

and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is an error due to the temperature inside

the player is too high. Remove the CD by

pushing the EJECT button, and after a short

time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played

when the temperature of the player returns

to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio system

(only MP3 or WMA CD).

4-32 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (183,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

LHA0484

DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) player

(models with navigation system)

.Do not force a compact disc into the CD/

DVD insert slot. This could damage the CD/

DVD player.

.During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to humidity. If this

occurs, remove the CD/DVD and dehumidify

or ventilate the player completely.

.The player may skip while driving on rough

roads.

.The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot

function when the passenger compartment

temperature is extremely high. Decrease the

temperature before use.

.Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round

discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGI-

TAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video” logo on the

disc or packaging.

.Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct

sunlight.

.CD/DVDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that

have pinholes may not work properly.

.The following CD/DVDs are not guaranteed

to play:

— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

— Recordable DVDs (DVD+R, DVD+R

DL)

— Rewritable DVDs (DVD+RW, DVD+RW

DL)

.Do not use the following CD/DVDs as they

may cause the CD/DVD player to malfunc-

tion.

— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

— CD/DVDs that are not round

— CD/DVDs with a paper label

— CD/DVDs that are warped, scratched or

have abnormal edges

— This audio system can only play prere-

corded CD/DVDs. It has no capabilities

to record or burn CD/DVDs.

.If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

Disc Read Error:

— Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted

correctly (the label side is facing up, etc.).

— Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

Please Eject Disc:

— This may be an error due to the tempera-

ture inside the player being too high.

Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the

EJECT button, and after a short time

reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

Information Provided by:

Black plate (184,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

be played when the temperature of the

player returns to normal. If the error

persists, consult your local dealership.

Unplayable File:

— The file may be copy protected.

— The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A or

DivX®type.

Region Invalid:

— The DVD is not for region 1 or all regions.

Use DVDs with a region code “1”, “ALL”

or “1 included” for your DVD entertain-

ment system. (The region code *

Ais

displayed as a small symbol printed on

the top of the DVD *

B.) This vehicle-

installed DVD player cannot play DVDs

with a region code other than “1” or

“ALL”.

.The technology protected by the U.S. patent

and other intellectual property rights owned

by Macrovision Corporation and other right

holders is adopted for this system.

.This copyright protected technology cannot

be used without a permit from Macrovision

Corporation. It is limited to be personal use,

etc., as long as the permit from Macrovision

Corporation is not issued.

.Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.

.Dolby digital is manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

.Dolby and the double D mark “ ” are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

.DTS and DTS 2.0 “ ” are registered

trademarks of DTS, Inc.

Parental level (parental control):

DVDs with the parental control setting can be

played with this system. Please use your own

judgement to set the parental control with the

system.

Disc selection:

The following disc formats can be played with

the DVD drive.

.DVD-VIDEO

.VIDEO-CD

.CD-DA (Conventional Compact Disc)

.DTS-CD

USB (Universal Serial Bus) (models with

navigation system)

This system supports various USB memory

sticks, USB hard drives and iPod®players.

There are some USB devices which may not

be supported with this system.

.Make sure that the USB device is connected

correctly into the USB connector.

.Do not force the memory stick or USB cable

into the USB connector. This could damage

the connector.

.During cold weather or rainy days, the player

may malfunction due to humidity. If this

occurs, remove the USB device and dehu-

midify or ventilate the USB player comple-

tely.

.The USB player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-

perature before use.

.Do not leave USB memory in a place prone

to static electricity or where the air condi-

tioner blows directly. The data in the USB

memory may be damaged.

.The vehicle is not equipped with a USB

memory stick.

.A USB device cannot be formatted with this

system. To format a USB device, use a

personal computer.

.Partitioned USB devices may not be played

correctly.

.Some characters used in other languages

4-34 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (185,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed

properly on the vehicle center screen. Using

English language characters with a USB

device is recommended.

.Do not connect a USB device if a connector

or cable is wet. Allow the cable and/or

connectors to dry completely before con-

necting the USB device. If the connector is

exposed to fluids other than water, evapora-

tive residue may cause a short between the

connector pins.

.Large video podcast files cause slow

responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center

display may momentarily black out, but it will

soon recover.

.If an iPod®automatically selects large video

podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momentarily

black out, but it will soon recover.

.Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on an iPod®.

.An iPod nano®(1st Generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is

connected during a seek operation. In this

case, please manually reset the iPod®.

.An iPod nano®(2nd Generation) will con-

tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

.An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using the iPod

nano®(2nd Generation)

iPod®is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA/

AAC)

Explanation of terms:

.MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track can reduce the file size by

approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1

kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no

perceptible loss in quality. The compression

reduces certain parts of sound that seem

inaudible to most people.

.WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

.AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding

(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.

Audio files that have been encoded with

AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver

a higher quality of sound than MP3.

.Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

.Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

.Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is

called a multisession.

.ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.

ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows®and Windows Media®are regis-

tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States of America

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Information Provided by:

Black plate (186,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

and/or other countries.

SAA2494

Playback order:

.The folder names of folders not containing

compressed audio files are not shown in the

display.

.If there is a file in the top level of a disc/USB,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

.The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software, so

the files might not play in the desired order.

.Music playback order of compressed audio

files is as illustrated in the next figure.

4-36 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (187,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DL, USB2.0

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DL: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2,

Romeo, Joliet

* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.

UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0

* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB memory: FAT16, FAT32

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1 Audio Layer 3

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR (Ver.9)*4

AAC*5

Version MPEG-AAC

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz

Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

Tag information (Song title and Artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels

With navigation system:

Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Without navigation system:

Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation With navigation system: 100 characters

Without navigation system: 64 characters

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

Information Provided by:

Black plate (188,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big

Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

*5 Models with navigation system

4-38 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (189,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the

player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will

be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)”, “.M4A (.m4a)”, or “.AA3 (.aa3)” cannot be played. In

addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the

specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of

compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time before

the music starts playing. If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the next song

when playing.

If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by copyright

protection, the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in the

desired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the desired order.

Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (190,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Compressed Video Files (models with

navigation system)

Explanation of terms:

.DivX®- DivX®refers to the DivX®codec

owned by DivX, Inc. used for a lossy

compression of video based on MPEG-4.

.AVI - AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.

It is a standard file format originated by

Microsoft Corporation. A “.divx” encoded file

can be saved into the “.avi” file format for

playback on this system if it meets the

requirements stated in the table in this

section. However, not all the “.avi” files are

playable on this system since different

encodings can be used than the DivX®

codec.

.ASF - ASF stands for Advanced Systems

Format. It is a file format owned by Microsoft

Corporation. Note: Only “.asf” files that meet

the requirements stated in the table in this

section can be played.

.Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital video file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

Requirement for Supporting Video Play-

back:

Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory

File Systems CD,

CD-R,

CD-RW,

DVD,

DVD+R,

DVD+RW,

DVD+RW DL

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge

(UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0

- ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

- Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows

Vista-based computer) are not supported.

- VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.

USB Memory FAT16, FAT32

File Types .divx, .avi Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6

Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM

.asf Video Codec ISO-MPEG4

Audio Codec G.726

Bit Rates .divx, .avi Maximum Average 4Mbps

Maximum Peak 8Mbps

Resolution .divx, .avi Minimum 32 632

Maximum 720 6480

.asf Minimum 32 632

Maximum 720 6576

4-40 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (191,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Bluetooth®Audio player (models with

navigation system)

.Some Bluetooth®audio devices may not be

recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.

.It is necessary to set up the wireless

connection between a compatible Blue-

tooth®audio device and the in-vehicle

Bluetooth®module before using the Blue-

tooth®audio player.

.Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®

audio player will vary depending on the

device. Make sure it is understood how to

operate an audio device before using it with

this system.

.The Bluetooth®audio player may be stopped

under the following conditions:

— Receiving a hands-free call.

— Checking the connection to the hands-

free phone.

.Do not place a Bluetooth®audio device in an

area surrounded by metal or far away from

the in-vehicle Bluetooth®module to prevent

tone quality degradation and wireless con-

nection disruption.

.While an audio device is connected through

a Bluetooth®wireless connection, the bat-

tery power of the device may discharge

quicker than usual.

.This system supports the Bluetooth®Audio

Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

.Bluetooth®is a trademark owned by Blue-

tooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Clarion Co.,

Ltd.

Music Box®(models with navigation

system)

Recording:

.Note that data that is lost and not stored to

theharddriveduetosystemdamage,

improper operation or malfunction is not

under warranty.

.Vehicle owners are not permitted to record

music without permission of the owner of

the copyright except for personal use.

.Check if the music is appropriately recorded

to the hard drive after recording when the

compact disc cannot be rerecorded.

.Some music cannot be recorded depending

on the disc condition due to high-speed

recording.

.Jumping sounds may be recorded when a

compact disc is recorded while driving on

rough roads and excessive vibration occurs.

.A mark indicating jumping sounds is dis-

played if jumping sounds are recorded.

.No sounds may be recorded if jumping

sounds occurs or the disc is in poor

condition.

.Tracks that include Serial Copy Manage-

ment System (SCMS) are not recorded.

.If a compact disc is scratched or dirty, it may

not be recorded, jumping sounds may occur

or it may take a long time to record.

Automatic title download:

.The title information that is automatically

downloaded may differ from the actual title.

.When newly released compact discs are

recorded, their title information may not be

downloaded.

.The title information in the hard drive can be

updated. (See “Playing recorded songs”

later in this section.)

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

Information Provided by:

Black plate (192,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2742

1. FM·AM radio band select button

2. CD EJECT button

3. CD button

4. Station and preset select buttons

5. Audio display

6. AUX (auxiliary) button

7. MENU button

8. SEEK/APS (automatic program search) FF (fast

forward)·APS REW (rewind) button

9. RDM (random) button

10. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control knob

11. SCAN tuning button

12. AUX IN jack

13. RPT (repeat) button

14. TUNE/FF·REW button

FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC

(CD) PLAYER

For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO

OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this

section.

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both

radio reception and CD playback.

ON·OFF/Volume control:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, and then push the PWR button while

the system is off to call up the mode (radio, CD

or AUX) which was playing immediately before

the system was turned off. While the system is

on, pushing the PWR button turns the system

off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

MENU button:

Push the MENU button to change the selecting

mode as follows.

4-42 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (193,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Push the TUNE or or SEEK or

button to adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and

Balance to the desired level. Fade adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakers

and Balance adjusts the sound between the

right and left speakers.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the

desired level, push the MENU button repeatedly

until the radio or CD display reappears (normal

mode). Otherwise, the radio or CD display will

automatically reappear after approximately 10

seconds.

Clock adjustment:

Push the MENU button until the CLOCK mode

appears. Then push the TUNE or SEEK button

to select “CLK-ON” or “CLK-OFF” to turn the

clock on or off.

“CLK-ON” needs to be selected before adjust-

ing the clock display.

1. Push the MENU button.

2. Push the MENU button again. The clock

display starts to flash.

3. Push the TUNE or SEEK button to adjust the

hours.

4. Push the MENU button again. The display

will switch to the minute adjustment mode.

5. Push the TUNE or SEEK button to adjust the

minutes.

6. Push the MENU button again to exit the

clock mode.

The display will return to the regular clock

display after 5 seconds.

To reset the minute to zero, hold down the

MENU button and then push the TUNE or SEEK

button, the time will be reset as follows.

.In case the displayed minute is in the range

of 00 - 29, the hour will stay the same and

the minute will be reset to 00.

.In case the displayed minute is in the range

of 30 - 59, the hour will be advanced by one

hour and the minute will be reset to 00.

For example, if the MENU and TUNE buttons are

pushed while the time is between “8:00” and

“8:29”, the display will be reset to “8:00”. If

pushed while the time is between “8:30” and

“8:59”, the display will be reset to “9:00”. At the

same time the display will return to the previous

audio mode.

FM-AM radio operation

Radio (FM/AM) band select:

Pushing the radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

AM ?FM1 ?FM2 ?AM

When the radio band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the station last

played.

The last station played will also come on when

the PWR button is pushed to ON.

If another audio source is playing when the radio

band select button is pushed, the audio source

will automatically be turned off and the last radio

station played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

Push the TUNE button or for manual

tuning.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

Information Provided by:

Black plate (194,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SEEK tuning:

Push the SEEK button or to tune from

low to high or high to low frequencies and to

stop at the next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stops at each broad-

casting station for 5 seconds. Pushing the

button again during this 5 seconds period will

stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

to Station memory operations:

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6

each for FM1 and FM2) and 6 stations can be

set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the radio band select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,

SCAN or TUNE button.

3. Select the desired station and push and

hold the desired station preset buttons 1 to

6 until a beep sound is heard. (The radio

mutes when the select button is pushed.)

4. The station indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

Compact Disc (CD) player operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, and insert the CD into the slot with the

label side facing up. The CD will be guided

automatically into the slot and start playing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

the disc will appear on the display.

If the radio is already operating, it will auto-

matically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the CD

was playing, pushing the PWR button will start

the CD.

MP3 or WMA CDs are not supported with this

CD player. If an MP3 or WMA CD is inserted

into the slot, the counter on the audio display

automatically advances without sound. However

this is a specification of the CD mechanism and

not a malfunction.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

CD PLAY:

When the CD button is pushed with the system

off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on

and the CD will start to play.

When the CD button is pushed with the CD

loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the CD will start

to play.

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Rewind):

When the (fast forward) or (rewind) of

the TUNE button is pushed while the CD is

being played, the CD will play while fast

forwarding or rewinding.

When the button is released, the CD will return

to normal play speed.

APS (Automatic Program Search)

FF, APS REW:

When the (APS FF) of the SEEK button is

pushed while the CD is being played, the next

track or the current track on the CD will start to

play from its beginning. Push several times to

skip through tracks. The CD will advance the

number of times the button is pushed. (When

the last track on the CD is skipped through, the

4-44 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (195,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

first track will be played.)

When the (APS REW) button is pushed,

the track being played returns to its beginning.

Push several times to skip back through tracks.

The CD will go back the number of times the

button is pushed.

REPEAT (RPT)/RANDOM

(RDM) play:

When the RPT or RDM button is pushed while a

CD is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

RPT button:

1 Disc Repeat (Normal play) ↔1 Track Repeat

RDM button:

1 Disc Repeat (Normal play) ↔1 Disc Random

The display shows the following symbols:

(No mark): 1 Disc Repeat

1: 1 Track Repeat

RDM: 1 Disc Random

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

When this button is pushed while the CD is

being played, the CD will come out and the

system will turn off.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect

it.

SCAN tuning:

When the SCAN tuning button is pushed while

the CD is being played, the beginning of all the

tracks of the CDs will be played for 10 seconds

in sequence.

Pushing the button again during this 10 second

period will stop SCAN tuning.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within

10 seconds, SCAN tuning continues to move to

the next CD track.

AUX (Auxiliary) input

AUX IN jack:

The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from a

portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or

laptop computer.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

Push the AUX button to play a compatible

device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

When the AUX button is pushed with no device

plugged into the jack, the audio system does not

change to the AUX mode (the AUX button is

invalid).

NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo

mini plug cable when connecting your music

device to the audio system. Music may not play

properly when a monaural cable is used.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

Information Provided by:

Black plate (196,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2280

1. CD EJECT button

2. DISP (display) button

3. Radio station preset/CD select buttons

4. Audio display

5. SCRL (scroll) button

6. LOAD button

7. SEEK the TRACK, CAT (category) or FILE/APS

(automatic program search) FF (fast forward)·APS

REW (rewind) button

8. MUTE button

9. FM·AM band select button

10. AUDIO button

11. SAT (satellite) band select button

12. SCAN tuning button

13. ON·OFF button/ VOL (volume) control knob

14. DISC button

15. RPT (repeat) button

16. AUX (auxiliary) button

17. RDM (random) button

18. AUX IN jack

19. TUNE the CH (channel) or FOLDER/FF·REW

button

4-46 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (197,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) CHANGER (models without

navigation system)

For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO

OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this

section.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is

not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activation

signal after subscribing to the XM Satellite

Radio. After receiving the activation signal, an

available channel list will be automatically

updated in the radio. For XM, push the ignition

switch from LOCK to ACC to update the

channel list.

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both

radio reception and CD playback.

ON·OFF/Volume control:

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, and then push the ON·OFF button

while the system is off to call up the mode (radio,

CD or AUX) which was playing immediately

before the system was turned off. While the

system is on, pushing the ON·OFF button turns

the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

MUTE button:

Push the button to mute the audio sound.

Push the button again to release the mute.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-

ance:

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push

the Audio button. When the display shows the

setting you want to change (Bass, Treble,

Balance and Fade), push the SEEK or TUNE

button to set the desired setting.

These items can also be adjusted by pushing

the AUDIO button.

.Speed Sensitive Vol.

Sound volume is increased according to the

vehicle speed. Choose the effect level from

“HIGH”, “MID”, “LOW” or “OFF”.

.Beep tuning

When this item is turned to ON, you will hear

a beep sound when you use a button.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

radio (FM/AM) band select:

Pushing the radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

AM ?FM1 ?FM2 ?AM

radio (SAT) band select:

Pushing the radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

XM1 ?XM2 ?XM3 ?XM1

When the radio band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the channel

last played.

The last channel played will also come on when

the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is

not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If another audio source is playing when the radio

band select button is turned to ON, the audio

source will automatically be turned off and the

last radio channel played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Information Provided by:

Black plate (198,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

.For AM and FM radio

Push the TUNE button or for

manual tuning.

.For XM Satellite Radio

Push the TUNE button or to seek

channels from all of the categories when any

CAT is not selected.

SEEK tuning/CATEGORY

(CAT):

.For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK button or to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

.For XM Satellite Radio

Push the SEEK button or to tune

to the first channel of the next or previous

category.

During satellite radio reception, the following

notices will be displayed under certain condi-

tions.

.NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the

SAT tuner is connected.)

.OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

.CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection

error)

.LOADING (When the initial setting is

performed)

.UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-

scription is not active)

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stop at each broad-

casting station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing

the button again during this 5 seconds period

will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station/channel.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station/channel.

1to *

6Station memory operations:

18 stations/channels can be set for the SAT

band (6 each for XM1, XM2 and XM3), 12 can

be set for the FM band (6 each for FM1 and

FM2), and 6 can be set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band using the radio band

select button.

2. Tune to the desired station/channel using

the SEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.

3. Push and hold the desired radio station

preset button *

1to *

6until a beep sound

is heard. (The radio mutes when the select

button is pushed.)

4. The station indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

RADIO DISPLAY change:

When the DISP button is pushed while the radio

is being played, the audio display will change as

follows:

Compact Disc (CD) changer operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, push the LOAD button and insert the

CD into the slot with the label side facing up.

The CD will be guided automatically into the slot

4-48 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (199,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

and start playing.

After loading the CD, the number of tracks on

the CD and the play time will appear on the

display.

If the radio is already operating, it will auto-

matically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the CD

was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will

start the CD.

CD LOAD:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the

LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select

the loading position by pushing the CD insert

select button *

1to *

6, then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in

succession, push the LOAD button for more

than 1.5 seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the

display.

PLAY:

When the DISC (CD play) button is pushed with

the system off and the CD loaded, the system

will turn on and the CD will start to play.

When the DISC button is pushed with the CD

loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the CD will start

to play.

When the DISC button is pushed while a CD is

loaded and a medium is played using the

auxiliary input jacks, you can toggle back and

forth between CD and medium.

CD DISPLAY information:

When the DISP button is pushed while the CD

is being played, the audio display will change as

follows:

CD:

CD with MP3 or WMA:

FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-

wind):

CD:

When the (fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed while the CD is being played,

the CD will play while fast forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released, the

CD will return to normal play speed.

CD with MP3 or WMA:

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,

the folders in the CD will change.

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being

played, the CD will play while forwarding or

rewinding. When the button is released, the CD

will return to the normal play speed.

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW:

When the (APS FF) button is pushed while

the CD is being played, the program next to the

present one will start to play from its beginning.

Push several times to skip through programs.

The CD will advance the number of times the

button is pushed. (When the last program on the

CD is skipped through, the first program will be

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

Information Provided by:

Black plate (200,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

played.) When the (APS REW) button is

pushed, the program being played returns to its

beginning. Push several times to skip back

through programs. The CD will go back the

number of times the button is pushed.

CD PLAY selection:

To change to another CD already loaded into the

player, push the CD play select buttons *

1to

REPEAT (RPT) play:

When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is

played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

(CD)

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

RANDOM (RDM) play:

When the RDM button is pushed while the CD

is played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

(CD)

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

Scroll (SCRL) button:

When the title is displayed but it is a long one,

the whole title is not shown in the display. In this

case, push the button to scroll the title.

When the title is scrolled to the end of it, the

display will stop moving and return to the first

condition.

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD select

button, push the EJECT button for less than 1.5

seconds.

To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for

more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while the CD is

being played, the CD will come out and the

system will turn off.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect

it.

AUX (Auxiliary) input

AUX IN jack:

The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.

The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from a

portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or

laptop computer.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

Push the AUX button to play a compatible

device when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

When the AUX button is pushed with no device

plugged into the jack, the audio system does not

change to the AUX mode (the AUX button is

invalid).

4-50 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (201,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2495

1. DVD·CD EJECT button

2. ON·OFF button/VOL (volume) control knob

3. Radio station preset select buttons

4. DISC·AUX (auxiliary) button

5. Radio TUNE (tuning) folder selector/AUDIO con-

trol knob

6. Radio SCAN tuning button

7. FM·AM band select button

8. CD RPT (repeat)/RDM (random) play button

9. SAT (satellite) button

10. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button for

SEEK/TRACK

11. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (models with navi-

gation system)

For all operation precautions, see “AUDIO

OPERATION PRECAUTIONS” earlier in this

section.

The satellite radio mode requires an active XM

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is

not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activation

signal after subscribing the XM Satellite Radio.

After receiving the activation signal, an available

channel list will be automatically updated in the

radio. For XM, push the ignition switch from

LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and

high frequency ranges automatically in both

radio reception and CD playback.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

Information Provided by:

Black plate (202,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

ON·OFF/Volume control:

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, and then push the ON·OFF button

while the system is off to turn on the last audio

source (i.e. FM or CD), which was playing

immediately before the system was turned off.

While the system is on, pushing the ON·OFF

button turns the system off.

Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-

ance:

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push

the Audio control knob. When the display shows

the setting you want to change (Bass, Treble,

Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio control

knob to set the desired setting. For the other

setting methods, see “HOW TO USE SETTING

BUTTON” earlier in this section.

This vehicle has some sound effect functions as

follows:

.Speed Sensitive Vol.

For more details, see “HOW TO USE SETTING

BUTTON” earlier in this section.

Switching the display:

Pushing the DISC·AUX button will switch the

displays as follows:

iPod®/USB ?CD/DVD ?Music Box®?

Bluetooth®Audio ?AUX ?iPod®/USB

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

radio (FM/AM) band select:

Pushing the radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

AM ?FM1 ?FM2 ?AM

radio (SAT) band select:

Pushing the radio band select button will

change the band as follows:

XM1 ?XM2 ?XM3 ?XM1

When the radio band select button is pushed

while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position, the radio will come on at the channel

last played.

The last channel played will also come on when

the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.

The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,

Hawaii and Guam.

If another audio source is playing when the radio

band select button is turned to ON, the audio

source will automatically be turned off and the

last radio channel played will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the

radio will automatically change from stereo to

monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

.For AM and FM radio

Turn the radio TUNE knob for manual tuning.

.For XM Satellite Radio

Turn the radio TUNE knob to seek channels

from all of the categories when any category

is not selected.

SEEK tuning/CATEGORY

(CAT):

.For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK button or to tune

from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

.For XM Satellite Radio

Push the SEEK button or to tune

to the first channel of the next or previous

category.

4-52 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (203,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

During satellite radio reception, the following

notices will be displayed under certain condi-

tions.

.NO SIGNAL (No signal is received while the

SAT tuner is connected.)

.OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

.CHECK ANTENNA (Antenna connection

error)

.LOADING (When the initial setting is

performed)

.UPDATING (When the satellite radio sub-

scription is not active)

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune from low

to high frequencies and stop at each broad-

casting station/channel for 5 seconds. Pushing

the button again during this 5 seconds period

will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station/channel.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station/channel.

1to *

6Station memory operations:

12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band

(6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for XM radio (6

each for XM1, XM2 and XM3) and 6 stations

can be set for the AM band.

1. Choose the radio band using the radio band

select button.

2. Tune to the desired station/channel using

the SEEK/TRACK, SCAN button or the

radio TUNE knob.

3. Push and hold the desired station preset

button *

1to *

6until the radio mutes.

4. The station indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations/channels.

List (AM and FM radio):

When the “List” key on the display is selected

while the FM or AM radio is being played, the

preset station list will be displayed.

If 1 of the 6 preset stations listed is touched and

held, the current station will be stored as the

new preset.

Menu (XM Satellite Radio):

When the “Menu” key on the display is selected

while the XM Satellite Radio is being played, the

menu list will be displayed.

The following items are available.

.Preset List

Displays the preset channel list. If 1 of the 6

preset stations listed is touched and held,

the current station will be stored as the new

preset.

.Customize Channel List

Selects specific channels to skip while using

the TUNE, SEEK/CATEGORY or Menu-

Categories feature.

.Favorite Artists & Songs

Stores the current artist or song that is being

played. Touch the “Alert” key to be reminded

when the stored artist or song is playing on a

station while listening to XM.

.Categories

Selecting a category will go to the first

channel in that category as defined by XM

Radio.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

Information Provided by:

Black plate (204,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Direct Tune

Inputs the channel number by using a

keypad.

Compact Disc (CD) player operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into

the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will

be guided automatically into the slot and start

playing.

After loading the CD, the number of tracks on

the CD and the play time will appear on the

display.

If the radio is already operating, it will auto-

matically turn off and the CD will play.

If the system has been turned off while the CD

was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will

start the CD.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.

PLAY:

When the DISC·AUX (CD play) button is

pushed with the system off and the CD loaded,

the system will turn on and the CD will start to

play.

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the

CD loaded and the radio playing, the radio will

automatically be turned off and the CD will start

to play.

Menu:

When the “Menu” key on the display is selected

while the CD is being played, the menu screen

will be displayed. The following menu options

are available.

.Folder List (for CD with compressed audio

files)

Displays the folder list.

.Track List

Displays the track list.

.Play Mode

Select a play mode from the following items.

— Normal

— 1 Folder Repeat (for CD with compressed

audio files)

— 1 Track Repeat

— 1 Disc Random

— 1 Folder Random (for CD with com-

pressed audio files)

.Record to Music Box®(for CD)

Select to choose specific songs on the CD

to record to the Music Box®.

.Title Text Priority (for CD)

Set the priority to CDDB (Compact Disc

Data Base) to acquire track information from

the Gracenote Database, or set the priority

to CD-TEXT to acquire the information from

CDs.

.Automatic Recording (for CD)

When this item is turned to ON, the Music

Box®hard drive automatically starts record-

ing when a CD is inserted.

.Recording Quality (for CD)

The larger number (132) will increase the

recorded sound quality while taking up more

space on the Music Box®leaving less room

for more songs.

For the details of Music Box®, see “Music Box®

(models with navigation system)” later in this

section.

Next/Previous Track and Fast

Forward/Rewind:

When the (fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds

while the CD is being played, the CD will play

while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the CD will return to normal

play speed.

4-54 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (205,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,

the next track or the beginning of the current

track on the CD will be played.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When the RPT button is pushed while the CD is

played, the play pattern can be changed as

follows:

(CD)

(CD with compressed audio files)

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.

When this button is pushed while the CD is

being played, the CD will be ejected.

If the CD comes out and is not removed, it

will be pulled back into the slot to protect

it.

DVD (DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC)

PLAYER OPERATION (models with na-

vigation system)

Precautions

Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-

ment system.

Movies will not be shown on the front display

while the vehicle is in any drive position to

reduce driver distraction. Audio is available

when a movie is played. To view movies in the

front display, stop the vehicle in a safe location,

move the selector lever to the P (Park) position

and apply the parking brake.

WARNING

.The driver must not attempt to

operate the DVD system or wear

the headphones while the vehicle is

in motion so that full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

.Do not attempt to modify the system

to display a movie on the front

screen while the vehicle is being

driven. Doing so may distract the

driver and may cause a collision and

serious personal injury or death.

CAUTION

.Only operate the DVD while the

vehicle engine is running. Operating

the DVD for extended periods of

time with the engine OFF can dis-

charge the vehicle battery.

.Do not allow the system to get wet.

Excessive moisture such as spilled

liquids may cause the system to

malfunction.

.While playing VIDEO-CD media, this

DVD player does not guarantee

complete functionality of all VI-

DEO-CD formats.

Display settings

To adjust the front display mode, push the

SETTING button while the DVD is being played,

select the “Others” key and then select the

“Display” key.

To adjust the display ON/OFF, brightness, tint,

color and contrast, select the “Display Adjust-

ment” key and then select each key.

Then you can adjust each item using the multi-

function controller. After changes have been

made push the BACK button to save the setting.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

Information Provided by:

Black plate (206,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2497

Playing a DVD

DISC·AUX button:

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the

front seat occupants to operate the DVD

drive while watching the images.

Push the DISC·AUX button on the instrument

panel and turn the display to the DVD mode.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed

automatically.

The operation screen will be turned on when the

DISC·AUX button located on the instrument

panel is pushed while a DVD is being played,

and it will turn off automatically after a period of

time. To turn it on again, push the DISC·AUX

button again.

DVD operation keys:

When the DVD is playing without the operation

screen being shown, you may use the touch

screen to select items from the displayed video.

You may also use the multifunction controller to

select an item from the displayed video. When

the operation screen is being shown, use the

multifunction controller or touch screen to select

an item from the displayed menus.

PAUSE:

Select the “ ” key to pause the DVD. To

resume playing the DVD, use the “PLAY” key.

PLAY:

Select the “ ” key to start playing the DVD,

for example, after pausing the DVD.

STOP:

Select the “ ” key to stop playing the DVD.

/ Next/Previous Chapter:

Select the “ ”or“ ” key to skip the

chapter(s) of the disc forward/backward. The

chapters will advance/go back the number of

times this key is selected.

/ Commercial Skip:

This function is only for DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR.

Select the “ ”or“ ” key to skip forward

or backwards by the set amount as defined in

the DVD Settings menu.

Top Menu:

When the “Top Menu” key is selected in the

screen while a DVD is being played, the top

menu specific to each disc will be displayed. For

details, see the instructions on the disc.

4-56 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (207,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2498

Example

DVD settings

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following

settings.

Key (DVD-VIDEO):

Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed.

: Move the cursor to select a DVD menu.

Enter: Enter the selected menu.

Move: Change the display location by moving

the operation key.

Back: Return to the previous screen.

Hide: Hide the operation key.

Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO):

Some menus specific to each disc will be

shown. For details, see the instructions on the

disc.

Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):

The scene with the specified title will be

displayed each time the “+” side or “−” side is

selected.

Group Search (VIDEO CD):

A scene in the specified group will be displayed

each time the “+” side or “−” side is selected.

10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,

CD-DA, DVD-VR):

Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the

number entry screen. Input the number to be

searched and select the “OK” key. The specified

Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.

Select No. (VIDEO-CD):

Select the “Select No.” key to open the number

entry screen. Input the number to be searched

and select the “OK” key. The specified scene

will be played.

Angle (DVD-VIDEO):

If the DVD contains different angles (such as

moving images), the current image angle can be

switched to another one. Select the “Angle” key.

The angle will change each time the “+” side or

“−” side is selected.

Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO):

When this item is turned on, an angle mark will

be shown on the bottom of the screen if the

scene can be seen from a different angle.

Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO):

DVD menus are automatically configured and

the contents will be played directly when the

“Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note that some

discs may not be played directly even if this item

is turned on.

CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO):

Select the “CM Skip” key. Choose the setting

time from 15, 30 or 60 seconds by selecting the

“+” side or “−” side.

DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) automati-

cally adjusts the soundtrack volume level to

maintain a more even sound to the speakers.

DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD):

Select the “DVD Language” key to open the

number entry screen. Input the number corre-

sponding to the preferred language and select

the “OK” key. The DVD top menu language will

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

Information Provided by:

Black plate (208,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

be changed to the one specified.

Display:

To adjust the image quality of the screen, select

the preferred adjustment items.

Audio:

Select the preferred language for audio.

Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR):

Select the preferred language for subtitles.

Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,

DVD-VR):

Select from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or

“Cinema” modes.

Title List (DVD-VR):

Select the preferred title from the list.

Play Mode:

Select the preferred play mode.

PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR):

Select the “PG” or “PL” mode.

SAA2499

USB MEMORY OPERATION (models

with navigation system)

Audio main operation

Open the console lid and connect a USB

memory as illustrated. Then, push the DISC·AUX

button repeatedly to switch to the USB memory

mode.

If the system has been turned off while the USB

memory was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL

control knob will start the USB memory.

SAA2500

File selection

When there are both audio and movie files in the

USB memory, the mode select screen is

displayed. Select the preferred contents to play.

When there is only one type of file, the audio or

movie operation screen is displayed and starts

to play.

If a video file restricts the number of playbacks, a

pop-up screen will appear to confirm it is ok to

play. Answer yes or no as requested by the

display.

4-58 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (209,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2501

Audio file operation

PLAY:

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the

system off and the USB memory inserted, the

system will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a USB

memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button

repeatedly until the center display changes to

the USB memory mode.

Next/Previous File and Fast

Forward/Rewind:

When the (Rewind) or (Fast Forward)

button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds

while a USB memory is being played, the USB

memory will play while forwarding or rewinding.

When the button is released, the USB memory

will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the USB memory is

being played, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the USB memory will be

played.

The multi-function controller can also be used to

select tracks when the USB memory is being

played.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the USB memory,

turn the folder selector or choose a folder

displayed on the screen using the multi-function

controller.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When the RPT button is pushed while the USB

memory is played, the play pattern can be

change as follows.

To change the play mode, push the RPT button

repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.

Normal ?1 Folder Repeat ?1 Track Repeat ?

All Random ?1 Folder Random ?Normal

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

Information Provided by:

Black plate (210,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2502

Menu:

There are some options available during play-

back. Select one of the following options that

are displayed on the screen if necessary. Refer

to the following information for each item.

.Movie Playback

Switch to the movie playback mode. This

item is displayed only when a USB memory

contains movie files.

.Folder List/Track List

Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie

Playback” key is also displayed in this list

screen, and enables switching to the movie

playback mode.

.Play Mode

Select the preferred play mode.

SAA2503

Movie file operation

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the

front seat occupants to operate the USB

memory while watching the images.

PLAY:

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the

system off and the USB memory inserted, the

system will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and a USB

memory is inserted, push the DISC·AUX button

repeatedly until the center display changes to

the USB memory mode.

4-60 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (211,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Operation keys:

To operate the USB memory, select the desired

key displayed on the operation screen using the

multi-function controller.

Pause

Select the “ ” key to pause the movie file. To

resume playing the movie file, select the “ ”

key.

Play

Select the “ ” key to start playing a movie file,

for example, after pausing a movie file.

STOP

Select the “ ” key to stop playing a movie file.

Skip (Next chapter)

Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s) of

the disc forward. The chapters will advance the

number of times the ENTER button is pushed.

Skip (Previous chapter)

Select the “ ” key to skip the chapter(s) of

the disc backward. The chapters will go back

the number of times the “ ” key is selected.

List:

Select the “List” key on the movie file operation

screen to display the file list.

SAA2504

Example

Settings:

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following

settings.

.Audio File Playback

Switch to the audio playback mode. This

item is displayed only when the USB

memory contains the audio files.

.Play Mode

Select the “Normal” or “1 Track Repeat” play

mode.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

Information Provided by:

Black plate (212,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.10 Key Search

Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the

number entry screen.

Input the number to be searched and select

the “OK” key.

The specified folder/file will be played.

.Display

To adjust the image quality of the screen,

select the preferred adjustment items.

.DRC

DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-

matically adjusts the soundtrack volume

level to maintain a more even sound to the

speakers.

.Audio

Select the preferred language for audio.

.Subtitle

Select the preferred language for subtitle.

.Display Mode

Select the “Normal”, “Wide”, “Cinema” or

“Full” mode.

BLUETOOTH®STREAMING AUDIO

(models with navigation system)

Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth®

Streaming Audio. If you have a compatible

Bluetooth®device with streaming audio (A2DP

profile), you can set up the wireless connection

between your Bluetooth®device and the in-

vehicle audio system. This connection allows

you to listen to the audio from the Bluetooth®

device using your vehicle speakers. It also may

allow basic control of the device for playing and

skipping audio files using the AVRCP Blue-

tooth®profile. All Bluetooth®Devices do not

have the same level of controls for AVRCP.

Please consult the manual for your Bluetooth®

Device for more details.

Once your Bluetooth®device is connected to

the in-vehicle audio system, it will automatically

reconnect whenever the device is present in the

vehicle and you select Bluetooth®Audio from

your audio system. You do not need to manually

reconnect for each usage.

Regulatory information

FCC Regulatory information:

— CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) This device may not cause interference

and

2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information:

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) This device may not cause interference,

and

2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

— This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

4-62 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (213,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Bluetooth trademark:

Bluetooth®is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and li-

censed to Clarion Co., Ltd.

SAA2505

Connecting procedure

1. Push the SETTING button and select the

“Bluetooth” key.

SAA2506

2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

Information Provided by:

Black plate (214,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2507

3. A confirmation screen will be displayed.

Select “No”.

Note: Selecting “Yes” will only connect the

hands free phone portion of a Bluetooth®

device.

SAA3005

4. Choose a PIN code to use with the

compatible Bluetooth audio device using

the number input screen. The PIN code will

need to be entered into the Bluetooth®audio

device after step 5. Select the “OK” key.

SAA3006

5. The standby message screen will appear.

Operate the compatible Bluetooth®audio

device. For the connecting procedure of the

audio device, see the Bluetooth®audio

instructions.

When the connecting is completed, the

screen will return to the Bluetooth®setup

display.

4-64 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (215,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2510

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button

repeatedly to switch to the Bluetooth®audio

mode. If the system has been turned off while

the Bluetooth®audio device was playing, push-

ing the ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the

Bluetooth®audio device.

The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward,

rewind, randomize and repeat music may be

different between devices. Some or all of these

functions may not be supported on each device.

DISC·AUX button:

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the

system off and the Bluetooth®audio device

connected, the system will turn on. If another

audio source is playing and the Bluetooth®audio

device is connected, push the DISC·AUX button

repeatedly until the display changes to the

Bluetooth®audio mode.

Next/Previous Track and Fast

Forward/Rewind:

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth®audio

file is being played, the Bluetooth®audio device

will play while forwarding or rewinding. When

the button is released, the Bluetooth®audio

device will return to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while a Bluetooth®audio file is

being played, the next track or the beginning of

the current track on the Bluetooth®audio device

will be played. The multi-function controller can

also be used to select tracks when the Blue-

tooth®audio play mode screen is shown on the

display. (“Bluetooth audio” will be indicated on

the header of the screen.)

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

To change the play mode, push the button

repeatedly and the mode changes as follows.

Normal ?Shuffle All Tracks ?Shuffle Group

?Repeat 1 Track ?Repeat All Tracks ?

Repeat Group ?Normal

Operation keys:

To operate a Bluetooth®audio device, select a

key displayed on the operation screen using the

multi-function controller.

Play

Select the “ ” key to start playing when

pausing. Select this key again to pause the

audio play.

Pause

Select the “ ” key to pause the Bluetooth®

audio device. Select this key again to resume

playing.

Play Mode:

The play mode setting display will appear when

the “Menu” key is selected.

Choose the preferred play mode from the

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

Information Provided by:

Black plate (216,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

following items.

.Shuffle

Choose “Shuffle OFF”, “Shuffle All Tracks”

and “Shuffle Group”.

.Repeat

Choose from “Repeat OFF”, “Repeat 1

Track”, “Repeat All Tracks” and “Repeat

Group”.

SAA2511

Bluetooth®settings

To set up the Bluetooth®device system to the

preferred settings, push the SETTING button

and select the “Bluetooth” key.

Bluetooth:

If this setting is turned off, the connection

between the Bluetooth®devices and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth®module will be canceled.

Connect Bluetooth:

Connects to the Bluetooth®device. See “Con-

necting procedure” earlier in this section. Up to

5 devices can be registered.

Connected Devices:

Registered devices are shown on the list. Select

a Bluetooth®device from the list, the following

options will be available.

.Select

Select “Select” to connect the selected

device to the vehicle. If there is a different

device currently connected, the selected

device will replace the current device.

.Edit

Rename the selected Bluetooth®device

using the keypad displayed on the screen.

(See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN”

earlier in this section.)

.Delete

Delete the selected Bluetooth®device.

Edit Bluetooth Info:

Change the name broadcasted by this system

over Bluetooth®. Change the PIN code that is

entered when connecting a hands free device to

this system.

Replace Connected Phone:

Replace the Bluetooth®connection with a

connected Bluetooth®cellular phone. For details

about Hands-Free Phone System, see “BLUE-

TOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

4-66 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (217,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

(models with navigation system)” later in this

section.

SAA2512

iPod®PLAYER OPERATION (models

with navigation system)

Connecting iPod®

Open the console lid and connect the iPod®

cable to the USB connector. If compatible, the

battery of the iPod®is charged while the

connection to the vehicle.

Depending on the version of the iPod®, the

display on the iPod®shows a NISSAN or

Accessory Attached screen when the connec-

tion is completed. When the iPod®is connected

to the vehicle, the iPod®music library can only

be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

*iPod

®is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are available:

.Fifth generation iPod®(version 1.2.3 or later)

.iPod Classic®(version 1.1.1 or later)

.First generation iPod touch®(version 2.0.0

or later)

.Second generation iPod touch®(version

1.2.3 or later)

.First generation iPod nano®(version 1.3.1 or

later)

.Second generation iPod nano®(version

1.1.3 or later)

.Third generation iPod nano®(version 1.1 or

later)

.Fourth generation iPod nano®(version 1.0.2

or later)

Make sure that the iPod®version is updated.

Audio main operation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, push the DISC·AUX button

repeatedly to switch to the iPod®mode.

If the system has been turned off while the iPod®

was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

Information Provided by:

Black plate (218,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

start the iPod®.

DISC·AUX button:

When the DISC·AUX button is pushed with the

system off and the iPod®connected, the system

will turn on. If another audio source is playing

and the iPod®is connected, push the DISC·AUX

button repeatedly until the center display

changes to the iPod®mode.

Interface:

The interface for iPod®operation shown on the

vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®

interface. Use the multi-function controller and

the ENTER or BACK button to play the iPod®

with your favorite settings.

The following items can be chosen from the

menu list screen. For further information about

each item, see the iPod®Owner’s Manual.

.Now Playing

.Playlists

.Artists

.Albums

.Songs

.Podcasts

.Genres

.Composers

.Audiobooks

.Shuffle Songs

The following touch-panel buttons shown on the

screen are also available:

.: returns to the previous screen.

.: plays/pauses the music selected.

Next/Previous Track and Fast

Forward/Rewind:

When the or button is pushed for

more than 1.5 seconds while the iPod®is

playing, the iPod®will play while fast forwarding

or rewinding. When the button is released, the

iPod®will return to the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while the iPod®is playing, the

next track or the beginning of the current track

on the iPod®will be played.

The multi-function controller can also be used to

select tracks when the iPod®is playing.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When the RPT button is pushed while a track is

being played, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

4-68 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (219,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Music Box®(models with navigation

system)

The Music Box®can store songs from CDs

being played. 40.0 GB (9.3 GB for music

storage capacity) (with navigation system).

The following CDs can be recorded in the Music

Box®audio system.

.CDs that contain uncompressed audio files

.Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid

CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs

.Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) spe-

cification in CD-Extras

.First session of multisession disc

Extreme temperature conditions [below

−48F(−208C) and above 1588F (708C)] could

affect the performance of the hard drive.

NOTE:

If the hard drive needs to be replaced due

to a malfunction, all stored music data will

be erased.

SAA2513

Recording CDs

1. Operate the audio system to play a CD. For

the details of playing CDs, see “Compact

Disc (CD) player operation” earlier in this

section.

2. Select the “Start REC” key.

NOTE:

.The system starts playing and record-

ing the 1st track on the CD when the

“Start REC” key is selected.

.The recording process can be stopped

at any time. All tracks that were played

before the CD was stopped are stored.

.Individual tracks can be deleted from

the hard drive after the CD is recorded.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

Information Provided by:

Black plate (220,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2514

If the title information of the track being recorded

is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, the

title is automatically displayed on the screen. For

title acquisition from the hard drive, music

recognition technology and related data are

provided by Gracenote®.

If a track is not recorded successfully due to

skipping sounds, the mark is displayed

behind the track number.

The “Music Box®” hard drive cannot perform

recording under the following conditions.

.There is not enough space in the hard drive

.The number of albums reaches the maximum

of 500.

.The number of tracks reaches the maximum

of 3,000.

Automatic recording:

If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned

to ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted.

(See “Music Box®settings” later in this section.)

Stopping recording:

To stop the recording, select the “Stop REC”

key button by touching the screen or using the

multi-function controller.

If the CD is ejected, the audio system is turned

off or the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF

position, the recording also stops. SAA2515

Playing recorded songs

Select the “Music Box®” audio system by using

one of the following methods.

.Push the audio source switch on the

steering wheel repeatedly until the center

display changes to the Music Box®mode.

(See “STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED

CONTROLS FOR AUDIO” later in this

section.)

.Push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until

the center display changes to the Music

Box®mode.

.Give voice commands. (See “NISSAN

VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models

4-70 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (221,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

with navigation system)” later in this sec-

tion.)

Stopping playback:

The system stops playing when:

a. another mode (radio, CD, DVD, USB

memory, iPod or AUX) is selected.

b. the audio system is turned off.

c. the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK

position.

Next/Previous Track and Fast

Forward/Rewind:

When the (fast forward) or (rewind)

button is pushed for more than 1.5 seconds

while a track is being played, the track will play

while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the

button is released, the track will return to the

normal play speed.

When the or button is pushed for less

than 1.5 seconds while a track is being played,

the next track or the beginning of the current

track will be played.

The multi-function controller can also be used to

select tracks when a track is being played.

Play mode selection:

The TUNE/FOLDER knob will skip from album to

album unless it is playing “All Songs” from the

Music Library menu. When playing “All Songs”,

the knob will change the track instead of the

album. The upper right corner of the main screen

will indicate if the TUNE knob is changing by

track or album.

REPEAT (RPT), RANDOM (RDM):

When the RPT·RDM button is pushed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can be

changed as follows:

(Normal) ?1 Album Repeat ?1 Track Repeat

?1 Album Random ?All Random ?(Normal)

Tag Track:

Select “Tag Track” key on the screen when a

track is being played. A menu will show the 5

available playlists. Select one of the playlists to

add the current song to that playlist. If a playlist

is not selectable (text is grayed out), it means

the song already exists in that playlist.

SAA2516

Example

There are some options available by selecting

the “Menu” key on the screen during playback.

Select one of the following options that are

displayed on the screen if necessary.

Now Playing:

Displays a track list to choose a preferred track

for playback.

Music Library:

There are some options available during play-

back. Select one of the following options that

are displayed on the screen if necessary.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

Information Provided by:

Black plate (222,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Artists

Play tracks by an artist whose music is

currently being played. The artists are sorted

in alphabetical order.

.Albums

Play tracks in each album. The albums are

sorted in alphabetical order.

.All Songs

Play tracks from all recorded tracks. The

tracks are sorted in alphabetical order.

.Genres

Play tracks by a selected genre.

My Playlists:

Displays the Playlist and edits the Playlist if

necessary.

Select the “Edit” key.

The following items are available

.Add Current Songs

Add a current track to the Playlist.

.Add Songs by Album

Displays a list of albums in alphabetical

order. Selecting an album displays all of the

tracks in the album. Select tracks from the

list to add to the Playlist.

.Add Songs by Artist

Displays a list of artists in alphabetical order.

Selecting an artist displays all of the tracks

by the artist. Select tracks from the list to

add to the Playlist.

.Edit Songs Order

Reorder the tracks in the Playlist by select-

ing a track and specifying the order.

.Edit Name

Edit the name of the Playlist using the

keypad displayed on the screen. (See

“HOW TO USE MULTI-FUNCTION CON-

TROLLER” earlier in this section.)

.Delete Songs

Delete tracks in the Playlist by selecting from

the displayed song list.

Play Mode:

Choose the preferred play mode from the

following items.

.Normal

.1 Album Repeat

.1 Track Repeat

.1 Playlist Random

.1 Artist Random

.1 Album Random

.1 All Track Random

.1 All Random

Edit Music Information:

Displays the following information about the

Music Box®hard drive to edit if necessary.

.Edit Information of Current Song

Edit the “Track”, “Artist” and “Genre” in-

formation of the current track using the

keypad displayed on the screen. (See

“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier

in this section.)

Edit the “Mode” information by selecting

from the list.

.Edit Information by Album

Edit the displayed name and of a selected

album and the track information in the album.

.Update Gracenote from USB Device

Update the in-vehicle Gracenote Database

using a USB memory. Search the title from a

information acquired on the Internet. Visit

www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for details.

4-72 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (223,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Transfer Missing Titles to USB

Transfer the information of an album re-

corded without titles to a USB memory. Visit

www.nissanusa.com/gracenote/ for details.

.Update Gracenote from HDD

Search the title using the database in the

hard drive.

SAA2517

Music Box®settings

To set the Music box®hard drive to your

preferred settings, select the “Menu” key during

playback, and the “Music Box Settings” key

with the multi-function controller, and then push

the ENTER button.

Music Box®Used/Free Space:

Information about “Saved Album”, “Saved Track”

and “Remaining Time” is displayed.

Automatic Recording:

When this item is turned to ON, the Music Box®

hard drive automatically starts recording when a

CD is inserted.

Delete Songs from Music Box®:

Deletes the current song, selected songs or

albums by choosing from the list, or all songs/

albums in the Music Box®.

Recording Quality:

Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132

kbps. The default is set to 105 kbps.

CDDB Version:

The version of the built-in Gracenote Database

is displayed.

Gracenote

NOTE:

.The information contained in the

Gracenote Database is not fully guar-

anteed.

.The service of the Gracenote Database

on the Internet may be stopped without

prior notice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-

TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.

Gracenote®MusicID®Terms of Use

This application or device contains software

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

Information Provided by:

Black plate (224,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California

(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote

(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this appli-

cation to perform disc and/or file identification

and obtain music-related information, including

name, artist, track, and title information (“Grace-

note Data”) from online servers or embedded

databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”)

and to perform other functions. You may use

Gracenote Data only by means of the intended

End-User functions of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for

your own personal non-commercial use only.

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or

transmit the Gracenote Software or any Grace-

note Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT

TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,

THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACE-

NOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY

PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use

the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you

violate these restrictions. If your license termi-

nates, you agree to cease any and all use of the

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all

rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Soft-

ware, and the Gracenote Servers, including all

ownership rights. Under no circumstances will

Gracenote become liable for any payment to you

for any information that you provide.

You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its

rights under this Agreement against you directly

in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier

to track queries for statistical purposes. The

purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identi-

fier is to allow the Gracenote service to count

queries without knowing anything about who

you are. For more information, see the web page

for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Grace-

note service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”

Gracenote makes no representations or warran-

ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy

of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote

Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete

data from the Gracenote Servers or to change

data categories for any cause that Gracenote

deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are

error-free or that functioning of Gracenote

Software or Gracenote Servers will be unin-

terrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide

you with new enhanced or additional data types

or categories that Gracenote may provide in the

future and is free to discontinue its services at

any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTI-

CULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRIN-

GEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT

WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE

OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACE-

NOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE

SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE

BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR

INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST

PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

Music recognition technology and related data

are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the

industry standard in music recognition technol-

ogy and related content delivery. For more

information, please visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote,

Inc., copyright *

C2000-2009 Gracenote.

Gracenote Software, copyright *

C2000-2009

Gracenote. This product and service may

practice one or more of the following U.S.

Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;

#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192,

#6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and

other patents issued or pending. Some services

supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.

for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade-

4-74 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (225,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and

logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo

are trademarks of Gracenote.

SAA2282

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS (models with

navigation system)

The auxiliary input jacks are located in the center

console. NTSC compatible devices such as

video games, camcorders and portable video

players can be connected to the auxiliary jacks.

Compatible audio devices, such as some MP3

players, can also be connected to the system

through the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded for identifica-

tion purposes.

.Yellow - video input

.White - left channel audio input

.Red - right channel audio input

Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the

power of the portable device.

With a compatible device connected to the

jacks, push the DISC·AUX button repeatedly

until the display switches to the AUX mode. The

output from the device will be played through

the monitor and audio system.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

Information Provided by:

Black plate (226,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2496

AUX Menu

When the “Menu” key on the display is selected

while in the AUX mode, the menu screen will be

displayed.

Display Mode:

Choose the display mode from the following

items.

.Normal

.Wide

.Cinema

Volume Settings:

Choose the volume setting from the following

items.

.Low

.Medium

.High

Display:

Adjust the image quality of the screen, select the

preferred adjustment items.

SAA0451

CD/DVD/USB MEMORY CARE AND

CLEANING

CD/DVD

.Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never touch

the surface of the disc. Do not bend the

disc.

.Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

.To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

4-76 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (227,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

alcohol intended for industrial use.

.A new disc may be rough on the inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges by

rubbing the inner and outer edges with the

side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

USB memory

.Never touch the terminal portion of the USB

memory.

.Do not place heavy objects on the USB

memory.

.Do not store the USB memory in highly

humid locations.

.Do not expose the USB memory to direct

sunlight.

.Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory.

Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual for

the details.

SAA2555

With navigation system

SAA2556

Without navigation system

1. Audio source switch

2. Menu control switch (models with navigation

system) or audio tuning switch (models without

navigation system)

3. Back switch

4. Volume control switch

STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CON-

TROLS FOR AUDIO

Menu control switch (models with navi-

gation system) or audio tuning switch

(models without navigation system)

While the display is showing a MAP (navigation

systems only), STATUS or Audio screen, tilt the

switch upward or downward to select a station,

track, CD or folder. For most audio sources,

tilting the switch up/down for more than 1.5

seconds provides a different function than tilting

up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM radio:

.Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the preset

station.

.Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

will seek up or down to the next station.

.Pushing the menu control switch will show

the list of preset stations.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

Information Provided by:

Black plate (228,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

XM Satellite Radio (if so equipped):

.Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the preset

channel.

.Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

will go to the next or previous category.

.Pushing the menu control switch will show

the XM Menu.

iPod®(models with navigation system):

.Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the track

number.

.Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

will skip to the next or previous index.

.Pushing the menu control switch will show

the iPod Menu.

CD:

.Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the track

number.

.Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the folder

number (if playing compressed audio files).

.Pushing the menu control switch will show

the CD Menu.

DVD (models with navigation system):

.Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the track

number.

.Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the title

number.

.Pushing the menu control switch will select

an item from the DVD display.

.When the transparent operation menu ap-

pears, the switch will control the menu.

USB (models with navigation system):

.Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the track

number.

.Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the folder

number

.Pushing the menu control switch will show

the USB Menu.

Music Box®(models with navigation sys-

tem):

.Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the track

number.

.Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the album

(folder) number (if playing compressed

audio files).

.Pushing the menu control switch will show

the Music Box®Menu.

Bluetooth®Audio (models with navigation

system):

.Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds

will scroll up or down through the track

number.

AUX:

.Pushing the menu control switch will show

the AUX Menu.

BACK switch (models with navi-

gation system)

Push this switch to go back to the previous

screen or cancel the selection if it is not

completed.

Volume control switches

Push the upper (+) or lower (−) side switch to

increase or decrease the volume.

Audio source switch

Push the audio source switch to change the

mode as follows.

4-78 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (229,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Models with navigation system

AM ?FM ?SAT ?CD/DVD ?Music

Box®?USB/iPod®?Bluetooth®Audio ?

AUX

.Models without navigation system

AM ?FM ?CD ?AUX ?SAT*

*: if so equipped

ANTENNA

Window antenna (for Coupe models)

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear

window.

CAUTION

.Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any

metal parts to it. This may cause

poor reception or noise.

.When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with

a dampened soft cloth.

SAA2374

Trunk mounted antenna (for Roadster

models)

Removing the antenna:

You can remove the antenna if necessary.

Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by

turning counterclockwise.

CAUTION

.To avoid damaging or deforming the

antenna,besuretoremovethe

antenna under the following condi-

tions.

— The vehicle enters an automatic

car wash.

— The vehicle enters a garage with

a low ceiling.

— The vehicle is covered with a car

cover.

.Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation. Otherwise,

the antenna rod may break during

vehicle operation.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

Information Provided by:

Black plate (230,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in

your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following

cautions, otherwise the new equipment may

adversely affect the electronic control modules

and electronic control system harness.

WARNING

.A cellular telephone should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use

of cellular telephones while driving.

.If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands-free

cellular phone operational mode (if

so equipped) is highly recom-

mended. Exercise extreme caution

at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

.If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

.Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic control

modules.

.Keep the antenna wire more than 8

in (20 cm) away from the electronic

control system harness. Do not

route the antenna wire next to any

harness.

.Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the man-

ufacturer.

.Connect the ground wire from the

CB radio chassis to the body.

.For details, consult a NISSAN deal-

er.

WARNING

.Use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you

have to use a phone while driving,

exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

.If you find yourself unable to devote

full attention to vehicle operation

while talking on the phone, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner

of a compatible Bluetooth®enabled cellular

phone, you can set up the wireless connection

between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module. With Bluetooth®wireless tech-

nology, you can make or receive a telephone call

with your cellular phone in your pocket.

Once a cellular phone is connected to the in-

vehicle phone module, no phone connecting

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

BLUETOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM (models with navigation

system)

4-80 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (231,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

procedure is required anymore. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phonemodulewhentheignitionswitchis

pushed to the ON position with the registered

cellular phone turned on and carried in the

vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-

ports the phone commands, so dialing a phone

number using your voice is possible. For more

details, see “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later

in this section; page 4-104.

Before using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

.Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

.Some Bluetooth®enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list.

.You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone

service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such as in

a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, behind a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked in order not

to be dialed.

.When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice

during a call.

.Immediatelyaftertheignitionswitchis

pushed to the ON position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short

period of time.

.Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection dis-

ruption.

.While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth®wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may

discharge quicker than usual.

.If the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System

seems to be malfunctioning, please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

.Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

.Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding the telephone pairing procedure

specific to your phone, battery charging,

cellular phone antenna, etc.

.The antenna display on the monitor will not

coincide with the antenna display of some

cellular phones.

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible to hear the caller’s voice clearly as

well as to minimize its echoes.

.If reception between callers is unclear,

adjusting the incoming or outgoing call

volume may improve the clarity.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

— CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

Information Provided by:

Black plate (232,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference and

2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

— This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark:

Bluetooth®is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.

and licensed to Clarion Co., Ltd.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate various

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System features

using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

For more details, see “NISSAN VOICE RE-

COGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation

system)” later in this section; page 4-104.

SAA2518

CONTROL BUTTONS

1) PHONE button

2) TALK /PHONE SEND button

4-82 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (233,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2519

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

1. Push the PHONE button or the button,

and select the “Connect Phone” key.

SAA2520

2. When a PIN code appears on the screen,

operate the compatible Bluetooth®cellular

phone to enter the PIN code.

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for the details. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call

NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for

instructions on pairing NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

When the connection process is completed,

the screen will return to the Phone menu

display.

PHONE SELECTION

Up to 5 cellular phones can be registered to the

system. To switch to connect another cellular

phone, push PHONE button and select the

“Connected Phones” key. The registered cellular

phones are shown on the list. If you select a

cellular phone that is different from the one

currently connected, the newly selected phone

will be connected to the system.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

This vehicle has two phonebooks available for

hands-free use. Depending on the phone, the

system may automatically download the entire

cell phone’s phonebook into the “Handset

Phonebook”. For the details about downloading

a phonebook, see “PHONE SETTING” later in

this section. If a phonebook does not auto-

matically download, the vehicle phonebook may

be set for up to 1.000 entries. This phonebook

allows the recording of a name to speak while

using voice recognition.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

Information Provided by:

Black plate (234,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2521

1. Push the PHONE button and select the

“Vehicle Phonebook” key.

2. Select the “Add New” key at the top of the

screen.

SAA2522

3. Choose the method for entering the phone-

book entry. For this example, select “Enter

Number by Keypad”.

4. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key.

(See “HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN”

earlier in this section.)

SAA2523

5. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a name

to speak when using the NISSAN Voice

Recognition system.

6. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speak

the name after the tone.

7. When the voicetag is successfully saved,

select the “OK” key to save the phonebook

entry.

8. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will

show a screen that is ready to call the

number. Press the BACK button to return to

the Vehicle Phonebook.

There are different methods to input a phone

number. Select one of the following options

4-84 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (235,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

instead of “Enter Number by Keypad” in step 3.

—Copy from Call History

The system will show a list of incoming,

outgoing or missed calls that were down-

loaded from the connected cellular phone

(depending on the phone’s compatibility).

Select one of these entries to save in the

vehicle phonebook.

—Copy from the Handset

The system will show the connected cellular

phone’s phonebook that was downloaded

(depending on the phone’s compatibility).

Select one of these entries to save in the

vehicle phonebook.

SAA2620

Editing the Vehicle Phonebook

1. Push the PHONE button and select the

“Vehicle Phonebook” key.

2. Select the desired entry from the displayed

list.

3. Select the “Edit” key.

4. Select the desired item to change.

SAA2523

The following editing items are available:

.Entry #

Changes the displayed number of the

selected entry.

.Name

Edit the name of the entry using the keypad

displayed on the screen.

.Number

Edit the phone number using the keypad

displayed on the screen.

.Type

Select an icon from the icon list.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

Information Provided by:

Black plate (236,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Voicetag

Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags

allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice

Recognition system. (See “NISSAN VOICE

RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with na-

vigation system)” later in this section.)

To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at

step 3.

SAA2524

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow this procedure.

1. Push the PHONE button on the instrument

panel or the button on the steering

wheel. The “PHONE” screen will appear on

the display.

2. Select the “Handset Phonebook” key on the

“PHONE” menu.

3. Select the desired entry from the list.

4. Confirm the correct entry by selecting for the

correct number from the list.

SAA2621

5. Select the “Call” key to start dialing the

number.

There are different methods to make a call.

Select one of the following options instead of

“Handset Phonebook” in step 2 above.

.Vehicle Phonebook

Select an entry stored in the Vehicle’s

Phonebook.

.Call History

Select an outgoing, incoming or missed call

downloaded from your cell phone (depend-

ing on your phone’s compatibility).

4-86 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (237,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Dial Number

Input the phone number manually using the

keypad displayed on the screen. (See

“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier

in this section.)

SAA2525

RECEIVING A CALL

When you hear a phone ring, the display will

change to the incoming call mode. To receive a

call, perform one of the following procedures

listed below.

a) Select the “Answer” key.

b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

c) Push the button on the steering wheel.

There are some options available when receiving

a call. Select one of the following displayed on

the screen.

.Answer

Accept an incoming call to talk.

.Hold Call

Put an incoming call on hold.

.Reject Call

Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, perform one of the

following procedures listed below.

a) Select the “Hang up” key.

b) Push the PHONE button on the instrument

panel.

c) Push the button on the steering wheel.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

Information Provided by:

Black plate (238,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2526

DURING A CALL

There are some options available during a call.

Select one of the following displayed on the

screen if necessary.

.Hang up

Finish the call.

.Use Handset

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

.Mute

Mute your voice to the person.

.Keypad

Using the touch tone, send digits to the

connected party for using services such as

voicemail.

.Cancel Mute

This will appear after “Mute” is selected.

Mute will be canceled.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or

quieter, push the volume control switch (+ or −)

on the steering wheel or turn the volume control

knob on the instrument panel while talking on

the phone. This adjustment is also available in

the SETTING mode. SAA2527

PHONE SETTING

To set up the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone

System to your preferred settings, push the

SETTING button on the instrument panel and

select the “PHONE” key.

Edit Vehicle Phonebook

To edit the vehicle phonebook, use the same

procedure as described in “VEHICLE PHONE-

BOOK” earlier in this section.

Delete Phonebook

The vehicle phonebook entries can be deleted

all at the same time or one by one.

4-88 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (239,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Download Handset Phonebook

Download the contacts registered in a Blue-

tooth®cellular phone. Availability of this function

depends on each cellular phone. The memory

downloading procedure from the cellular phone

also varies according to each cellular phone.

See cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details.

Volume

The following kinds of phone volume can be set.

Pushing the PHONE button and selecting the

“Volume” key can also operate the same

settings.

.Ringtone/Incoming Call/Outgoing Call

To increase or decrease the volume, select

the “Ringtone”, “Incoming Call” or “Out-

going Call” key and adjust it with the multi-

function controller.

.Automatic Hold

When this function is activated, an incoming

phone call is automatically held.

.Vehicle Ringtone

When this function is activated, a specific

ringtone that is different from the cellular

phone will sound when receiving a call.

Auto Download

When this item is activated, the phonebook of a

hands-free phone is automatically downloaded

at the same time that the hands-free phone is

connected.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

Information Provided by:

Black plate (240,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command

correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” later in

this section; page 4-104.)

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too noisy to

use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the

wrong voicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “VEHICLE PHONEBOOK” earlier in this

section.)

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

The system cannot be operated. Close the soft top (for Roadster models).

4-90 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (241,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.Use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you

have to use a phone while driving,

exercise extreme caution at all

times so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

.If you find yourself unable to devote

full attention to vehicle operation

while talking on the phone, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery,

use a phone after starting the engine.

SAA2528

1. Volume control switch −/+

2. PHONE SEND button

3. PHONE END button

4. Microphone

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a

compatible Bluetooth®enabled cellular phone,

you can set up the wireless connection between

your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone

module. With Bluetooth®wireless technology,

you can make or receive a hands-free telephone

call in your vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-

vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-

ing procedure is required. Your phone is

automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phonemodulewhentheignitionswitchis

pushed to the ON position with the connected

cellular phone turned on and carried in the

vehicle.

You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®

cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

.Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the Bluetooth®

BLUETOOTH®HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM (models without

navigation system) (if so equipped)

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

Information Provided by:

Black plate (242,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Hands-Free Phone System.

.Some Bluetooth®enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.

com/bluetooth for a recommended phone

list and connecting.

.You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

— Your vehicle is outside of the telephone

service area.

— Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves; such as in

a tunnel, in an underground parking

garage, near a tall building or in a

mountainous area.

— Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it

from being dialed.

.When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice

during a call.

.Immediatelyaftertheignitionswitchis

pushed to the ON position, it may be

impossible to receive a call for a short

period of time.

.Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the in-

vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality

degradation and wireless connection dis-

ruption.

.While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth®wireless connection, the

battery power of the cellular phone may

discharge quicker than usual. The Blue-

tooth®Hands-Free Phone System cannot

charge cellular phones.

.If the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System

seems to be malfunctioning, see “Trouble-

shooting guide” later in this section. You can

also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for

troubleshooting help.

.Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

.Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual

regarding battery charging, cellular phone

antenna, etc.

.This wireless hands free car kit is based on

Bluetooth®technology,

— Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz

— Output Power: 4.14 dBm E.I.R.P

— Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, p/

4DQPSK

— Number of Channel: 79

— This wireless equipment can’t be used for

any services related to safety because

there is the possibility of radio interfer-

ence.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

— CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,

modification, or attachments could damage

the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-

tions.

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) this device may not cause interference and

2) this device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device

IC Regulatory information

— Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the

device.

4-92 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (243,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

— This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian Interference-

Causing Equipment Regulations.

Bluetooth trademark:

Bluetooth®is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.

and licensed to Visteon Corpora-

tion.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows

hands-free operation of the Bluetooth®Hands-

Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may

not be available so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-

lized, which may take up to one minute. If the

button is pushed before the initialization

completes, the system will accept any com-

mand.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-

ing:

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing voice commands correctly.

.Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command. Otherwise, the command will not

be received properly.

.Start speaking a command within 5 seconds

after the tone sounds.

.Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

Giving voice command

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push

and release the button located on the

steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a

command.

Thecommandgivenispickedupbythe

microphone, and voice feedback is given when

the command is accepted.

.If you need to hear the available commands

for the current menu again, say “Help” and

the system will repeat them.

.If a command is not recognized, the system

announces, “Command not recognized.

Please say again.” Repeat the command in

a clear voice.

.If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or

“Correction” anytime the system is waiting

for a response.

.You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by saying,

“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces

“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can

also push and hold the button for 5

seconds on the steering wheel at any time to

cancel the VR session. Whenever the VR

session is cancelled, a double beep is

played to indicate you have exited the

system.

.If you want to adjust the volume of the voice

feedback, push the volume control switch (+

or −) on the steering wheel while being

provided with feedback. You can also use

the radio volume control knob.

.In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel.

.To use the system faster, you may speak the

second level commands with the main menu

command on the main menu. For example,

press the button and after the tone say,

“Call Redial.” Note: The combined com-

mand of Call and (a Name) cannot be used.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

Information Provided by:

Black plate (244,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers in voice commands.

Refer to the rules and examples below.

.Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”, or

— “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh

oh”

.Words can be used for the first 4 digits

places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”,

— NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty

two hundred, and

— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two

hundred.

.Numbers can be spoken in small groups.

The system will prompt you to continuing

entering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

— “One eight zero zero”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

— “six six two”

The system repeats the numbers and

prompts you to enter more.

— “six two zero zero”

.You can say “Star” for “*” and “Pound” for

“#” at any time in any position of the phone

number. (Available only when using the

“Special Dialing” command.)

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

— “One five five five one two one two star

one two three”

.Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*”

(available when using the “Special Dialing”

command and the “Send” command during

a call).

.Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using

the “Special Dialing” command).

.Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available

only when storing a phone book number).

See “Making a call by entering a phone

number” later in this section and “LIST OF

VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section

for more information.

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers as

single digits.

The voice command “Help” is available at any

time. Please say the “Help” command to get

information about how to use the system.

INFO

.If you are controlling the telephone system

by voice command for the first time or do not

know the appropriate voice command,

speak “Help”. The system announces the

available commands.

.When you speak numbers, you can speak

both “zero” or “oh” for “0”.

Manual command selection

Commands can be selected manually. While the

commands are displayed on the audio screen,

select a command by operating the audio tuning

switch, and then push the switch. Once a

command is manually selected, the voice

command function is cancelled. To return to

voice command mode, push the switch to

cancel the current operation, and then perform

the first procedure of voice command.

4-94 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (245,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2557

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®Hands-

Free Phone System are located on the steering

wheel.

PHONE SEND

Push the button to initiate a VR session or

answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button to interrupt

system feedback and give a command at once.

PHONE END

While the voice recognition system is active,

press the button to go back one step.

Press and hold the button for 5 seconds to

quit the voice recognition system at any time.

GETTING STARTED

The following procedures will help you get

started using the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone

System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For

additional command options, refer to “LIST OF

VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the Bluetooth®Hands-Free

Phone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for more

than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press the PHONE

SEND ( ) button for the hands-free

phone system to enter the speaker adapta-

tion mode or press the PHONE END ( )

button to select a different language.”

3. Push the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see

“SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE”

later in this section.

4. The system announces the current language

and gives you the option to change the

language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French

(in French). Use the following chart to select

the language.

NOTE:

You must push the button or the

button within 5 seconds to change

the language.

Current lan-

guage

Push

(TALK/PHONE

SEND) to select

Push

(MODE/

PHONE END)

to select

English Spanish French

Spanish English French

French English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, do

not press either button. After 5 seconds, the

VR session will end, and the language will

not be changed.

Connecting procedure

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be cancelled.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

Information Provided by:

Black plate (246,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

1. Push the button on the steering wheel.

The system announces the available com-

mands.

2. Say: “Connect Phone” *

A. The system

acknowledges the command and an-

nounces the next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Add phone” *

B. The system acknowl-

edges the command and asks you to initiate

pairing from the phone handset *

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit www.

nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on

connecting NISSAN recommended cellular

phones.

When prompted for a Passkey code, enter

“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code

“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and

cannot be changed.

4. The system asks you to say a name for the

phone *

If the name is too long or too short, the

system tells you, then prompts you for a

name again.

Also, if more than one phone is connected

and the name sounds too much like a name

already used, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

Making a call by entering a phone

number

1. Push the button on steering wheel. A

tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” *

A. The system acknowledges

the command and announces the next set of

available commands.

3. Say: “Phone Number” *

B. The system

acknowledges the command and an-

nounces the next set of available commands.

Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10

digits or any special characters.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting with

the area code in single digit format. If the

system has trouble recognizing the correct

phone number, try entering the number in

the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-

digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example,

555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five”

as the 1st group, then “one two one” as the

2nd group, and “three three five four” as the

3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or

any special characters, say “Special Dial-

ing”. See “How to say numbers” earlier in

this section, for more information.

5. When you have finished speaking the phone

number, the system repeats it back and

announces the available commands.

6. Say: “Dial” *

C. The system acknowledges

the command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “LIST OF

VOICE COMMANDS” later in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ring tone, press the

button on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the button

on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when you

hear the ring tone, press the button on

the steering wheel to reject the call.

4-96 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (247,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

When you push and release the button on

the steering wheel, you can choose from the

commands on the Main Menu. The following

pages describe these commands and the

commands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands

currently available anytime the system is waiting

for a response.

A menu item can also be selected by scrolling

the display with the SEEK switch and entering

by pushing the button.

If you want to end an action without completing

it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at anytime the

system is waiting for a response. The system will

end the VR session. Whenever the VR session

is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate

you have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,

you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime

the system is waiting for a response.

Call

Name (a name) *

If there are entries stored in the phonebook, a

number associated with a name and location

can be dialed.

See “Phonebook (phones without automatic

phonebook download function)” later in this

section to learn how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name of

the phonebook entry to call. The system

acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with

the name, the system asks the user to choose

the location.

Once the name and location are confirmed, the

system begins the call.

Phone Number (speak digits) *

When prompted by the system, say the number

to call. Refer to “Making a call by entering a

phone number” earlier in this section for more

details.

“Redial” *

Use the Redial command to call the last number

that was dialed.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to redial” and

ends the VR session.

“Call back” *

Use the Call Back command to dial the number

of the last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-

peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the system

announces, “There is no number to call back”

and ends the VR session.

Special Dialing

To dial more than 10 digits or any special

characters, please say “Special Dialing”. When

the system acknowledges the command, the

system will prompt you to speak the number.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

Information Provided by:

Black plate (248,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

During a call

During a call there are several command options

available. Push the button on the steering

wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter

commands.

.“Help” — The system announces the avail-

able commands.

.“Go back/Correction” — The system an-

nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session

and returns to the call.

.“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces

“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns

to the call.

.“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send

command to enter numbers, “*” or “#”

during a call. For example, if you were

directed to dial an extension by an auto-

mated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the command

and sends the tones associated with the

numbers. The system then ends the VR

session and returns to the call. Say “star” for

“*”, say “pound” for “#”.

.“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call

command to transfer the call from the

Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System to

the cellular phone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Call

transferred to privacy mode.” The system

then ends the VR session.

To reconnect a call from the cellular phone

to the Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone sys-

tem, push the button.

.“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute

your voice so the other party cannot hear it.

Use the mute command again to unmute

your voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phone

network connection is lost while the Mute

feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset

to “off” for the next call so the other party

can hear your voice.

Phonebook (phones without automatic

phonebook download function)

“Transfer Entry” *

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new

name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name

you would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system

tells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a name

already stored, the system tells you, then

prompts you for a name again.

The system will ask you to transfer a phone

number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice command:

For example, say: “five five five one two one

two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this

section for more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular

phone’s memory:

Say: “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges

the command and asks you to initiate the

transfer from the phone handset. The new

contact phone number will be transferred from

the cellular phone via the Bluetooth®commu-

4-98 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (249,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

nication link.

The transfer procedure varies according to each

cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit www.

nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on

transferring phone numbers from NISSAN re-

commended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts

you for the next command. When you have

finished entering numbers or transferring an

entry, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and

number.

“Delete Entry” *

Use the Delete Entry command to delete one

entry from the phonebook. After the system

acknowledges a command, say the name to

delete or say “List Names” to choose an entry.

“List Names” *

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names in the phonebook. The system recites the

phonebook entries but does not include the

actual phone numbers. When playback of the

list is complete, the system returns to the main

menu.

Playback of the list can be stopped at any time

by pushing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session.

Phonebook (phones with automatic

phonebook download function)

NOTE:

Phonebook commands are not available

when the vehicle is moving.

For phones that support automatic download of

the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth profile), the

“Phonebook” command is used to manage

entries to the vehicle phonebook. You can say

the name of an entry at this menu to initiate

dialing of that entry.

The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for

each phone paired with the system. Each name

can have up to 4 locations/phone numbers

associated with it.

When a phone is connected to the system, the

phonebook is automatically downloaded to the

vehicle. This feature allows you to access your

phonebook from the Bluetooth®system and call

contacts by name. You can record a custom

voice tag for contact names that the system has

difficulty recognizing. For more information see

“Record Name” in this section.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phone-

book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-

book if you are currently connected with

Phone B.

“List names” *

Use the List Names command to hear all the

names and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries but

does not include the actual phone numbers.

When the playback of the list is complete, the

system goes back to the main menu.

You can stop the playback of the list at any time

by pressing the button on the steering

wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the

“Record Name” command in this section for

information about recording custom voice tags

for list entries that the system has difficulty

pronouncing.

“Record name” *

The system allows you to record custom voice

tags for contact names in the phonebook that

the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This

feature can also be used to record voice tags

to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers.

Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the

system.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

Information Provided by:

Black plate (250,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Recent Calls

Use the Recent Calls command to access

outgoing, incoming or missed calls.

“Outgoing” *

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing

calls made from the vehicle.

“Incoming” *

Use the Incoming command to list the incoming

calls made from the vehicle.

“Missed” *

Use the Missed command to list the missed

calls made to the vehicle that were not

answered.

Connect Phone

NOTE:

Add Phone command is not available

when the vehicle is moving.

Use the Connect Phone commands to manage

the phones connecting to the vehicle or to

enable the Bluetooth®function on the vehicle.

“Add Phone” *

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to

the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” earlier

in this section for more information.

“Select Phone” *

Use the Select Phone command to select from a

list of phones connected to the vehicle. The

system will list the names assigned to each

phone and then prompt you for the phone you

wish to select. Only one phone can be active at

a time.

“Delete Phone” *

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a

phone that is connected to the vehicle. The

system will list the names assigned to each

phone and then prompt you for the phone you

wish to delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle

will also delete that phonebook for that phone.

Bluetooth Off *

Use the Bluetooth Off command to prevent a

wireless connection to your phone.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of

dialect users to train the system to improve

recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of

commands, the users can create a voice model

of their own voice that is stored in the system.

The system is capable of storing a different

speaker adaptation model for each connected

phone.

Training procedure

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet

outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine

running, the parking brake on, and the

transmission in Park.

3. Press and hold the button for more

than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press the PHONE

SEND ( ) button for the hands-free

phone system to enter the speaker adapta-

tion mode or press the PHONE END ( )

button to select a different language.”

4-100 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (251,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different

language, see “Choosing a language” earlier

in this section.

6. If the connected phone is already in use, the

system will prompt you to overwrite. Follow

the instructions provided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you are

ready to begin, press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the

instructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell

you an adequate number of phrases have

been recorded.

10. The system will announce that speaker

adaptation has been completed and the

system is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

.The button is pressed for more than 5

seconds in SA mode.

.The vehicle is driven during SA mode.

.The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or

LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructs you to

say the following phrases.

(The system will prompt you for each phrase.)

.phonebook transfer entry

.dial 30429

.delete call back number

.Incoming

.Transfer entry

.8 pause 9 3 2 pause 7

.delete all entries

.call 7 2409

.phonebook delete entry

.next entry

.dial star 2170

.yes

.no

.select

.Missed

.dial 85692

.Bluetooth on

.Outgoing

.call 3 1902

.9 7 pause pause 3 0 8

.cancel

.call back number

.call star 2095

.delete phone

.dial 83051

.Record Name

.4 3 pause 2 9 pause 0

.delete redial number

.phonebook list names

.call 8 0541

.correction

.connect phone

.dial 74018

.previous entry

.delete

.dial 97266

.call 7 6301

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

Information Provided by:

Black plate (252,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.go back

.call 5 6280

.dial 66437

4-102 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (253,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too

noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to

improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE” earlier in this

section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from

the phonebook.

1. Ensure that the phonebook entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by

using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook (phones without automatic phonebook download function)”

earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

Information Provided by:

Black plate (254,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free

operation of the Phone, Navigation, Information

and Audio systems in one of two modes,

Standard Mode or Alternate Command Mode.

In Standard Mode, commands that are available

are always shown on the display and announced

by the system. You can complete your desired

operation by simply following the prompts given

by the system. (See “NISSAN VOICE RECOG-

NITION STANDARD MODE” later in this section

for details.)

For advanced operation, you can use the

Alternate Command Mode. (See “NISSAN

VOICE RECOGNITION ALTERNATE COM-

MAND MODE” later in this section for details.)

When this mode is active, an expanded list of

commands can be spoken after pushing the

TALK switch, and the voice command

menu prompts are turned off. Review the

expanded command list, which is available when

this mode is active. Note that in this mode the

recognition success rate may be affected as the

number of available commands and the ways of

speaking each command are increased.

To switch one mode to another, see each mode

description later in this section.

To improve the recognition success rate when

Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the

Speaker Adaptation Function available in that

mode. Otherwise, it is recommended that

Alternate Command Mode be turned off and

Standard Mode be used for the best recognition

performance.

For the voice commands for the navigation

system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s

Manual of your vehicle.

For Roadster models:

The voice recognition system cannot be oper-

ated when the soft top is not closed.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

STANDARD MODE

The following section is applicable when the

Standard Mode is activated.

The Standard Mode enables you to complete

the desired operation by simply following the

prompts that appear on the display and also are

announced by the system.

SAA2529

Activating Standard Mode

When the Alternate Command Mode is active,

perform the following steps to switch to the

Standard Mode.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (models with navigation

system)

4-104 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (255,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2530

4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key.

5. The indicator turns off and the Standard

Mode activates.

Displaying user guide

IfyouusetheNISSANVoiceRecognition

system for the first time or you do not know

how to operate it, you can display the User

Guide for confirmation.

You can confirm how to use voice commands by

accessing a simplified User Guide, which

contains basic instructions and tutorials for

several voice commands.

SAA2531

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “User Guide” key.

5. Select a preferred item.

You can skip steps 1 and 3 above if you say

“Help”.

Available items:

.Getting Started

Describes the basics of how to operate the

NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

.Let’s Practice

Mode that allows practicing by following the

instructions of the system voice.

.Using the Address Book

Tutorial for entering a destination by using

the Address Book.

.Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)

Tutorial for entering a destination by street

address.

.Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voice

command operation.

.Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips of speaking for correct

command recognition by the system.

Note that the Command List feature is only

available when Alternate Command Mode is

active.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

Information Provided by:

Black plate (256,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2532

Getting Started

Before using the NISSAN Voice Recognition

system for the first time, you can confirm how to

use commands by viewing the Getting Started

section of the User Guide.

1. Select the “Getting Started” key.

2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the

screen using the multi-function controller.

Tutorials on the operation of the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system

If you choose “Using the Address Book”,

“Finding a Street Address” or “Placing Calls”,

you can view tutorials on how to perform these

operations using NISSAN Voice Recognition.

SAA2534

Let’s Practice

This mode helps learn how to use the NISSAN

Voice Recognition system.

1. Select the “Let’s Practice” key.

2. After the message screen appears, push the

TALK switch on the steering wheel.

3. Speak the displayed number after the tone.

The evaluation screen will be displayed and

the result can be confirmed.

SAA2533

Useful tips for correct operation

You can display useful speaking tips to help the

system recognize your voice commands cor-

rectly.

Select “Help on Speaking” to start display.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-

lized, which may take up to one minute. When

completed, the system is ready to accept voice

commands. If the TALK switch is pushed

before the initialization completes, the display

will show the message: “System not ready.” or a

4-106 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (257,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

beep sounds.

Before starting

To get the best recognition performance from

NISSAN Voice Recognition, observe the follow-

ing:

.The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to eliminate

the surrounding noises (traffic noise and

vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent

the system from correctly recognizing the

voice commands.

.Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command.

.Speak in a natural conversational voice

without pausing between words.

.If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan

speed is automatically lowered so that your

commands can be recognized more easily.

SAA2167

Giving voice commands

1. Push the TALK switch located on the

steering wheel.

SAA2535

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,

and the system announces, “Would you like

to access Phone, Navigation, Information,

Audio or Help?”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak a

command.

Selecting the “Practice” key will start the

practice mode. See “Let’s Practice” earlier

in this section.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts

and speak after the tone sounds until your

desired operation is completed.

Selecting the “Help” key can display the

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

Information Provided by:

Black plate (258,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

detailed information of the each command.

Operating tips:

.Say a command after the tone.

.Commands that are available are always

shown on the display and spoken through

voice menu prompts. Commands other than

those that are displayed are not accepted.

Please follow the prompts given by the

system.

.If the command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Please say again”.

Repeat the command in a clear voice.

.Push the BACK button once to return to the

previous screen.

.To exit the voice recognition system, push

and hold the TALK switch. The

message, “Voice canceled” will be an-

nounced.

.To skip the voice guidance function and give

the command immediately, press the TALK

switch to interrupt the system. Re-

member to speak after the tone.

.If you want to adjust the volume of the

system feedback, push the volume control

buttons [+] or [−] on the steering switch or

use the audio system volume knob while the

system is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers:

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers when giving voice

commands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For

example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero

zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.)

Examples

.1-800-662-6200

— “One eight zero zero six six two six two

zero zero”

Improving Recognition of Phone numbers

You can improve the recognition of phone

numbers by saying the phone number in three

groups of numbers. For example, when you try to

call 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first,

and the system will then ask you for the next

three digits. Then, say “six six two”. After

recognition, the system will then ask for the last

four digits. Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this

method of phone digit entry can improve

recognition performance.

When speaking a house number, speak the

number “0” as “zero”. If the letter “o (Oh)” is

included in the house number, it will not be

recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you

speak “oh” instead of “zero”. Please speak

“zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for

the letter “o (oh)”

4-108 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (259,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Command List

Category Command:

Command Action

Phone Operates the Phone function

Navigation Operates the Navigation function

Information Displays the vehicle Information function

Audio Operates the Audio function.

Help Displays User Guide

.Phone Command:

Command Action

Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.

Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook.

Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.

Call history Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.

Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.

Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.

International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.

Change Number Corrects the recognized phone number (available during phone number entry).

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

Information Provided by:

Black plate (260,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Navigation Command:

Command Action

Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.

Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.

Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.

Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.

Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

.Information Command:

Command Action

Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.

Maintenance Displays maintenance information.

Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.

Where am I? Displays your current location.

.Audio Command:

Command Action

AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

XM Turns to the XM Satellite band, selecting the channel last played.

Music Box®Turns on the “Music Box®” hard drive audio system.

CD Starts to play a CD.

4-110 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (261,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.General Commands

Command Action

Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen

Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

Information Provided by:

Black plate (262,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Voice command examples

To use the NISSAN Voice Recognition function,

speaking one command is sometimes sufficient,

but at other times it is necessary to speak two or

more commands. As examples, some additional

basic operations by voice commands are

described here.

For navigation system commands, see the

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

SAA2167

Example 1 - Placing a call to the phone

number 800-662-6200:

1. Push the TALK switch located on the

steering wheel.

SAA2535

2. The system announces, “Would you like to

access Phone, Navigation, Information,

Audio or Help?”

3. Speak “Phone”.

4-112 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (263,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2536

4. Speak “Dial Number”.

SAA2537

5. Speak “8 0 0”.

Selecting the “Manual Controls” key

switches the screen to the keypad to input

the phone number manually.

SAA2538

6. The system announces, “Please say the next

three digits or dial, or say change number.”

7. Speak “6 6 2”.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

Information Provided by:

Black plate (264,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2539

8. The system announces, “Please say the last

four digits” or say change number.

9. Speak “6 2 0 0”.

SAA2540

10. The system announces, “Dial or Change

Number?”

11. Speak “Dial”.

12. The system makes a call to 800-662-6200.

Note:

.You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10

continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-

tinuous digits), if the area code is not

necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit group-

ing is recommended for improved recogni-

tion. (See “How to speak numbers” earlier in

this section.)

.You can only say a phone number using the

3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using

this command. Please use the “International

Call” command for all other formats.

.If you say “Change Number” during phone

number entry, the system will automatically

request that you repeat the number using

the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the

area code first and then follow the prompts.

.Do not add a “1” in front of the area code

when speaking phone numbers.

.If the system does not recognize your

command, please try repeating the com-

mand using a natural voice. Speaking too

slow or too loudly may further decrease

recognition performance.

4-114 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (265,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2167

Example 2 - Placing an international call to

the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:

1. Push the TALK switch located on the

steering wheel.

SAA2535

2. The system announces, “Would you like to

access Phone, Navigation, Information or

Help?”

3. Speak “Phone”.

SAA2536

4. Speak “International Call”.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

Information Provided by:

Black plate (266,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2541

5. Speak “011811112223333”.

SAA2542

6. Speak “Dial”.

7. System makes a call to 011-81-111-222-

3333.

Note:

Any digit input format is available in the

International Number input process.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION AL-

TERNATE COMMAND MODE

The following section is applicable when Alter-

nate Command Mode is activated.

When Alternate Command Mode is activated,

an expanded list of commands can be used after

pressing the TALK switch. In this mode,

available commands are not fully shown on the

display or prompted. Review the expanded

command list when this mode is active. See

examples of Alternate Command Mode screens.

Please note that in this mode the recognition

success rate may be affected as the number of

available commands and ways of speaking each

command are increased. To improve the recog-

nition success rate, try using the Speaker

Adaptation Function available in that mode.

(See “Speaker adaptation function (for Alternate

Command Mode)” later in this section.) Other-

wise it is recommended that Alternate Com-

mand Mode be turned OFF and Standard Mode

be used for the best recognition performance.

4-116 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (267,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2529

Activating Alternate Command Mode

When the Standard Mode is active, perform the

following steps to switch to the Alternate

Command Mode.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument

panel.

2. Highlight the “Others” key.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key.

SAA2543

4. Highlight the “Alternate Command Mode”

key.

5. The confirmation message is displayed on

the screen. Push the “OK” key to activate

the Alternate Command Mode.

Displaying command list

If you are controlling the system by voice

commands for the first time or do not know the

appropriate voice command, perform the follow-

ing procedure for displaying the voice command

list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).

SAA2544

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “Command List” key.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

Information Provided by:

Black plate (268,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2545

5. Select a category from the list.

SAA2546

6. Select an item.

7. If necessary, scroll the screen using the

multi-function controller to view the entire

list.

8. Press the BACK button to return to the

previous screen.

4-118 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (269,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Commands List

Phone Commands:

Command Action

Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number.

Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Vehicle Phonebook.

Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the mobile phone.

Call History Incoming Calls Makes a call to the incoming call number.

Outgoing Calls Makes a call to the dialed number.

Missed Calls Makes a call to the Missed calls number.

International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken.

Navigation Commands:

Command Action

Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.

Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route to the location.

Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.

Address Book Searches for stored information in the Address Book.

Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

Previous Start Point Sets a route to a previous starting point.

Delete Destination Deletes a destination.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

Information Provided by:

Black plate (270,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Information Commands:

Command Action

Fuel Economy Displays fuel economy information.

Maintenance Displays maintenance information.

Where am I? Displays your current location.

Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system ON and OFF.

Weather Information Displays weather information.

Weather Map Displays a weather map.

Audio Commands:

Command Action

Music Box®Turns on the “Music Box®” hard drive audio system.

CD Starts to play a CD.

FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

XM Turns to the XM Satellite Radio band, selecting the channel last played.

USB Turns on the USB memory.

Bluetooth Audio Turns on the Bluetooth®audio player.

AUX Turns on the AUX.

4-120 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (271,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Help Commands:

Command Action

Command List Navigation Commands Displays the navigation command list.

Phone Commands Displays the phone command list.

Audio Commands Displays the audio command list.

Information Commands Displays the information command list.

Help Commands Displays the help command list.

User Guide Displays the User Guide.

Speaker Adaptation The system can memorize the voices of up to three persons.

General Commands:

Command Action

Go back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen

Exit Cancels Voice Recognition

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

Information Provided by:

Black plate (272,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2547

Displaying user guide

You can confirm how to use voice commands by

accessing a simplified User Guide, which

contains basic instructions and tutorials for

several voice commands.

1. Push the INFO button on the instrument

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key using the multi-

function controller and push the ENTER

button.

3. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” key using

the multi-function controller and push the

ENTER button.

4. Highlight the “User Guide” key using the

multi-function controller and push the EN-

TER button.

5. Highlight an item using the multi-function

controller and push the ENTER button.

Available items:

.Getting Started

Describe the basics of how to operate the

NISSAN Voice Recognition system.

.Let’s Practice

Mode that allows practicing by following the

instructions of the system voice.

.Using the Address Book

Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual.

.Finding a Street Address (if so equipped)

Refer to Navigation System Owner’s Man-

ual.

.Placing Calls

Tutorial for making a phone call by voice

command operation.

.Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to correctly

speak commands in order for them to be

properly recognized by the system.

.Voice Recognition Settings

Describes the available voice recognition

settings.

.Adapting the System to Your Voice

Tutorial adapting the system to your voice.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-

lized, which may take up to one minute. When

completed, the system is ready to accept voice

commands. If the TALK switch is pushed

before the initialization completes the display will

show the message: “System not ready.” or a

beep sounds.

Before starting

To get the best performance from NISSAN

Voice Recognition, observe the following.

.Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible. Close the windows to eliminate the

surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration

sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system

from recognizing the voice commands cor-

rectly.

.When the air conditioner is in the AUTO

mode, the fan speed decreases automati-

cally for easy recognition.

4-122 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (273,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a

command.

.Speak in a natural voice without pausing

between words.

SAA2167

Giving voice command

1. Push and release the TALK switch

located on the steering wheel.

SAA2548

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,

and the system announces, “Please say a

command”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak a

command.

Operating tips:

.Voice commands cannot be accepted when

the icon is .

.The list displayed can be scrolled by tilting

the menu control switch on the steering

wheel.

.If the command is not recognized, the

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123

Information Provided by:

Black plate (274,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

system announces, “Please say again”.

Repeat the command in a clear voice.

.Push the BACK button once to return to the

previous screen.

.If you want to cancel the command, push

and hold the TALK switch for 1 second.

The message “Voice canceled” will be

announced.

.To skip the voice guidance function and give

the command immediately, press the TALK

switch to interrupt the system. Re-

member to speak after the tone.

.If you want to adjust the volume of the

system feedback, push the volume control

switch (+ or −) on the steering wheel or use

the audio system volume knob while the

system is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers:

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain

way to speak numbers when giving voice

commands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For

example, if you would like to say 500, “five zero

zero” can be used, but “five hundred” cannot.

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the follow-

ing examples:

.1-800-662-6200

— “Dial one eight zero zero six six two six

two zero zero.”

Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone

dialing results, say phone numbers as single

digits.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five

five six thousands”.

Note 3: When speaking a house number, speak

the number “0” as “ zero”. If the letter “o ( Oh)” is

included in the house number, it will not be

recognized as the number “0 (zero)” even if you

speak “oh” instead of “ zero”. Please speak

“zero” for the number “0 (zero)”, “oh” for the

letter “o (oh)”.

SAA2549

Speaker adaptation function (for Alter-

nate Command Mode)

The voice recognition system has a function to

learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition

performance. The system can memorize the

voices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the user’s voice:

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument

panel and select the “Others” key.

2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.

4-124 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (275,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2550

4. Select the user whose voice is memorized

by the system.

5. Select the “Start Speaker Adaptation Learn-

ing” key.

SAA2551

6. Select a category to be learned by the

system from the following list.

.Phone Commands

.Navigation Commands

.Information Commands

.Audio Commands

.Help Commands

The voice commands in the category are

displayed.

7. Select a voice command and then push the

ENTER button.

The voice recognition system starts.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125

Information Provided by:

Black plate (276,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAA2552

8. The system requests that you repeat a

command after a tone.

9. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to , speak

the command that the system requested.

10. When the system has recognized the voice

command, the voice of the user is learned.

Push the switch or BACK button to return

to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the command cor-

rectly, the voice command status on the right

side of the command turns from “None” to

“Stored”.

SAA2553

Speaker Adaptation function settings:

Edit User Name

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed

on the screen.

Delete Voice Data

Resets the user’s voice that the voice recogni-

tion system has learned.

Continuous Learning

When this item is turned to ON, you can have

the system learn the voice commands in

succession, without selecting commands one

by one.

Minimize voice feedback (for Alternate

Command Mode)

To minimize the voice feedback from the system,

perform the following steps.

1. Push the SETTING button on the instrument

panel.

2. Select the “Others” key.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

4. Select the “Minimize Voice Feedback” key.

5. The setting is turned to ON and the voice

guidance will now be reduced when using

the Voice Recognition system.

4-126 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (277,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide for the

appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the

system fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Command List” earlier in this section.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

The system consistently selects the wrong voicetag in

the phonebook.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. (See “BLUETOOTH®HANDS-FREE

PHONE SYSTEM (models with navigation system)” earlier in this section; page 4-80.)

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

The system cannot be operated. 1. Make sure that the soft top (for Roadster models) is usable. If the soft top is not working, contact a NISSAN

dealer.

2. Close the soft top (for Roadster models).

3. Open and close the soft top (for Roadster models) before operating the system.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127

Information Provided by:

Black plate (278,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

MEMO

4-128 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information Provided by:

Black plate (16,1)

5 Starting and driving

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Precautions when starting and driving ..................... 5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................... 5-2

Three-way catalyst.......................................... 5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover ........................... 5-5

Off-road recovery........................................... 5-6

Rapid air pressure loss.................................... 5-6

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving...................... 5-7

Push-button ignition switch .................................. 5-7

Operating range for engine start function............. 5-8

Push-button ignition switch operation.................. 5-8

Steering lock (if so equipped) ........................... 5-9

Push-button ignition switch positions .................. 5-9

Emergency engine shut off ............................... 5-9

Intelligent Key battery discharge ...................... 5-10

Before starting the engine .................................. 5-10

Starting the engine ........................................... 5-11

Driving the vehicle ............................................ 5-12

Automatic transmission.................................. 5-12

Manual Transmission ..................................... 5-16

Parking brake .................................................. 5-20

Cruise control ................................................. 5-21

Precautions on cruise control .......................... 5-21

Cruise control operations ............................... 5-21

Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-23

Increasing fuel economy .................................... 5-23

Parking/parking on hills...................................... 5-24

Power steering ................................................ 5-25

Brake system .................................................. 5-25

Braking precautions ...................................... 5-25

Parking brake break-in................................... 5-26

Brake assist.................................................... 5-26

Brake assist................................................ 5-26

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...................... 5-26

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ................. 5-28

Performance dampers (NISMO models) ................ 5-30

Cold weather driving......................................... 5-31

Freeing a frozen door lock.............................. 5-31

Antifreeze ................................................... 5-31

Battery ...................................................... 5-31

Draining of coolant water ............................... 5-31

Tire equipment ............................................ 5-31

Special winter equipment ............................... 5-31

Driving on snow or ice .................................. 5-31

Engine block heater (if so equipped)................. 5-32

Information Provided by:

Black plate (280,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could accidentally injure themselves

or others through inadvertent op-

eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or

possibly fatal injuries to people or

animals.

.Properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shifting.

Do not place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury (Coupe mod-

els).

.Closely supervise children when

they are around cars to prevent

them from playing and becoming

locked in the trunk where they could

be seriously injured. Keep the car

locked with the trunk closed when

not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys (Roadster mod-

els).

If the engine oil temperature is high, the

engine protection mode, which helps re-

duce the chance of engine damage, could

activate and automatically decrease en-

gine power. Driving while the engine oil

temperature is high may result in engine

damage.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

.Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless car-

bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is

dangerous. It can cause uncon-

sciousness or death.

.If you suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering the vehicle, drive with

all windows fully open, and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

.Do not run the engine in closed

spaces such as a garage.

.Do not park the vehicle with the

engine running for any extended

length of time.

.Keep the rear hatch/trunk lid closed

while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the

passenger compartment. If you

must drive with the rear hatch/trunk

lid open, follow these precautions:

1) Open all the windows.

2) Set the air recirculation to

off and the fan control to high to

circulate the air.

.The exhaust system and body

should be inspected by a qualified

mechanic whenever:

— The vehicle is raised for service.

— You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

— You notice a change in the

sound of the exhaust system.

— You have had an accident invol-

ving damage to the exhaust

system, underbody, or rear of

the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (281,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

.The exhaust gas and the exhaust

system are very hot. Keep people,

animals or flammable materials

away from the exhaust system com-

ponents.

.Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

.Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos-

its from leaded gasoline seriously

reduce the three-way catalyst’s abil-

ity to help reduce exhaust pollu-

tants.

.Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-

functions in the ignition, fuel injec-

tion, or electrical systems can cause

overrich fuel flow into the three-way

catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do

not keep driving if the engine mis-

fires, or if noticeable loss of perfor-

mance or other unusual operating

conditions are detected. Have the

vehicle inspected promptly by a

NISSAN dealer.

.Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, dama-

ging the three-way catalyst.

.Do not race the engine while warm-

ing it up.

.Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended

by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation

pressure label, you should determine the proper

tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your tires

is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire

pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS

malfunction indicator is combined with the low

tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-

cator is illuminated, the system may not be able

to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle

that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale

after replacing one or more tires or wheels on

Starting and driving 5-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (282,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly.

Additional information

.The TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

.The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect

a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a

flat tire while driving).

.The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)

to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

.Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in

low ambient temperature, check the tire

pressure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section and “TIRE PRESSURE MON-

ITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section.

WARNING

.If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble. Driving with under-inflated tires

may permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in serious

personal injury. Check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD

tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If the light still illuminates

while driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may be flat. If you

have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. (See

“FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section for changing a

flat tire.)

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after 1 minute. Contact

your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/

or system resetting.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

the tire pressure sensors (for mod-

els not equipped with the emer-

gency tire puncture repair kit).

.If you used the Emergency Tire

Sealant to repair a minor tire punc-

ture, your NISSAN dealer will also

need to replace the TPMS sensor in

addition to repairing or replacing

5-4 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (283,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

the tire (for models equipped with

the emergency tire puncture repair

kit).

.NISSAN recommends using only

NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure (for models

equipped with the emergency tire

puncture repair kit).

CAUTION

.The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with

tire chains or the wheels are buried

in snow.

.Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the

windows. This may cause poor re-

ception of the signals from the tire

pressure sensors, and the TPMS will

not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. Some examples are:

— Facilities or electric devices using similar

radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

— If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

— If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/

AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-

OVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering

maneuvers, because these driving practices

could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, a loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all

times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive

when under the influence of alcohol or drugs

(including prescription or over-the-counter

drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt as outlined in the “SEAT

BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of this

manual, and also instruct your passengers to do

so.

Starting and driving 5-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (284,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this

occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by

following the procedure below. Please note that

this procedure is only a general guide. The

vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on

the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive

the vehicle back onto the road surface until

vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the

appropriate driving lane.

.If you decide that it is not safe to return

the vehicle to the road surface based on

vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gra-

dually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe

place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due

to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure

loss can also be caused by driving on under-

inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main-

taining the correct air pressure and visually

inspect the tires for wear and damage. See

“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out”

while driving maintain control of the vehicle by

following the procedure below. Please note that

this procedure is only a general guide. The

vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on

the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air

pressure. Losing control of the vehicle

may cause a collision and result in

personal injury.

.The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

.Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

.Do not rapidly release the accelera-

tor pedal.

.Do not rapidly turn the steering

wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

5-6 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (285,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

either contact a roadside emergency service

to change the tire or see “CHANGING A

FLAT TIRE (for models with spare tire)” in

the “6. In case of emergency” section of this

Owner’s Manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-

stream reduces coordination, delays

reaction time and impairs judgement.

Driving after drinking alcohol increases

the likelihood of being involved in an

accident injuring yourself and others.

Additionally, if you are injured in an

accident, alcohol can increase the se-

verity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents.

Although the local laws vary on what is

considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is

that alcohol affects all people differently and

most people underestimate the effects of

alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And

that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,

prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by

alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except

in an emergency. (The engine will stop

when the ignition switch is pushed 3

consecutive times or the ignition switch

is pushed and held for more than 2

seconds.) If the engine stops while the

vehicle is being driven, this could lead

to a crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button ignition

switch, be sure to move the selector lever to

the P (Park) position (for automatic transmission

model) or the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position (for manual transmission model).

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (286,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSD0825

OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE

START FUNCTION

The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting

the engine when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range *

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent Key

system’s operating range becomes narrower

and may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push

the ignition switch to start the engine.

.The cargo/trunk room area is not included in

the operating range but the Intelligent Key

may function.

.If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, inside

the glove box or door pocket, the Intelligent

Key may not function.

.If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

SSD1021

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

OPERATION

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal (automatic transmis-

sion model) or the clutch pedal (manual

transmission model), the ignition switch position

will change as follows:

.Push center once to change to ACC.

.Push center two times to change to ON.

.Push center three times to change to OFF.

(No position illuminates.)

.Push center four times to return to ACC.

.Open or close any door to return to LOCK

5-8 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (287,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

during the OFF position.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot be

turned from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed on the vehicle information display.

(See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

Automatic transmission models

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to LOCK

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed

toward the LOCK position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

The ignition switch position indicator will not

illuminate.

3. Open the door. The ignition switch will

change to the LOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

STEERING LOCK (if so equipped)

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn

from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, push the

ignition switch to the OFF position. To

unlock the steering wheel, push the igni-

tion switch. If the steering lock release

malfunction indicator appears on the ve-

hicle information display, push the push-

button ignition switch again while lightly

turning the steering wheel right and left.

(See “VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY”

in the “2. Instruments and controls” sec-

tion.)

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted

in the port.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio, when the engine is not

running.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

OFF

The engine can be turned off in this position.

Automatic transmission models: The ignition

lock is designed so that the ignition switch

cannot be switched to the LOCK position until

the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving perform the following procedure:

.Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

3 consecutive times, or

.Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-

button ignition switch in ACC or ON

positions when the engine is not run-

ning for an extended period. This can

discharge the battery.

Starting and driving 5-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (288,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSD0826

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS-

CHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost

discharged, the guide light *

Bof the Intelligent

Key port *

Ablinks and the indicator appears on

the vehicle information display. (See “VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY” in the “2. Instruments

and controls” section.)

In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the

port *

1allows you to start the engine. Make

sure that the key ring side faces backward as

illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port

until it is latched and secured.

To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push

the ignition switch to the OFF position and pull

the Intelligent Key out of the port.

NOTE:

The Intelligent Key port does not charge

the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the

low battery indicator in the vehicle infor-

mation display, replace the battery as soon

as possible. (See “INTELLIGENT KEY BAT-

TERY REPLACEMENT” in the “8. Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section.)

CAUTION

.Never place anything except the

Intelligent Key in the Intelligent

Key port. Doing so may cause da-

mage to the equipment.

.Make sure the Intelligent Key is in

the correct direction when inserting

it to the Intelligent Key port. The

engine may not start if it is in the

incorrect direction.

.Remove the Intelligent Key from the

Intelligent Key port after the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF posi-

tion.

.Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

.Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as

frequently as possible, or at least whenever

you refuel.

.Check that all windows and lights are clean.

.Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

.Lock all doors.

.Position seat and adjust head restraints.

.Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

.Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

.Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position. (See “WARNING/INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in

the “2. Instruments and controls” section.)

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-10 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (289,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic Transmission (AT) model:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the selector lever is in either of the above

positions.

Manual Transmission (MT) model:

Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position. Depress the clutch pedal fully to

the floor.

The starter is designed not to operate unless

the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

The Intelligent Key must be carried

when operating the ignition switch.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal (AT model) or the

clutch pedal (MT model) and push the

ignition switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and

release the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal with the ignition switch in

any position.

.If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when restart-

ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little

(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and

while holding, crank the engine. Release

the accelerator pedal when the engine

starts.

.If the engine is very hard to start

because it is flooded, depress the

accelerator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Push the ignition switch to

the ON position to start cranking the

engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop

cranking by pushing the ignition switch

to OFF. After cranking the engine,

release the accelerator pedal. Crank

the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by depressing the

brake pedal and pushing the push-

button ignition switch to start the engine.

If the engine starts, but fails to run,

repeat the above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, push the ignition switch

to OFF and wait 10 seconds before

cranking again, otherwise the starter

could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive at

moderate speed for a short distance first,

especially in cold weather. In cold weather,

keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -

3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and

stopping the engine over a short period of

time may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

When racing the engine up to 4,500 rpm or

more under no load condition, the engine

will enter the fuel cut mode.

5. To stop the engine, shift the selector lever to

the P (Park) position (AT model) or move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position (MT

model), and push the ignition switch to the

OFF position.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (290,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

7 speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your vehicle is

electronically controlled by a transmission con-

trol module to produce maximum efficiency and

smooth operation.

Shown on the following pages are the recom-

mended operating procedures for this transmis-

sion. Follow these procedures for maximum

vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot

brake pedal and push the selector lever button

before shifting the selector lever to the R

(Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual shift

mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully

stopped before attempting to shift the selector

lever.

This automatic transmission model is de-

signed so that the foot brake pedal must

be depressed before shifting from P (Park)

to any drive position while the ignition

switch position is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of the

other gear positions if the ignition switch

is pushed to the LOCK, OFF or ACC

position.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

push the selector lever button to shift into a

driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,

then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

.Do not depress the accelerator

pedal while shifting from P (Park)

or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse) D

(Drive), or manual shift mode. Al-

ways depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do

so could cause you to lose control

and have an accident.

.Cold engine idle speed is high, so

use caution when shifting into a

forward or reverse gear before the

engine has warmed up.

.Never shift to P (Park) or R (Re-

verse) while vehicle is moving for-

ward. Never shift to P (Park) or D

(Drive) while vehicle is moving rear-

ward. Failure to do so could cause

you to lose control and have an

accident.

CAUTION

.When stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle

by depressing the accelerator pedal.

The foot brake should be used for

this purpose.

.Do not downshift abruptly on slip-

pery roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-12 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (291,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSD0827

Selector lever

Shifting

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressing the

brake pedal,

: Push the button,

: Just move the selector lever.

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park)

to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or Manual

shift mode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R

(Reverse). All other positions can be selected

without pushing the button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector

lever is in any position while the engine

is not running. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

or roll away and result in serious

personal injury or property damage.

CAUTION

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped and the transmission is in the

P (Park) position.

P (Park) position:

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the selector

lever button pushed in to move the selec-

tor lever from the N (Neutral) position or

any drive position to the P (Park) position.

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill,

apply the parking brake first, then move the

selector lever to the P (Park) position.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle

is completely stopped.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be sure the

vehicle is completely stopped before selecting

the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal

must be depressed and the selector lever

button pushed in to move the selector

lever from the P (Park) position, the N

(Neutral) position or any drive position to

the R (Reverse) position.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.

The engine can be started in this position. You

may shift to the N (Neutral) position and restart a

stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Starting and driving 5-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (292,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSD0828

Paddle shifter

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is in the manual shift

gate, the transmission is ready for the manual

shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected

manually by moving the selector lever up or

down, or pulling the right-side or left-side

paddle shifter.

When shifting up, move the selector lever to the

+ (up) side or pull the right-side paddle shifter

(+) *

A. The transmission shifts to the higher

range.

When shifting down, move the selector lever to

the −(down) side or pull the left-side paddle

shifter (−)*

B. The transmission shifts to the

lower range.

When canceling the manual shift mode, return

the selector lever to the D (Drive) position. The

transmission returns to the normal driving mode.

When you pull the paddle shifter while in the D

(Drive) position, the transmission will shift to the

upper or lower range temporarily. The transmis-

sion will automatically return to the D (Drive)

position after a short period of time. If you want

to return to the D (Drive) position manually, pull

and hold the paddle shifter for about 1.5

seconds.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the transmission position indicator

in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

(7th):

Use this position for all normal forward driving at

highway speeds.

(6th) and 5

(5th):

Use these positions when driving up long

slopes, or for engine braking when driving down

long slopes.

(4th), 3

(3rd) and 2

(2nd):

Use these positions for hill climbing or engine

braking on downhill grades.

(1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, or

for maximum engine braking on steep downhill

grades.

.Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than 7th

gear. This reduces fuel economy.

.Moving the selector lever rapidly to the same

side twice will shift the ranges in succes-

sion.

.In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving perfor-

mance and reduces the chance of

vehicle damage or loss of control.

When this situation occurs, the Automatic

Transmission (AT) position indicator light (on

the vehicle information display) will blink and

the buzzer will sound.

.In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down to 1st

gear before the vehicle comes to a

stop. When accelerating again, it is

necessary to shift up to the desired

range.

5-14 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (293,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSD0832

Upshift indicator:

The up-shift indicator is located in the tach-

ometer and shows the driver the timing to shift

into a higher gear by illuminating. The use of the

up-shift indicator will help you to upshift at a

constant engine speed from any gear.

The up-shift indicator will start flashing when the

engine speed reaches about 500 rpm before the

set figure while driving, and then illuminate after

the engine speed reaches the set figure.

The engine speed for upshifting can be set on

the vehicle information display. See “TRIP

COMPUTER” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.

There may be a slight difference between

the timing of the up-shift indicator illumi-

nation and the tachometer indication.

Accelerator downshift

— In D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the

transmission down into the lower gear, depend-

ing on the vehicle speed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, note that

the transmission will be locked in any of the

forward gears according to the condition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-

ning and subsequent hard braking, the

fail-safe system may be activated. This will

occur even if all electrical circuits are

functioning properly. In this case, push

the ignition switch to the OFF position and

wait for 3 seconds. Then push the ignition

switch back to the ON position. The vehicle

should return to its normal operating

condition. If it does not return to its normal

operating condition, have a NISSAN dealer

check the transmission and repair if ne-

cessary.

SSD0829

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

selector lever may not be moved from the P

(Park) position even with the brake pedal

depressed and the selector lever button pushed.

To move the selector lever, perform the following

procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock cover *

Ausing a

suitable tool.

Starting and driving 5-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (294,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

4. Push down the shift lock *

Busing a

suitable tool as illustrated.

5. Push the selector lever button *

Cand move

the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position

Dwhile holding down the shift lock.

Push the ignition switch to the ON position to

unlock the steering wheel (if so equipped). Now

the vehicle may be moved to the desired

location.

For models with a steering wheel lock mechan-

ism:

If the battery is discharged completely, the

steering wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not

move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park),

have a NISSAN dealer check the automatic

transmission system as soon as possible.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

WARNING

.Do not downshift abruptly on slip-

pery roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

.Do not over-rev the engine when

shifting to a lower gear. This may

cause a loss of control or engine

damage.

CAUTION

.Do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal while driving. This may da-

mage the clutch.

.Fully depress the clutch pedal be-

fore shifting to help prevent trans-

mission damage.

.Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

.When the vehicle is stopped with

the engine running (for example, at

a stop light), shift to N (Neutral) and

release the clutch pedal with the

foot brake applied.

SSD0536

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or down-

shifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into

an appropriate gear, and then slowly and

smoothly release the clutch pedal.

This vehicle is equipped with a short throw

shifter manual transmission. To ensure smooth

gear changes, be sure to fully depress the clutch

pedal before operating the shift lever. If the

clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the

transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be

heard. Transmission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and upshift to 2nd,

3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in sequence accord-

ing to the vehicle speed.

5-16 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (295,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

To back up, depress the shift knob and then

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position

after stopping the vehicle completely.

The shift knob returns to its original position

when the shift lever is moved to the N (Neutral)

position.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R

(Reverse) or 1st (Low gear), shift to N (Neutral),

then release the clutch pedal. Fully depress the

clutch pedal again and shift into R or 1st.

SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) (if

so equipped for Manual Transmission

models)

The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) auto-

matically adjusts the engine speed to match the

selecting gear ratio while changing gears.

Precautions:

.Shift lever and clutch pedal operations are

not different than a conventional manual

transmission.

.Fully depress the clutch pedal. Insufficient

pedal depression may cause slow response

of this system.

.When the clutch pedal is depressed with

the gear still engaged, the engine speed is

kept at the proper level for the engaged

gear. Thus, the engine speed may be kept

high depending on the gear position and

vehicle speed.

.When the clutch pedal is depressed with

the transmission in neutral, the system

operates for approximately 2 seconds, and

then the engine speed will decrease to the

idle speed.

.When the engine coolant temperature is low

right after starting the engine, engine speed

synchronization will be delayed or may be

insufficient.

.The system controls the engine speed up to

the rev limit. Note that S-MODE is not a

function that prevents over-revving resulting

from shifting mistakes.

.The system does not operate while the

vehicle is backing up.

.If the engine speed is limited lower than

usual when the engine oil temperature is

extremely high, the system will control up to

the limited engine speed.

.If the malfunction indicator light illuminates,

the system may not operate and the S-

MODE indicator turns off.

SSD0830

SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) warn-

ing:

The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) warn-

ing will appear on the vehicle information display

and the S-MODE indicator will turn off if a

system malfunction occurs.

If the warning appears, the S-MODE function

will not operate, but manual transmission will

operate normally and driving can be continued.

Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Starting and driving 5-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (296,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSD0831

Activating the system:

To activate the S-MODE, push the S-MODE

switch *

A. The S-MODE indicator *

Bon the

tachometer will show “S”. To deactivate, push

and hold the S-MODE switch for more than 1

second. The S-MODE indicator will turn off.

While the S-MODE is off, you can drive the

vehicle as a conventional manual transmission

model.

Note that the status of the S-MODE (on or off) is

memorized even after the ignition switch is

turned off; however, it will be initialized (off)

when the battery is disconnected.

The transmission position indicator *

Cshows

the selected gear: N (Neutral), 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, R

(Reverse).

SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) op-

eration:

The SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) auto-

matically adjusts the engine speed by controlling

the engine throttle. The accelerator pedal does

not have to be depressed.

The system detects the clutch pedal and shift

lever operations, and then calculates the target

engine speed using the shifting gear position

and the vehicle speed information.

The system provides accurate engine speed

control that helps achieve quick gear shifting

and reduces shift shock on clutch engagement.

.When downshifting:

The engine speed is automatically increased

to the target engine speed before the clutch

is engaged.

.When upshifting:

The engine speed is automatically kept after

the engine speed lowers to the target

engine speed.

Rapid clutch engagement before the engine

speed lowers to the target engine speed

may cause shift shock.

.When depressing the clutch pedal with

the gear engaged:

The engine speed is automatically kept at

the proper engine speed for the engaged

gear.

This function will not operate when low (1st)

gear is selected.

There is a delay between the clutch pedal

operation and the S-MODE operation. Make

sure the engine speed is adjusted before

engaging the clutch again.

5-18 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (297,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSD0832

Upshift indicator

The up-shift indicator is located in the tach-

ometer and shows the driver the timing to shift

into a higher gear by illuminating. The use of the

up-shift indicator will help you to upshift at a

constant engine speed from any gear.

The up-shift indicator will start flashing when the

engine speed reaches about 500 rpm before the

set figure while driving, and then illuminate after

the engine speed reaches the set figure.

The engine speed for upshifting can be set on

the vehicle information display. See “TRIP

COMPUTER” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.

There may be a slight difference between

the timing of the up-shift indicator illumi-

nation and the tachometer indication.

Suggested up-shift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehicle speeds for

shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions

relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.

Actual up-shift speeds will vary according to

road conditions, the weather and individual

driving habits.

For normal acceleration in low altitude areas

[less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 8 (13)

2nd to 3rd 16 (26)

3rd to 4th 25 (40)

4th to 5th 28 (45)

5th to 6th 33 (53)

For quick acceleration in low altitude areas or in

high altitude areas [over 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)

1st to 2nd 15 (24)

2nd to 3rd 25 (40)

3rd to 4th 40 (64)

4th to 5th 45 (72)

5th to 6th 50 (80)

Starting and driving 5-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (298,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Suggested maximum speed in each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not

running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed

(shown below) in any gear. For level road

driving, use the highest gear suggested for that

speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and

drive according to the road conditions, which

will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the

engine when shifting to a lower gear as it may

cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Gear MPH (km/h)

1st 38 (62)

2nd 63 (102)

3rd 91 (146)

4th —

5th —

6th —

WARNING

.Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to

do so can cause brake failure and

lead to an accident.

.Do not release the parking brake

from outside the vehicle.

.Do not use the gear shift in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully

engaged.

.Do not leave children unattended in

a vehicle. They could release the

parking brake and cause an acci-

dent.

SPA2110

To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up *

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. While pulling up on the parking brake lever

slightly, push the button *

2and lower the

lever completely *

3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

PARKING BRAKE

5-20 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (299,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON-

TROL

.If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

will cancel automatically. The CRUISE in-

dicator light on the meter panel will then

blink to warn the driver.

.If the engine coolant temperature becomes

excessively high, the cruise control system

will cancel automatically.

.If the CRUISE indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control main switch off and have the

system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

.The CRUISE indicator light may blink when

the cruise control main switch is turned ON

while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE,

SET/COAST or CANCEL switch. To prop-

erly set the cruise control system, perform

the following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when

driving under the following conditions:

.when it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed

.in heavy traffic or in traffic that

varies in speed

.on winding or hilly roads

.on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.)

.in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do not

shift into N (Neutral) without depres-

sing the clutch pedal when the cruise

control is set. Should this occur, de-

press the clutch pedal and turn the

main switch off immediately. Failure to

do so may cause engine damage.

SSD0833

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

2. SET/COAST switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN

switch on. The CRUISE indicator light will

illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle

to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST

CRUISE CONTROL

Starting and driving 5-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (300,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

switch and release it. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the

set speed.

.To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously

set speed.

.The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

on winding or hilly roads. If this happens,

drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following methods:

a) Push the CANCEL switch.

b) Tap the brake pedal.

c) Turn the MAIN switch off. The CRUISE light

will turn off.

.If you depress the brake pedal while pushing

the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/

COAST switch and reset at the cruising

speed, the cruise control will disengage.

Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn

it on again.

.The cruise control will automatically cancel if

the vehicle slows more than 8 MPH (13

km/h) below the set speed.

.If you move the selector lever to the N

(Neutral) position (Automatic Transmission

models) or depress the clutch pedal (Man-

ual Transmission models), the cruise control

will be canceled.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

.Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the SET/COAST switch.

.Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE

switch. When the vehicle attains the desired

speed, release the switch.

.Push, then quickly release the RESUME/

ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do

this, the set speed will increase by about 1

MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following methods:

.Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET/COAST switch and release it.

.Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle slows

down to the desired speed.

.Push, then quickly release the SET/COAST

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.

The vehicle will resume the last set cruising

speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH

(40 km/h).

5-22 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (301,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance and

ensure the future reliability and econo-

my of your new vehicle.

Failure to follow these recommenda-

tions may result in shortened engine

life and reduced engine performance.

.Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

.Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

.Avoid quick starts.

.Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

.Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

.Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

.Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.

.Select a gear range suitable to road condi-

tions.

.Avoid unnecessary prolonged engine idling.

.Keep your engine tuned up.

.Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

.Keep the tires inflated at the correct

pressure. Improper tire pressure will in-

crease wear and waste fuel.

.Make sure the front wheels are properly

aligned. Improper alignment will cause pre-

mature tire wear and lower fuel economy.

.Air conditioner operation lowers fuel econ-

omy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

.When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Starting and driving 5-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (302,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SD1006MA

WARNING

.Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

.Never leave the engine running

while the vehicle is unattended.

.Do not leave children unattended

inside the vehicle. They could un-

knowingly activate switches or con-

trols. Unattended children could

become involved in serious acci-

dents.

.Safe parking procedures require

that both the parking brake be

applied and the transmission placed

into P (Park) for Automatic Trans-

mission (AT) model or in an appro-

priate gear for Manual Transmission

(MT) model. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpect-

edly or roll away and result in an

accident.

.Make sure the automatic transmis-

sion selector lever has been pushed

as far forward as it can go and

cannot be moved without depres-

sing the foot brake pedal.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) gear.

When parking on an uphill grade, place the

shift lever in the 1st gear.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

the street when parked on a sloping drive

way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels

as illustrated.

.HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: *

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

.HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: *

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

.HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB: *

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-24 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (303,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the

center of the road if it moves.

4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic

pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you

will still have control of the vehicle. However,

much greater steering effort is needed, espe-

cially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and the stopping

distance will be longer.

When the brake pedal is depressed slowly and

firmly, you may hear a clicking noise and feel a

slight pulsation. This is normal and indicates that

the Brake Assist System is operating.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up

the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to

normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds

until the brakes function correctly.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (304,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual and can be performed by a

NISSAN dealer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will cause overheating of the

brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster

and reduce gas mileage.

To help save the brakes and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

.While driving on a slippery surface,

be careful when braking, accelerat-

ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking

or accelerating could cause the

wheelstoskidandresultinan

accident.

.If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the brakes will not work.

Braking will be harder.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is

activated generating greater braking force than a

conventional brake booster even with light pedal

force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

.The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

is a sophisticated device, but it

cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain

vehicle control during braking on

slippery surfaces. Remember that

stopping distances on slippery sur-

faces will be longer than on normal

surfaces even with ABS. Stopping

BRAKE ASSIST

5-26 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (305,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

distances may also be longer on

rough, gravel or snow covered

roads, or if you are using tire chains.

Alwaysmaintainasafedistance

from the vehicle in front of you.

Ultimately, the driver is responsible

for safety.

.Tire type and condition may also

affect braking effectiveness.

— When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

— When installing a spare tire,

make sure that it is the proper

size and type as specified on the

Tire and Loading Information

label. See “TIRE AND LOADING

INFORMATION LABEL” in the “9.

Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

— For detailed information, see

“WHEELS AND TIRES” in the

“8. Maintenance and do-it-your-

self” section of this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls

the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard

braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.

The system detects the rotation speed at each

wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to

prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By

preventing each wheel from locking, the system

helps the driver maintain steering control and

helps to minimize swerving and spinning on

slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from

locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping dis-

tances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward

or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may

hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the

brake pedal. This is normal and does not

indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses

a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and

illuminates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then oper-

ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH

(5 to 10 km/h).

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly

applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This

action is similar to pumping the brakes very

quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or

feel a vibration from the actuator when it is

operating. This is normal and indicates that the

ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-

tion may indicate that road conditions are

hazardous and extra care is required while

driving.

Starting and driving 5-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (306,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs

and vehicle motion. Under certain driving con-

ditions, the VDC system helps to perform the

following functions.

.Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is

transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on

the same axle.

.Controls brake pressure and engine output

to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle

speed (traction control function).

.Controls brake pressure at individual wheels

and engine output to help the driver maintain

control of the vehicle in the following

conditions:

— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the

steered path despite increased steering

input)

— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions).

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain

control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss

of vehicle control in all driving situations.

When the VDC system operates, the VDC

warning light in the instrument panel

flashes so note the following:

.The road may be slippery or the system may

determine some action is required to help

keep the vehicle on the steered path.

.You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise or vibration from under the

hood. This is normal and indicates that the

VDC system is working properly.

.Adjust your speed and driving to the road

conditions.

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC

warning light illuminates in the instrument

panel. The VDC system automatically turns off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system. The VDC off indicator illuminates

to indicate the VDC system is off. When the

VDC switch is used to turn off the system, the

VDC system still operates to prevent one drive

wheel from slipping by transferring power to a

non slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning light

flashes if this occurs. All other VDC

functions are off, and the VDC warning light

will not flash. The VDC system is auto-

matically reset to on when the ignition switch is

placed in the off position then back to the on

position.

See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning

light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

off indicator light” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in

reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test

occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and

is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

.The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but

does not prevent accidents due to

abrupt steering operation at high

speeds or by careless or dangerous

driving techniques. Reduce vehicle

speed and be especially careful

when driving and cornering on slip-

pery surfaces and always drive care-

fully.

.Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs,

stabilizer bars, bushings and

wheels are not NISSAN recom-

mended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-28 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (307,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

system may not operate properly.

This could adversely affect vehicle

handling performance, and the VDC

warning light may illuminate.

.If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extre-

mely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and the

VDC warning light may illumi-

nate.

.If engine control related parts are

not NISSAN recommended or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC

warning light may illuminate.

.When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked

corners, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC warn-

ing light may illuminate. Do not

drive on these types of roads.

.When driving on an unstable sur-

face such as a turntable, ferry,

elevator or ramp, the VDC warning

light may illuminate. This is not

a malfunction. Restart the engine

after driving onto a stable surface.

.If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are

used, the VDC system may not

operate properly and the VDC warn-

ing light may illuminate.

.The VDC system is not a substitute

for winter tires or tire chains on a

snow covered road.

Starting and driving 5-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (308,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSD0876

1. Front performance damper

2. Rear performance damper

The performance dampers are installed in the

front and rear parts of the NISMO models for

improved handling and ride.

WARNING

.High-pressure nitrogen gas is

sealed inside the performance dam-

pers. Do not attempt to modify or

disassemble them.

.For disposal of the performance

dampers or when scrapping the

vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Never burn or puncture the perfor-

mance dampers. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause serious per-

sonal injury.

PERFORMANCE DAMPERS (NISMO

models)

5-30 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (309,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the

key hole or use the Intelligent Key system.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

outside temperature will drop below 328F(08C),

check antifreeze to assure proper winter protec-

tion. For additional information, see “ENGINE

COOLING SYSTEM” in the “8. Maintenance

and do-it-yourself” section.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the battery

fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To

maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should

be checked regularly. For additional information,

see “BATTERY” in the “8. Maintenance and do-

it-yourself” section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including

the engine block. Refill before operating the

vehicle. For details, see “ENGINE COOLING

SYSTEM” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide

superior performance on dry pavement. How-

ever, the performance of these tires will be

substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi-

tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy

roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &

SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.

Consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,

speed rating and availability information.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states

and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before

installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

Tire chains may be used. For details, see “TIRE

CHAINS” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

.A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

.A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

.A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

.Extra window washer fluid to refill the

reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

.Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick

and very hard to drive on. The

vehicle will have much less traction

or “grip” under these conditions. Try

to avoid driving on wet ice until the

road is salted or sanded.

.Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels

will lose even more traction.

.Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pave-

ment.

.Allow greater following distances

on slippery roads.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (310,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

.Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a

patch of ice is seen ahead, brake

before reaching it. Try not to brake

while on the ice, and avoid any

sudden steering maneuvers.

.Do not use the cruise control on

slippery roads.

.Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep

snow clear of the exhaust pipe and

from around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist with

cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when

the outside temperature is 208F(−78C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on

outside temperatures, to properly warm the

engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to

turn the engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

WARNING

.Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical sys-

tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can

be seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded

connection.

.Disconnect and properly store the

engine block heater cord before

starting the engine. Damage to the

cord could result in an electrical

shock and can cause serious injury.

.Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least

10A. Plug the extension cord into a

Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-

tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.

Failure to use the proper extension

cord or a grounded outlet can result

in a fire or electrical shock and

cause serious personal injury.

5-32 Starting and driving

Information Provided by:

Black plate (19,1)

6 In case of emergency

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Emergency engine shut off ................................... 6-2

Flat tire ............................................................ 6-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)............. 6-2

Changing a flat tire (for models with spare tire) ..... 6-3

Repairing flat tire (for models with emergency

tire puncture repair kit) .................................... 6-7

Jump starting .................................................. 6-13

Push starting................................................... 6-15

If your vehicle overheats..................................... 6-15

Towing your vehicle .......................................... 6-16

Towing recommended by NISSAN

(except for NISMO models) ............................ 6-17

Towing recommended by NISSAN

(NISMO models).......................................... 6-19

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ........... 6-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (314,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

.Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

3 consecutive times, or

.Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or

more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you

of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This

system will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For

more details, see “WARNING/INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS” in the

“2. Instruments and controls” section and “TIRE

PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

.If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull

off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possi-

ble. Driving with under-inflated tires

may permanently damage the tires

and increase the likelihood of tire

failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an

accident and could result in serious

personal injury. Check the tire pres-

sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD

tire pressure shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If the light still illuminates

while driving after adjusting the tire

pressure, a tire may be flat. If you

have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible.

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after 1 minute. Contact

your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/

or system resetting.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.Do not inject any tire liquid or

aerosol tire sealant into the tires,

as this may cause a malfunction of

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (315,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

the tire pressure sensors (for mod-

els not equipped with the emer-

gency tire puncture repair kit).

.If you used the Emergency Tire

Sealant to repair a minor tire punc-

ture, your NISSAN dealer will also

need to replace the TPMS sensor in

addition to repairing or replacing

the tire (for models equipped with

the emergency tire puncture repair

kit).

.NISSAN recommends using only

NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure (for models

equipped with the emergency tire

puncture repair kit).

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE (for models

with spare tire)

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Move the selector lever to the P

(Park) position (Automatic transmission

models). Move the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) gear (Manual transmission mod-

els).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

.Make sure the parking brake is

securely applied and the manual

transmission is shifted into R (Re-

verse), or the automatic transmis-

sion into P (Park).

.Never change tires when the vehicle

is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.

This is hazardous.

.Never change tires if oncoming

traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait

for professional road assistance.

MCE0001A

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks *

1at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat

tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is

jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the

vehicle may move and result in personal

injury.

In case of emergency 6-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (316,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SCE0844

Without subwoofer

SCE0807

With subwoofer

Getting the spare tire and tools

Remove jacking tools *

Alocated under the

cargo room/trunk as illustrated.

For Coupe models, unfasten the belts and lift the

jack up to remove.

Models without subwoofer:

Remove the spacer *

B, and turn the retainer

Ccounterclockwise, then remove the spare

tire.

Models with subwoofer:

Remove the spare tire cover *

C. Turn the

retainer *

Bcounterclockwise, remove the

subwoofer *

Dand place it on the side of the

cargo room (with the flat surface facing down),

then carefully remove the spare tire.

Jacking up the vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

.Never get under the vehicle while it

is supported only by the jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

.Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle

on other vehicles. The jack is de-

signed for lifting only your vehicle

during a tire change.

.Use the correct jack-up points.

Never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

.Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

.Never use blocks on or under the

jack.

.Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack, as it may

cause the vehicle to move. This is

especially true for vehicles with

limited slip differentials.

.Do not allow passengers to stay in

the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

6-4 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (317,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SCE0790

Jack-up point

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.

Align the jack head between the two

notches in the front or the rear as shown.

Also fit the groove of the jack head between

the notches as shown.

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

SCE0504

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod with both hands as shown above.

Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears

the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and

then remove the tire.

In case of emergency 6-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (318,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SCE0661

Installing the spare tire

The T-type spare tire is designed for

emergency use. (See specific instructions

under the heading “WHEELS AND TIRES”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.)

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the

wheel nuts contact the wheel surface

horizontally.

Models equipped with different sized

tires in the front and rear:

When replacing a front tire, make sure that

the hole in the spare tire wheel is aligned

with the pin on the brake rotor.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence

as illustrated (*

1,*

2,*

3,*

4,*

5) until

they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the

vehicle completely.

WARNING

.Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

.Do not use oil or grease on the

wheel studs or nuts. This could

cause the nuts to become loose.

.Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600

miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a

flat tire, etc.).

.As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened

to specification at all times. It is

recommended that wheel nuts be tigh-

tened to specifications at each lubrica-

tion interval.

.Adjust tire pressure to the COLD

pressure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked for

three hours or more or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label

affixed to the driver side center pillar.

Stowing the damaged tire and tools

Coupe models:

1. Securely store the damaged tire and jacking

tools in the storage area.

2. Place the spare tire cover and the cargo

room carpet over the damaged tire.

3. Close the rear hatch.

6-6 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (319,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SCE0845

Roadster models:

Securely store the jacking tools in the storage

area.

Place the spare tire cover and trunk room carpet

back in the trunk, and then close the trunk lid.

Securely store the damaged tire according to

the following procedure as illustrated.

1. Put the damaged tire in the plastic bag *

stored in the trunk.

2. Move the passenger seat forward, and then

place the damaged tire *

Bwrapped in the

plastic bag behind the seat.

3. Move the passenger seat backward to

secure the damaged tire.

WARNING

.Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can

become dangerous projectiles in an

accident or sudden stop.

.The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. See specific instructions

under the heading “WHEELS AND

TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and

do-it-yourself” section.

REPAIRING FLAT TIRE (for models with

emergency tire puncture repair kit)

WARNING

.After using Emergency Tire Sealant

to repair a minor tire puncture, do

not drive the vehicle at speeds

faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

.Immediately after using the Emer-

gency Tire Sealant to repair a minor

tire puncture, take your vehicle to a

NISSAN dealer to inspect, and re-

pair or replace the tire. The Emer-

gency Tire Sealant cannot perma-

nently seal a punctured tire. Con-

tinuing operation of the vehicle

without a permanent tire repair can

lead to a crash.

.If you used the Emergency Tire

Sealant to repair a minor tire punc-

ture, your NISSAN dealer will also

need to replace the TPMS sensor in

addition to repairing or replacing

the tire.

.NISSAN recommends using only

NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure.

This vehicle does not have a spare tire. The

emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emergency

Tire Sealant) is supplied with the vehicle instead

of a spare tire. It can be used to temporarily

repair minor tire punctures.

If possible, have the vehicle towed to a facility

that can repair or replace the flat tire. Using the

emergency tire puncture repair kit may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure sensor and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate.

In case of emergency 6-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (320,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

CAUTION

.To avoid the emergency tire punc-

ture kit being damaged during sto-

rage or use:

— Only use the emergency tire

puncture repair kit on your ve-

hicle. Do not use it on other

vehicles.

— Only use the kit to inflate the

tires of your vehicle and to

check the vehicle’s tire pressure.

— Only plug the compressor into a

12V DC car power point.

— Keep the kit free of water and

dirt.

— Do not disassemble or modify

the kit.

— Do not drop the kit or allow hard

impacts to the kit.

.Do not use the emergency tire

puncture repair kit under the follow-

ing conditions. Contact a NISSAN

dealer or professional road assis-

tance.

— when the sealant has passed its

expiration date (shown on the

label attached to the bottle)

— when the cut or the puncture is

approximately 0.25 in (6 mm) or

longer

— when the tire sidewall is da-

maged

— when the vehicle has been dri-

ven with extremely low tire

pressure

— when the tire has come off the

inside or the outside of the

wheel.

— when the tire wheel is damaged

— when two or more tires are flat

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake.

4. Automatic Transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

Manual Transmission models:

Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

position.

5. Turn off the engine.

6. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

7. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the manual transmission is

shifted into R (Reverse) or the auto-

matic transmission into P (Park).

.Never repair tires when the vehicle

is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.

This is hazardous.

.Never repair tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for

professional road assistance.

6-8 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (321,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SCE0866

Getting emergency tire puncture repair

kit

Take out the emergency tire puncture repair kit

located under the cargo room or in the trunk.

The repair kit consists of the following items:

1Tire sealant bottle

2Air compressor

3Speed restriction sticker

NOTE:

For models with the emergency tire punc-

ture repair kit, a spare tire, jack and rod are

not equipped as standard. These parts are

dealer options. Contact a NISSAN dealer

about obtaining these parts. See “CHAN-

GING A FLAT TIRE (for models with spare

tire)” earlier in this section for usage of

jacking tools and tire replacement.

Before using emergency tire puncture

repair kit

.If any foreign object (for example, a screw or

nail) is embedded in the tire, do not remove

it.

.Check the expiration date of the sealant

(shown on the label attached to the bottle).

Never use a sealant whose expiration date

has passed.

Repairing tire

WARNING

Observe the following precautions

when using the tire repair compound.

.Swallowing the compound is dan-

gerous. Immediately drink as much

water as possible and seek prompt

medical assistance.

.Rinse well with lots of water if the

compound comes into contact with

skin or eyes. If irritation persists,

seek prompt medical attention.

.Keep the repair compound out of

the reach of children.

.The emergency repair compound

may cause a malfunction of the tire

pressure sensors and cause the low

tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. Have the tire pressure sensor

replaced as soon as possible.

NOTE:

Do not remove any nails or screws that

have penetrated the tire when performing

repairs.

In case of emergency 6-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (322,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SCE0867

1. Open the lid of the air compressor and take

out the speed restriction sticker, then put it

in a location where the driver can see it while

driving.

CAUTION

Do not put the speed restriction label

on the steering wheel pad, the speed-

ometer or the warning light locations.

SCE0868

2. Take the hose *

1and the power plug *

out of the air compressor. Remove the cap

of the bottle holder from the air compressor.

SCE0869

3. Remove the cap from the tire sealant bottle,

and screw the bottle clockwise onto the

bottle holder. (Leave the bottle seal intact.

Screwing the bottle onto the bottle holder

will pierce the seal of the bottle.)

4. Remove the cap from the tire valve on the

flat tire.

6-10 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (323,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SCE0870

5. Remove the protective cap *

Aof the hose

and screw the hose securely onto the tire

valve. Make sure that the pressure release

valve *

Bis securely tightened. Make sure

that the air compressor switch is in the OFF

(*) position, and then insert its power plug

into the power outlet in the vehicle.

SCE0871

6. Pushtheignitionswitchtothe“ACC”

position. Then turn the compressor switch

to the ON (−) position and inflate the tire up

to the pressure that is specified on the tire

and loading information label affixed to the

driver’s side center pillar if possible, or to the

minimum of 180 kPa (26 psi). Turn the air

compressor off briefly in order to check the

tire pressure with the pressure gauge.

If the tire is inflated to higher than the

specified pressure, lower the tire pressure

by releasing air with the pressure release

valve.

NOTE:

The compressor tire pressure gauge

may show a pressure reading of 87 psi

(600 kPa) for about 30 seconds while

inflating the tire. The pressure gauge is

indicating the pressure inside the sea-

lant can. When the sealant has been

injected into the tire the pressure

gauge will drop and indicate actual tire

pressure.

WARNING

.To avoid serious personal injury

while using the emergency tire

puncture repair kit:

— Securely tighten the compressor

hose to the tire valve. Failure to

do so can cause the sealant to

spray into the air and get into

your eyes or on the skin.

.Do not stand directly beside the

damaged tire while it is being

inflated because of the risk of the

rupture. If there are any cracks or

bumps, turn the compressor off

immediately.

If the tire pressure does not increase to 180

kPa (26 psi) within 10 minutes, the tire

In case of emergency 6-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (324,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

may be seriously damaged and the tire

cannot be repaired with this tire repair

kit. Contact a NISSAN dealer.

7. When the tire pressure is at the specified

amount, turn the air compressor off. If the

pressure cannot be inflated to the specified

amount, the air compressor can be turned

off at the minimum of 180 kPa (26 psi).

Remove the power plug from the power

outlet and quickly remove the hose from the

tire valve. Attach the protective cap and

valve cap. Properly stow the emergency tire

puncture repair kit in the trunk.

CAUTION

To avoid serious personal injury when

stowing the emergency tire puncture

repair kit:

— Keep the sealant bottle screwed

into the compressor. Failure to do

so can cause the sealant to spray

into the air and get into your eyes or

on the skin.

8. Immediately drive the vehicle for 10 minutes

or 3 km (2 miles) at a speed of 80 km/h (50

MPH) or less.

9. After driving, make sure that the air com-

pressor switch is in the OFF position, then

screw the hose securely onto the tire valve.

Check the tire pressure with the pressure

gauge. The temporary repair is completed if

the tire pressure does not drop.

Make sure the pressure is adjusted to the

pressure that is specified on the tire and

loading information label before driving.

10. If the tire pressure drops, repeat the steps

from 5 to 9. If the pressure drops again or

under 130 kPa (19 psi), the tire cannot be

repaired with this tire repair kit. Contact

a NISSAN dealer.

The sealant bottle and hose can not be

reused to repair another punctured tire.

Contact a NISSAN dealer to purchase

replacements.

After repairing tire

See a NISSAN dealer for tire repair/replacement

as soon as possible.

WARNING

.After using Emergency Tire Sealant

to repair a minor tire puncture, do

not drive the vehicle at speeds

faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

.Immediately after using Emergency

Tire Sealant to repair a minor tire

puncture, take your vehicle to a

NISSAN dealer to inspect, and re-

pair or replace the tire. The Emer-

gency Tire Sealant cannot

permanently seal a punctured tire.

Continuing operation of the vehicle

without a permanent tire repair can

lead to a crash.

.If you used Emergency Tire Sealant

to repair a minor tire puncture, your

NISSAN dealer will also need to

replace the TPMS sensor in addition

to repairing or replacing the tire.

.NISSAN recommends using only

NISSAN Genuine Emergency Tire

Sealant provided with your vehicle.

Other tire sealants may damage the

valve stem seal which can cause the

tire to lose air pressure.

6-12 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (325,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be

followed.

WARNING

.If done incorrectly, jump starting

can lead to a battery explosion,

resulting in severe injury or death.

It could also damage your vehicle.

.Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away

from the battery.

.Do not allow battery fluid to come

into contact with eyes, skin, clothing

or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is

a corrosive sulphuric acid solution

which can cause severe burns. If the

fluid should come into contact with

anything, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

.Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

.The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

.Whenever working on or near a

battery, always wear suitable eye

protectors (for example, goggles or

industrial safety spectacles) and

remove rings, metal bands, or any

other jewelry. Do not lean over the

battery when jump starting.

.Do not attempt to jump start a

frozen battery. It could explode

and cause serious injury.

.Your vehicle has an automatic en-

gine cooling fan. It could come on at

any time. Keep hands and other

objects away from it.

JUMP STARTING

In case of emergency 6-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (326,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SCE0791

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause

personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle

A, position the two vehicles (*

Aand *

to bring their batteries into close proximity to

each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector lever

to the P (Park) position (Automatic transmis-

sion models). Move the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position (Manual transmission

models). Switch off all unnecessary elec-

trical systems (light, heater, air conditioner,

etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly

wrung out moist cloth *

Cto reduce

explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as

illustrated (*

1?*

2?*

3?*

4).

For models with a steering wheel lock

mechanism: If the battery is discon-

nected or discharged, the steering

wheel will lock and cannot be turned.

Supply power using jumper cables

before pushing the ignition switch and

disengaging the steering lock.

CAUTION

.Always connect positive (+) to posi-

tive (+) and negative (−) to body

ground (as illustrated) — not to the

battery.

.Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that clamps do

not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle *

and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle *

Aat about 2,000 rpm, and start

the engine of the vehicle being jump started

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, push the

ignition switch to the OFF position

and wait 10 seconds before trying

6-14 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (327,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

again.

7. After starting your engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable (*

4?*

3?*

2?*

1).

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover

the vent holes as it may be contaminated

with corrosive acid.

9. Put the battery cover on.

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION

.Automatic transmission models

cannot be push-started or tow-

started. Attempting to do so may

cause transmission damage.

.Three way catalyst equipped models

should not be started by pushing

since the three way catalyst may be

damaged.

.Never try to start the vehicle by

towing it; when the engine starts,

the forward surge could cause the

vehicle to collide with the tow

vehicle.

CAUTION

.Do not continue to drive if your

vehicle overheats. Doing so could

cause engine damage or a vehicle

fire.

.To avoid the danger of being

scalded, never remove the radiator

cap while the engine is still hot.

When the radiator cap is removed,

pressurized hot water will spurt out,

possibly causing serious injury.

.Do not open the hood if steam is

coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if

you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc., take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the selector

lever to the P (Park) position (Automatic

transmission models). Move the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position (Manual transmis-

sion models).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air conditioner

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (328,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

temperature control to maximum hot and fan

control to high speed.

3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing

a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a

fast idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the

temperature gauge indication returns to

normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. (If steam or

coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)

Do not open the hood further until no steam

or coolant can be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running.

The radiator hoses and radiator should not

leak water. If coolant is leaking or the cooling

fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or

the engine cooling fan. The engine

cooling fan can start at any time.

7. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the reservoir with the engine

running. Add coolant to the reservoir if

necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at

the nearest NISSAN dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in

Canada) and local regulations for towing must

be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could

damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are

available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service

operators are familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage to

your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you

have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is

advisable to have the service operator carefully

read the following precautions.

WARNING

.Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

.Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

.When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and drivetrain are in working condi-

tion. If any unit is damaged, dollies

must be used.

.Always attach safety chains before

towing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-16 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (329,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

For information about towing your vehicle behind

a recreational vehicle (RV), see “FLAT TOW-

ING” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

SCE0792

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN (except for NISMO models)

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as

illustrated.

CAUTION

.Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the

ground (forward or backward), as

this may cause serious and expen-

sive damage to the drivetrain. If it is

necessary to tow the vehicle with

the front wheels raised, always use

towing dollies under the rear

wheels.

.When towing rear wheel drive mod-

els with the front wheels on the

ground or on towing dollies: Push

the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. For

models with a steering wheel lock

mechanism: Never secure the steer-

ing wheel by selecting the LOCK

In case of emergency 6-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (330,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

position. This may damage the

steering lock mechanism.

.If you have to tow manual transmis-

sion models with the rear wheels on

the ground (if you do not use towing

dollies) or four wheels on the

ground:

— Push the ignition switch to the

ON position and turn off all

accessories.

— Always release the parking

brake.

— Move the transmission shift le-

ver to the N (Neutral) position.

— Observe the following restricted

towing speeds and distances for

manual transmission models

only:

.Rear wheels on the ground:

Speed: Below 50 MPH (80

km/h)

Distance: Less than 50 miles

(80 km)

.Four wheels on the ground:

Speed: Below 70 MPH (112

km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles

(800 km)

— If the speed or distance must

necessarily be greater, remove

the propeller shaft before tow-

ing to prevent damage to the

drivetrain.

6-18 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (331,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SCE0836

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN (NISMO models)

CAUTION

Do not tow NISMO models with any

wheel on the ground, or with the front

or rear wheels raised, because this may

cause damage to the front bumper with

an aerodynamic splitter, rear bumper

with an aerodynamic diffuser or ex-

haust pipes.

NISSAN recommends that you place the vehicle

on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

.Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

.Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode

and result in serious injury. Parts of

your vehicle could also overheat

and be damaged.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use a tow strap or other device designed

specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow

the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery

device.

In case of emergency 6-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (332,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SCE0793

1. Access the mounting hole for the recovery

hook.

Except for NISMO models: To remove the

cover *

A, first unhook the claws *

1using

a suitable tool wrapped in a cloth, and then

pull the lower side of the cover *

For NISMO models: When the front license

plate and bracket are installed, temporarily

remove them. (See “INSTALLING FRONT

LICENSE PLATE” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section for the in-

stallation procedures.) A screwdriver is

supplied with the jacking tools for removal.

2. Securely install the vehicle recovery hook *

(stored with jacking tools) as illustrated.

Attach the tow strap to the recovery hook.

Do not use the tie down hooks *

4for towing or

vehicle recovery.

Make sure that the hook is properly secured in

the original place after use.

Replace the recovery hook cover (except for

NISMO models) or the front license plate (for

NISMO models).

CAUTION

.Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to the vehicle recovery

hooks or main structural members

of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehi-

cle body will be damaged.

.Do not use the vehicle tie downs to

free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow,

mud, etc.

.Never tow a vehicle using the vehi-

cle tie downs or recovery hooks.

.Always pull the cable straight out

from the front of the vehicle. Never

pull on the vehicle at an angle.

.Pulling devices should be routed so

they do not touch any part of the

suspension, steering, brake or cool-

ing systems.

.Pulling devices such as ropes or

canvas straps are not recommended

for use in vehicle towing or recov-

ery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

.Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive) (automatic trans-

6-20 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (333,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

mission models) or 1st and R (Reverse)

(manual transmission models).

.Apply the accelerator as little as possi-

ble to maintain the rocking motion.

.Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive) (automatic transmission models)

or 1st and R (Reverse) (manual trans-

mission models).

.Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55

km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (334,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

MEMO

6-22 In case of emergency

Information Provided by:

Black plate (22,1)

7 Appearance and care

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Cleaning exterior ................................................ 7-2

Washing ...................................................... 7-2

Waxing ........................................................ 7-3

Removing spots............................................. 7-4

Underbody ................................................... 7-4

Glass .......................................................... 7-4

Wheels........................................................ 7-4

Chrome parts ................................................ 7-5

Tire dressing ................................................. 7-5

Cleaning interior ................................................ 7-5

Air fresheners................................................ 7-6

Floor mats .................................................... 7-6

Seat belts .................................................... 7-7

Corrosion protection ........................................... 7-7

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion...................................................... 7-7

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion...................................................... 7-7

To protect your vehicle from corrosion................. 7-8

Information Provided by:

Black plate (336,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

In order to maintain the appearance of your

vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surface, wash your vehicle

as soon as you can:

.after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

.after driving on coastal roads

.when contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs

get on the paint surface

.when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and

plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly

using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with

clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

.Do not use car washes that use acid

in the detergent. Some car washes,

especially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to func-

tion properly. Always check with

your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

.Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical

detergents, gasoline or solvents.

.Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body is

hot, as the surface may become

water-spotted.

.Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

.For Roadster models, observe the

following:

.Do not use an automatic car wash

or a high pressure car wash. The

soft top may be damaged.

.Avoid applying direct water pres-

sure,suchashighpressured

water from household hoses, on

the lining of the soft top and

vehicle body. Avoid applying con-

tinuous water on the parts around

the soft top and the windows.

These may cause water to leak

into the inside of your vehicle.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface

by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

Information Provided by:

Black plate (337,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Soft top care and cleaning (Roadster

models)

Proper care and handling should be observed to

maintain a good appearance of the soft top.

Improper care may cause the top cloth’s surface

to stiffen, stain, or mat. Follow the instructions

shown in this section.

It is not necessary to wash the soft top every

time you wash the vehicle body, but clean the

top regularly before it becomes quite dirty.

Leaving the soft top dirty or soiled for a long

period will cause deterioration to the quality of

the top material.

Remove dust or dirt on the soft top with a soft

brush or sponge, then rinse it with plenty of

clean water. When the top is quite dirty, wash

using a mild detergent, such as a general

cleaner especially made for a cloth top or a

general purpose dish-washing liquid, mixed with

clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. Rinse the top

again with plenty of clean water to remove all

traces of soap.

CAUTION

.Do not use strong household soap,

strong chemical detergents, gaso-

line or solvents.

.If glass cleaner gets on the soft top,

immediately wash it off with clean

water.

.Do not apply direct water pressure,

such as high pressured water from

household hoses, on the lining of

the soft top and vehicle body, as this

may cause water to leak into the

inside of your vehicle.

After cleaning, always be sure the top and its

storage are completely dry before opening the

top. Opening the top while it is wet or damp may

cause interior water damage, water stains or

mildew on the top.

SAI0046

NISMO models

CAUTION

Do not use an automatic car wash for

NISMO models. The rear spoiler may be

damaged.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing

is recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

reapplying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

Appearance and care 7-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (338,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

proper product.

.Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions supplied

with the wax.

.Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a

base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage

or staining. Special cleaning products are

available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive

accessory stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the

underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will

prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the

underbody and suspension. Before the winter

period and again in the spring, the underseal

must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust

film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass

to become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

.When cleaning the inside of the

windows, do not use sharp-edged

tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-

based disinfectant cleaners. They

could damage the electrical conduc-

tors, radio antenna elements or rear

window defroster elements.

.If glass cleaner gets on the soft top,

immediately wash it off with clean

water (Roadster models).

WHEELS

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to

maintain their appearance.

.Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

.Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

.NISSAN recommends that the road wheels

be waxed to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

CAUTION

Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

Aluminum alloy wheels

Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a

mild soap solution, especially during winter

months in areas where road salt is used. Salt

could discolor the wheels if not removed.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

.Do not use a cleaner that uses

strong acid or alkali contents to

clean the wheels.

.Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The

wheel temperature should be the

same as ambient temperature.

.Rinse the wheel to completely re-

move the cleaner within 15 minutes

7-4 Appearance and care

Information Provided by:

Black plate (339,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSING

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the

rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it

may react with the coating and form a com-

pound. This compound may come off the tire

while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

.Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an

oil-based tire dressing.

.Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire tread/

grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

.Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire tread/

grooves.

.Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dam-

pened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean

with a dry soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric

protectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifica-

tion sensor. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and

result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

.Never use benzine, thinner, or any

similar material.

.Small dirt particles can be abrasive

CLEANING INTERIOR

Appearance and care 7-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (340,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

and damaging to the leather sur-

faces and should be removed

promptly. Do not use saddle soap,

car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning

fluids, solvents, detergents or am-

monia-based cleaners as they may

damage the leather’s natural finish.

.Only use fabric protectors approved

by NISSAN.

.Do not use glass or plastic cleaner

on meter or gauge lens covers. It

may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could

affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air

freshener, take the following precautions:

.Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they contact

vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air

freshener in a location that allows it to hang

free and not contact an interior surface.

.Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions before using air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision or injury:

.NEVER place a floor mat on top of

another floor mat in the driver front

position.

.Use only genuine NISSAN floor

mats specifically designed for use

in your vehicle model. See your

NISSAN dealer for more informa-

tion.

.Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat posi-

tioning aid. See “Floor mat posi-

tioning aid” later in this section.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. Mats should be

maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if

they become excessively worn.

SAI0044

Floor mat positioning aid

This vehicle includes front floor mat brackets to

act as floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor

mats have been specially designed for your

vehicle model. The front floor mats have

grommet holes in them. To install, simply

position the mat by placing the floor mat bracket

hook through the floor mat grommet hole while

centering the mat in the floorwell.

Periodically check to make certain that the mats

are properly positioned.

7-6 Appearance and care

Information Provided by:

Black plate (341,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SAI0056

Bracket positions

The illustration shows the location of floor mat

brackets.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap

solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in

the shade before using them.

See “SEAT BELTS” in the “1. Safety — Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint system”

section.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI-

BUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION

.The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

.Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-

ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the

vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-

sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely

inside the vehicle, and should be removed for

drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing where

atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt

is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate the rate

of corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (342,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will

accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will

also accelerate the disintegration of paint

surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

.Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

.Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

.Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

.Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

.NEVER remove dirt, sand or other

debris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

.Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic

components inside the vehicle as

this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake

lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some areas,

consult a NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

Information Provided by:

Black plate (25,1)

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Maintenance requirement ..................................... 8-2

Scheduled maintenance................................... 8-2

General maintenance ...................................... 8-2

Where to go for service................................... 8-2

General maintenance .......................................... 8-2

Explanation of maintenance items....................... 8-2

Maintenance precautions ..................................... 8-5

Engine compartment check locations ...................... 8-7

VQ37VHR engine model.................................. 8-7

Engine cooling system......................................... 8-8

Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-9

Changing engine coolant ................................. 8-9

Engine oil......................................................... 8-9

Checking engine oil level ................................. 8-9

Changing engine oil and filter.......................... 8-10

Automatic transmission fluid................................ 8-12

Power steering fluid .......................................... 8-12

Brake and clutch fluid ....................................... 8-13

Brake fluid.................................................. 8-13

Clutch fluid................................................. 8-13

Window washer fluid ........................................ 8-14

Battery .......................................................... 8-14

Jump starting .............................................. 8-16

Variable voltage control system............................ 8-16

Drive belts...................................................... 8-17

Spark plugs .................................................... 8-17

Replacing spark plugs ................................... 8-18

Air cleaner...................................................... 8-18

Windshield wiper blades.................................... 8-19

Cleaning .................................................... 8-19

Replacing................................................... 8-19

Brakes........................................................... 8-20

Self-adjusting brakes .................................... 8-20

Brake pad wear warning ................................ 8-20

Fuses ............................................................ 8-21

Engine compartment ..................................... 8-21

Passenger compartment ................................ 8-22

Intelligent Key battery replacement ....................... 8-23

Lights............................................................ 8-25

Coupe....................................................... 8-25

Roadster .................................................... 8-26

Headlights.................................................. 8-27

Exterior and interior lights............................... 8-27

Wheels and tires.............................................. 8-29

Tire pressure............................................... 8-29

Tire labeling ................................................ 8-32

Types of tires .............................................. 8-34

Tire chains.................................................. 8-35

Changing wheels and tires ............................. 8-36

Emergency tire puncture repair kit

(if so equipped) ........................................... 8-38

Information Provided by:

Black plate (346,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have

minimum maintenance requirements with long

service intervals to save you both time and

money. However, some day-to-day and regular

maintenance is essential to maintain your

NISSAN’s fine mechanical condition, as well

as its emission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper

maintenance care. You are a vital link in the

maintenance chain.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

For your convenience, both required and op-

tional scheduled maintenance items are de-

scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and

Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that

guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is

performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal day-

to-day operation. They are essential for proper

vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to

perform these procedures regularly as pre-

scribed.

Performing general maintenance checks re-

quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few

general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a

NISSAN dealer.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

and are kept up to date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership information systems.

They are completely qualified to work on

NISSAN vehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to

meet the maintenance requirements on your

vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you

should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that

repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, see “MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS”

later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE

ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors

and the engine hood, operate properly. Also

ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate

hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if

necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch

keeps the hood from opening when the primary

latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (347,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,

and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires cannot be rotated, as the

front tires are a different size from the rear tires

and the direction of wheel rotation is fixed in

each tire.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If

necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,

including the spare, to the pressure specified.

Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive

wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap

when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the

vehicle should pull to either side while driving on

a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven

or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for

wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal

highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer

to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the

NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a

damaged windshield repaired by a qualified

repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks

or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when

performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning

the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the pedal

does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep

the floor mat away from the pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mechan-

ism: On a fairly steep hill, check that your

vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in

the P (Park) position without applying any

brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to

stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep

the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the

parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs

adjusted, see a NISSAN dealer.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjuster

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt

webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure

they operate smoothly and that all latches lock

securely in every position. Check that the head

restraints move up and down smoothly and that

the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all

latched positions.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive free play,

hard steering or strange noises.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (348,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that

all warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and

in sufficient quantity when operating the heater

or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe condition require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Brake and clutch fluid levels*: Make sure

that the brake and clutch fluid levels are

between the MAX and MIN lines on the

reservoirs.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is

frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the

engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. (See

“PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,

oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected

immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check

the level with the engine off. Check the lines for

proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, other-

wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and around the exhaust system. At the end

of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-

late. For additional information, see “CLEANING

EXTERIOR” in the “7. Appearance and care”

section.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (349,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

When performing any inspection or mainte-

nance work on your vehicle, always take care

to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or

damage to the vehicle. The following are general

precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

.Park the vehicle on a level surface,

apply the parking brake securely

and block the wheels to prevent

the vehicle from moving. For man-

ual transmission models, move the

shift lever to N (Neutral). For auto-

matic transmission models, move

the selector lever to P (Park).

.Be sure the ignition switch is in the

OFF or LOCK position when per-

forming any parts replacement or

repairs.

.Never connect or disconnect the

battery or any transistorized com-

ponent while the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

.Never leave the engine or automatic

transmission related component

harnesses disconnected while the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

.If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, clothing,

hair and tools away from moving

fans, belts and any other moving

parts.

.It is advisable to secure or remove

any loose clothing and remove any

jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.

before working on your vehicle.

.Always wear eye protection when-

ever you work on your vehicle.

.If you must run the engine in an

enclosed space such as a garage, be

sure there is proper ventilation for

exhaust gases to escape.

.Never get under the vehicle while it

is supported only by a jack. If it is

necessary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

.Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from fuel tank and the

battery.

.Your vehicle is equipped with an

automatic engine cooling fan. It may

come on at any time without warn-

ing, even if the ignition key is in the

OFF position and the engine is not

running. To avoid injury, always

disconnect the negative battery

cable before working near the fan.

.The fuel filter or fuel lines should be

serviced by a NISSAN dealer be-

cause the fuel lines are under high

pressure even when the engine is

off.

CAUTION

.Do not work under the hood while

the engine is hot. Turn the engine

off and wait until it cools down.

.Avoid direct contact with used en-

gine oil and coolant. Improperly

disposed engine oil, coolant, and/

or other vehicle fluids can damage

the environment. Always conform to

local regulations for disposal of

vehicle fluid.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also

available. (See “OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION” in the “9.

Technical and consumer information” section.)

Youshouldbeawarethatincompleteor

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (350,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and could

affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, we recommend that

it be done by a NISSAN dealer.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (351,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SSI0510

VQ37VHR ENGINE MODEL

1. Fuse/fusible link holder

2. Battery

3. Radiator filler cap

4. Engine oil dipstick

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Transmission mod-

els)

8. Power steering fluid reservoir

9. Window washer fluid reservoir

10 Air cleaner

11. Drive belt location

12. Engine coolant reservoir

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (352,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and

50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze

and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution

contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional

engine cooling system additives are not neces-

sary.

WARNING

.Never remove the radiator or cool-

ant reservoir cap when the engine is

hot. Wait until the engine and

radiator cool down. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure

fluid escaping from the radiator.

See precautions in “IF YOUR VEHI-

CLE OVERHEATS” in the “6. In case

of emergency” section of this man-

ual.

.The radiator is equipped with a

pressure type radiator cap. To pre-

vent engine damage, use only a

genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

.When adding or replacing coolant,

be sure to use only Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide

antifreeze protection to −348F

(−378C). If additional freeze protec-

tion is needed due to weather where

you operate your vehicle, add Gen-

uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) concentrate follow-

ing the directions on the container.

If an equivalent coolant other than

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-

freeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

low the coolant manufacturer’s

instructions to maintain minimum

antifreeze protection to −348F

(−378C). The use of other types of

coolant solutions other than Genu-

ine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) or equivalent may

damage the engine cooling system.

.The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000

km) or 7 years. Mixing any other

type of coolant other than Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (blue), including Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-

ant (green), or the use of non-

distilled water will reduce the life

expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. Refer to the Nissan Service and

Maintenance Guide for more de-

tails.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (353,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI2043

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

MIN *

2, open the reservoir cap and add

coolant up to the MAX *

1level. If the reservoir

is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient

coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with

coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to

the reservoir up to the MAX level *

Tighten the cap securely after adding engine

coolant.

If the cooling system requires coolant

frequently, have it checked by a NISSAN

dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Major cooling system repairs should be per-

formed by a NISSAN dealer. The service

procedures can be found in the appropriate

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

.To avoid the danger of being

scalded, never change the coolant

when the engine is hot.

.Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure

fluid escaping from the radiator.

.Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made,

wash thoroughly with soap or hand

cleaner as soon as possible.

.Keep coolant out of reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

SDI2348

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15

minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be within the range *

1. If the

oil level is below *

2, remove the oil filler cap

ENGINE OIL

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (354,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not overfill *

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the break-

in period, depending on the severity of

operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the

engine, and such damage is not cov-

ered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15

minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using a

suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.

.Place the safety jack stands under the

vehicle jack-up points.

.A suitable adapter should be attached to

the jack stand saddle.

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

a. Remove the small plastic clips at the

center of the undercover.

b. Then remove the bolts that hold the

undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and sup-

port points are used to avoid vehicle

damage.

SDI2335

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.

3. Remove the drain plug *

1with a wrench

and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the

engine oil is hot.

.Waste oil must be disposed of

properly.

.Check your local regulations.

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (355,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

(Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the engine

oil filter change is needed.)

4. Loosen the oil filter *

2with an oil filter

wrench. Remove the oil filter by turning it by

hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface

with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old rubber

gasket remaining on the mounting sur-

face of the engine. Failure to do so

could lead to engine damage.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight

resistance is felt, then tighten additionally

more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb

(14.7 to 20.5 N·m)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a

new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug

with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 N·m)

Do not use excessive force.

9. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler

cap securely.

See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical

and consumer information” section for drain

and refill capacity. The drain and refill

capacity depends on the oil temperature

and drain time. Use these specifications for

reference only. Always use the dipstick to

determine the proper amount of oil in the

engine.

10. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the drain plug and the oil filter.

Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than 15

minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.

Add engine oil if necessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into position as

the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plastic clip

out.

b. Hold the engine undercover into posi-

tion.

c. Insert the clip through the undercover

into the hole in the frame, then push the

center of the clip in to lock the clip in

place.

d. Install the bolts that hold the undercover

in place. Be careful not to strip the bolts

or over-tighten them.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.

WARNING

.Prolonged and repeated contact

with used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

.Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made,

wash thoroughly with soap or hand

cleaner as soon as possible.

.Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (356,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

When checking or replacement is required, we

recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

CAUTION

.Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic S

ATF. Do not mix with other fluids.

.Using automatic transmission fluid

other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S

ATF will cause deterioration in dri-

veability and automatic transmis-

sion durability, and may damage

the automatic transmission, which

is not covered by the NISSAN new

vehicle limited warranty.

SDI1765A

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked with the

engine off using the HOT range (*

1:HOT

MAX., *

2: HOT MIN.) at fluid temperatures of

122 to 1768F (50 to 808C) or using the COLD

range (*

3: COLD MAX., *

4: COLD MIN.) at

fluid temperatures of 32 to 868F(0to308C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap

and fill through the opening.

CAUTION

.Do not overfill.

.Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or

equivalent.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (357,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

For further brake and clutch fluid information,

see “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

.Use only new fluid from a sealed

container. Old, inferior or contami-

nated fluid may damage the brake

and clutch system.

.Be sure to clean the filler cap before

removing.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If

fluid is spilled, wash the surface with

water.

SDI2025A

BRAKE FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is

below the MIN line *

1or the brake warning

light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super

Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3

fluid up to the MAX line *

2. If fluid must be

added frequently, the system should be checked

by a NISSAN dealer.

SDI1906A

CLUTCH FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid

level is below the MIN line *

1, add Genuine

NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or

equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line *

If fluid must be added frequently, the system

should be checked by a NISSAN dealer.

BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (358,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI2349

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally. Add window washer fluid when the low

window washer fluid warning light comes on.

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the

cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window

washer fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the water for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of

window washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

.Do not substitute engine anti-freeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the

paint.

.Do not fill the window washer

reservoir tank with washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based washer fluid

concentrates may permanently stain

the grille if spilled while filling the

window washer reservoir tank.

.Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s

recommended levels before pouring

the fluid into the window washer

reservoir tank. Do not use the

window washer reservoir tank to

mix the washer fluid concentrate

and water.

.Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

.Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

.If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (−) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharging it.

CAUTION

When the battery cable is removed from

the battery terminal, do not close either

of front doors. The automatic window

adjusting function will not work, and

the side roof panel may be damaged.

To disconnect the negative (−) battery terminal,

perform the procedure in the following order.

Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel

may contact and be damaged.

1. Close the windows.

2. Open the hood.

3. Close and lock all the doors.

4. Disconnect the negative (−) battery terminal.

5. Securely close the hood.

To connect the negative (−) battery terminal,

WINDOW WASHER FLUID BATTERY

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (359,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

perform the procedure in the following order.

Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel

may contact and be damaged.

1. Unlock and open the driver side door. Do

not close the door.

2. Open the hood.

3. Connect the negative (−) battery terminal.

Then close the hood.

4. Fully open the driver side door window.

5. Close the driver side door and the window.

WARNING

.Do not expose the battery to flames

or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas

generated by the battery is explo-

sive. Do not allow battery fluid to

contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or

painted surfaces. After touching a

battery or battery cap, do not touch

or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash

your hands. If the acid contacts your

eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15

minutes and seek medical attention.

.Do not operate the vehicle if the

fluid in the battery is low. Low

battery fluid can cause a higher load

on the battery which can generate

heat, reduce battery life, and in

some cases lead to an explosion.

.When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

.Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

.Keep the battery out of the reach of

children. DI0137MF

Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove the

battery cover if it is necessary). It should be

between the UPPER LEVEL *

1and LOWER

LEVEL *

2lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level to the indicator in each

filler opening. Do not overfill.

1. Remove the cell plugs *

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (360,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI1480E

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL

1line.

If the side of the battery is not clear, check

the distilled water level by looking directly

above the cell; the condition *

Aindicates

OK and the conditions *

Bneeds more to

be added.

3. Tighten cell plugs *

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “JUMP

STARTING” in the “6. In case of emergency”

section. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced.

Contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

.Do not ground accessories directly

to the battery terminal. Doing so will

bypass the variable voltage control

system and the vehicle battery may

not charge completely.

.Use electrical accessories with the

engine running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system measures

the amount of electrical discharge from the

battery and controls voltage generated by the

generator.

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (361,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI2119

VQ37VHR engine

1. Power steering fluid pump

2. Alternator

3. Crankshaft pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor

5. Drive belt auto-tensioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position before servicing drive

belts. The engine could rotate unex-

pectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is

in poor condition or loose, have it replaced

or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belt condition checked regularly. WARNING

Be sure the engine and the ignition

switch are off and that the parking

brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to

remove the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (362,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI2020

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer

for servicing.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped

spark plugs as frequently as the conventional

type spark plugs since they will last much longer.

Follow the maintenance schedule in “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”, but do not

reuse them by cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with recom-

mended or equivalent ones.

SDI2350

Remove the retainers *

1as illustrated and pull

out the filter element *

The filter element should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

intervals. See “NISSAN Service and Mainte-

nance Guide” for maintenance intervals. When

replacing the filter, wipe the inside of the air

cleaner housing and the cover with a damp

cloth.

WARNING

.Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops

flame if the engine backfires. If it

is not there, and the engine back-

fires, you could be burned. Do not

drive with the air cleaner removed,

and be careful when working on the

engine with the air cleaner removed.

.Never pour fuel into the throttle

body or attempt to start the engine

with the air cleaner removed. Doing

so could result in serious injury.

AIR CLEANER

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (363,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form when

rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent.

Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your

windshield is still not clear after cleaning the

blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

SDI2359

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release tab *

A, and then move the

wiper blade down the wiper arm *

1while

pushing the release tab to remove.

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until a click sounds.

4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in

the groove.

CAUTION

.After wiper blade replacement, re-

turn the wiper arm to its original

position;

otherwise it may be damaged when

the hood is opened.

.Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arm may be

damaged from wind pressure.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (364,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI2362

Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle *

This may cause improper windshield washer

operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any

objects with a needle or small pin *

B.Be

careful not to damage the nozzle.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the

brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the

brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake

system check if the brake pedal height

does not return to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will

first occur only when the brake pedal is

depressed. After more wear of the brake pad

the sound will always be heard even if the brake

pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear warning

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise

may be heard. Occasional brake noise during

light to moderate stops is normal and does not

affect the function or performance of the brake

system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information, see the

maintenance log section of your “NISSAN

Service and Maintenance Guide”.

BRAKES

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (365,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI1479A

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the

OFF or LOCK position and the headlight

switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the engine hood and remove the

cover on the battery and the fuse/fusible link

holder.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller located

in the passenger compartment fuse box.

SDI1754

5. If the fuse is open *

A, replace it with a new

fuse *

B. Spare fuses are stored in the

passenger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

FUSES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (366,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2011/ 1/ 21

SDI2361

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed to the

OFF or LOCK position and the headlight

switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller *

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.

Spare fuses are stored in the fuse box.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by a NISSAN

dealer.

SDI2704

Extended storage switch (if so equipped)

To reduce battery drain, the extended storage

switch comes from the factory switched off.

Prior to delivery of your vehicle, the switch is

pushed in (switched on) and should always

remain on.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

remove the extended storage switch and check

for an open fuse.

NOTE:

If the extended storage switch malfunc-

tions, or if the fuse is open, it is not

necessary to replace the switch. In this

case, remove the extended storage switch

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (367,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2011/ 1/ 21

and replace it with a new fuse of the same

rating.

How to remove the extended storage

switch:

1. To remove the extended storage switch, be

sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF

position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs *

1found on each

side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the

fuse box *

SDI2451

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to

swallow the battery and removed parts.

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the

corner and twist it to separate the upper part

from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect

the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery:

CR2032 or equivalent

.Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

.Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

.Make sure that the +side faces the

bottom case.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

REPLACEMENT

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (368,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI2452

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts

1, and then push them together until it is

securely closed *

5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance

for replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible

for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation subject to the

following two conditions: (1) this device

may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference, in-

cluding interference that may cause un-

desired operation of the device.

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (369,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI2351

COUPE

1. Headlight (high- and low-beam)

2. Map light

3. Front park light

4. Front side marker light

5. Front turn signal light

6. Side turn signal light

7. High-mounted stop light

8. Cargo light

9. Rear combination light (rear turn signal/tail/stop/

side marker/back-up light)

10. License plate light

11. Rear fog light (if so equipped)

LIGHTS

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (370,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI2448

ROADSTER

1. Headlight (high- and low-beam)

2. Map light

3. Front park light

4. Front side marker light

5. Front turn signal light

6. Side turn signal light

7. High-mounted stop light

8. Trunk light

9. Cargo area courtesy light

10. Rear combination light (rear turn signal/tail/stop/

side marker/back-up light)

11. License plate light

12. Rear fog light (if so equipped)

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (371,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

HEADLIGHTS

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is

not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Replacing

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to modify

or disassemble. Always have your xe-

non headlights replaced at a NISSAN

dealer. For additional information, see

“HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

Use the same number and wattage shown in the

following chart as originally installed.

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight*

High/Low beams (Xenon) 35 D2S

Front turn signal light* 28/8 7444NA

Front park light* 5 W5W

Front side marker light* LED —

Side turn signal light* LED —

Rear combination light*

back-up 16 W16W

turn signal 21 WY21W

stop/tail/side marker LED —

Rear fog light (if so equipped)* 21 T20

License plate light* 5 T10

Map light 8 —

Vanity mirror light 2 —

Cargo area courtesy light (Roadster)* 5 —

Cargo light (Coupe)* 3.4 —

Trunk light (Roadster)* 3.4 —

High-mounted stop light* LED —

*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

Information Provided by:

Black plate (372,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens

and/or cover.

SDI1679

SDI2352

Map light

SDI1839

Vanity mirror light

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (373,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

If you have a flat tire, see “FLAT TIRE” in

the “6. In case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or

more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop

in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning

light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”

section, “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-

TEM (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section and “TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure of the tires (including

the spare) often and always prior to long

distance trips. The recommended tire

pressure specifications are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label under

the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire

and Loading Information label is affixed to

the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures

should be checked regularly because:

.Most tires naturally lose air over time.

.Tires can lose air suddenly when driven

over potholes or other objects or if the

vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect tire

life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

.Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

.The Gross Vehicle Weight rating

(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.

S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. The vehi-

cle weight capacity is indicated

on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label. Do not load your

vehicle beyond this capacity.

Overloading your vehicle may

result in reduced tire life, unsafe

operating conditions due to pre-

mature tire failure, or unfavor-

able handling characteristics

and could also lead to a serious

accident. Loading beyond the

specified capacity may also re-

sult in failure of other vehicle

components.

.Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

.For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-

da) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

Information Provided by:

Black plate (374,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI2462

Tire and Loading Information label

1Seating capacity: The maximum num-

ber of occupants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

2Vehicle load limit: See “VEHICLE

LOADING INFORMATION” in the “9.

Technical and consumer information”

section.

3Original size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The

recommended cold tire inflation is set

by the manufacturer to provide the

best balance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

5Tire size — see “TIRE LABELING”

later in this section.

6Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped)

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (375,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI1949

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto

the valve stem. Do not press too hard or

force the valve stem sideways, or air will

escape. If the hissing sound of air

escaping from the tire is heard while

checking the pressure, reposition the

gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare it to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of the

valve stem briefly with the tip of the

gauge stem to release pressure. Re-

check the pressure and add or release

air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Coupe models (except for NISMO models):

SIZE

COLD TIRE

INFLATION

PRES-

SURE

FRONT

ORIGINAL

TIRE

225/50R18

95W

240 kPa,

35 PSI

245/40R19

94W

240 kPa,

35 PSI

REAR

ORIGINAL

TIRE

245/45R18

96W

240 kPa,

35 PSI

275/35R19

96W

240 kPa,

35 PSI

SPARE

TIRE

T145/80-

D17

420 kPa,

60 PSI

T145/70-

R18

420 kPa,

60 PSI

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

Information Provided by:

Black plate (376,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Roadster models (except for NISMO mod-

els):

SIZE

COLD TIRE

INFLATION

PRES-

SURE

FRONT

ORIGINAL

TIRE

225/50R18

95W

260 kPa,

38 PSI

245/40R19

94W

240 kPa,

35 PSI

REAR

ORIGINAL

TIRE

245/45R18

96W

260 kPa,

38 PSI

275/35R19

96W

240 kPa,

35 PSI

SPARE

TIRE

T145/80-

D17

420 kPa,

60 PSI

T145/70-

R18

420 kPa,

60 PSI

NISMO models:

SIZE

COLD TIRE

INFLATION

PRES-

SURE

FRONT

ORIGINAL

TIRE

245/40R19

98Y

240 kPa,

35 PSI

REAR

ORIGINAL

TIRE

285/35R19

99Y

240 kPa,

35 PSI

SPARE

TIRE T145/70R18 420 kPa,

60 PSI

SDI1575

Example

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the side-

wall of all tires. This information identifies

and describes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides the tire

identification number (TIN) for safety stan-

dard certification. The TIN can be used to

identify the tire in case of a recall.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (377,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

SDI1606

Example

1Tire size (example: P215/60R16

94H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed

for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires

have this information.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This number

gives the width in millimeters of the tire

from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (60): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (16): This number is

the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight each

tire can support. You may not find this

information on all tires because it is not

required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

SDI1607

Example

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department

of Transportation”. The symbol can be

placed above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi-

cation mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-

tional)

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

Information Provided by:

Black plate (378,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture

6. Four numbers represent the week and

year the tire was built. For example, the

numbers 3103 means the 31st week of

2003. If these numbers are missing,

then look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

4Maximum permissible inflation pres-

sure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an

inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire

has radial structure.

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model

name molding that is higher or deeper than

the same molding on the other sidewall of

the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall

of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular

side that must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

.When changing or replacing tires,

be sure all four tires are of the same

type (Example: Summer, All Season

or Snow) and construction. A

NISSAN dealer may be able to help

you with information about tire type,

size, speed rating and availability.

.Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.For additional information regard-

ing tires, refer to “Important Tire

Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (379,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

models to provide good performance all year,

including snowy and icy road conditions. All

Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON

and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire

sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction

than All Season tires and may be more appro-

priate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance on dry

roads. Summer tire performance is substantially

reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not

have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire

sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or

icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed

ratings than factory equipped tires and may not

match the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the

tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

brand, construction and tread pattern on all four

wheels, and the same sizes as the original tires.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S. states

and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.

Check local, state and provincial laws before

installing studded tires. Skid and traction cap-

abilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry

surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-

studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be in-

stalled on 19-inch size tires. Doing so

will cause damage to the vehicle. If you

plan to use tire chains/cables, you

should install 18-inch size tires on your

vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according

to location. Check the local laws before instal-

ling tire chains. When installing tire chains, make

sure they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

Class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are

designed to meet the SAE standard minimum

clearances between the tire and the closest

vehicle suspension or body component required

to accommodate the use of a winter traction

device (tire chains or cables). The minimum

clearances are determined using the factory

equipped tire size. Other types may damage

your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when re-

commended by the tire chain manufacturer to

ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire

chain must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage to the

fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully

loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In

addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,

your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle

handling and performance may be adversely

affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

tire chains in such conditions can cause damage

to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

Information Provided by:

Black plate (380,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

Tires cannot be rotated on this vehicle

because the front tires are a different size

than the rear tires.

A pin is on the front brake rotor to prevent

the rear wheels from being installed in

place of the front wheels. The spare tire

can be installed in place of the front and

rear wheels. When installing the spare tire

in the front wheel, the hole in the spare tire

wheel must be aligned with the pin on the

brake rotor.

WARNING

.Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

.For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-

da) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

SDI1663

1. Wear indicator

2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

.Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bul-

ging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

.The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

.Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician, because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

.Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious perso-

nal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, contact a

NISSAN dealer.

.For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-

da) in the Warranty Information

Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. (See “SPECIFICA-

TIONS” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section for recommended types

and sizes of tires and wheels.)

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (381,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.The use of tires other than those

recommended or the mixed use of

tires of different brands, construc-

tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or

tread patterns can adversely affect

the ride, braking, handling, ground

clearance, body-to-tire clearance,

tire chain clearance, speedometer

calibration, headlight aim and bum-

per height. Some of these effects

may lead to accidents and could

result in serious personal injury.

.If the wheels are changed for any

reason, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear,

degrade vehicle handling character-

istics and/or interference with the

brake discs/drums. Such interfer-

ence can lead to decreased braking

efficiency and/or early brake pad/

shoe wear. See “WHEELS AND

TIRES” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section of

this manual for wheel off-set dimen-

sions.

.When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will

remain on after 1 minute. Contact

your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/

or system resetting.

.Replacing tires with those not ori-

ginally specified by NISSAN could

affect the proper operation of the

TPMS.

.Do not install a deformed wheel or

tire even if it has been repaired.

Such wheels or tires could have

structural damage and could fail

without warning.

.The use of retread tire is not re-

commended.

.For additional information regard-

ing tires, refer to “Important Tire

Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the

Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can

get out of balance. Therefore, they should be

balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires, refer

to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the

NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

See “CLEANING EXTERIOR” in the “7. Ap-

pearance and care” section for details about

care of the wheels.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY (T-

type) spare tire) (if so equipped)

Observe the following precautions if the T-type

spare tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle

could be damaged or involved in an accident.

WARNING

.The T-type spare tire should be used

for emergency use. It should be

replaced with the standard tire at

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

Information Provided by:

Black plate (382,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

the first opportunity to avoid possi-

ble tire or differential damage.

.Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-

ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-

stalled. Avoid sharp turns and

abrupt braking while driving.

.Periodically check spare tire infla-

tion pressure. Always keep the

pressure of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa,

4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure

of the full size spare tire (if so

equipped) at the recommended

pressure for standard tires, as in-

dicated on the Tire and Loading

Information label. For Tire and

Loading Information label location,

see “Tire and Loading Information

label” in the index of this manual.

.With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire installed do not drive your

vehicle at speeds faster than 50

MPH (80 km/h).

.When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on

the front wheels and original tire

used on the rear wheels (drive

wheels). Use tire chains only on the

two rear original tires.

.Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster

rate than the standard tire. Replace

the spare tire as soon as the tread

wear indicators appear.

.Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

.Do not use more than one spare tire

at the same time.

CAUTION

.Do not use tire chains on a TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire

chains will not fit properly and may

cause damage to the vehicle.

.Because the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire is smaller than the

original tire, ground clearance is

reduced. To avoid damage to the

vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.

Also do not drive the vehicle

through an automatic car wash

since it may get caught.

EMERGENCY TIRE PUNCTURE RE-

PAIR KIT (if so equipped)

The emergency tire puncture repair kit (Emer-

gency Tire Sealant) is supplied with the vehicle

instead of a spare tire. It can be used to

temporarily repair minor tire punctures.

If possible, have the vehicle towed to a facility

that can repair or replace the flat tire. Using the

emergency tire puncture repair kit may cause a

malfunction of the tire pressure sensor and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate.

See “FLAT TIRE” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section for more details.

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (383,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

MEMO

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

Information Provided by:

Black plate (384,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

MEMO

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Information Provided by:

Black plate (28,1)

9 Technical and consumer information

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ............ 9-2

Fuel recommendation ...................................... 9-4

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation............... 9-6

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant

recommendations........................................... 9-7

Specifications.................................................... 9-8

Engine......................................................... 9-8

Wheels and tires............................................ 9-9

Dimensions................................................. 9-10

When traveling or registering your vehicle in

another country................................................ 9-11

Vehicle identification ......................................... 9-11

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ........... 9-11

Vehicle identification number (chassis number).... 9-11

Engine serial number .................................... 9-12

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............. 9-12

Emission control information label .................... 9-12

Tire and loading information label..................... 9-13

Air conditioner specification label ..................... 9-13

Installing front license plate ................................ 9-14

Except for NISMO models.............................. 9-14

For NISMO models ...................................... 9-16

Removing air deflectors

(except for NISMO models) ................................ 9-17

Vehicle loading information ................................. 9-18

Terms ........................................................ 9-18

Vehicle load capacity .................................... 9-19

Loading tips................................................ 9-20

Measurement of weights ................................ 9-20

Towing a trailer ................................................ 9-20

Flat towing ..................................................... 9-21

Automatic transmission.................................. 9-21

Manual Transmission ..................................... 9-21

Uniform tire quality grading................................. 9-21

Treadwear .................................................. 9-21

Traction AA, A, B and C ................................ 9-21

Temperature A, B and C ................................ 9-22

Emission control system warranty......................... 9-22

Reporting safety defects .................................... 9-23

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test...... 9-24

Event Data Recorders (EDR) .............................. 9-24

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information ... 9-25

In the event of a collision ............................... 9-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (386,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended specifications

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 19 gal 15-7/8 gal 71.9 See “FUEL RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.

Engine oil*1

Drain and refill

With oil filter change 5-1/8 qt 4-3/8 qt 4.9 .Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2, *3

.Viscosity SAE 5W-30*2, *3

Without oil filter change 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6

Cooling system

Automatic transmission model With reservoir 9 qt 7-1/2 qt 8.5

Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent

Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8

Manual transmission model With reservoir 9-1/8 qt 7-5/8 qt 8.6

Reservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8

Automatic transmission fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*4

Manual transmission gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)

HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85

Differential gear oil — — —

For AT models:

Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Synthetic 75W-90 or API GL-5 synthetic

gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-90*5

For MT models:

Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5,

Viscosity SAE 80W-90*9

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*6

Brake and clutch fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*7 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*8

Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN UV Luminous Oil Type S or exact equivalent

Window washer fluid 4-3/4 4 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or

equivalent

*1: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.

*2: For additional information, see “ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATION” later in this section.

*3: NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil, which is available at a NISSAN dealer.

*4: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic

transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

*5: See a NISSAN dealer for service for synthetic oil.

*6: DEXRON

VI type ATF may also be used.

*7: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (387,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

*8: For additional information, see “VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.

*9: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 328F(08C).

Technical and consumer information 9-3

Information Provided by:

Black plate (388,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

VQ37VHR engine

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

number (Research octane number 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded

regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91) may be

temporarily used, but only under the following

precautions:

.Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as

possible.

.Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-

eration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of unleaded premium

gasoline is recommended.

CAUTION

.Using a fuel other than that speci-

fied could adversely affect the emis-

sion control system, and may also

affect warranty coverage.

.Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because

this will damage the three-way cat-

alyst.

.Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run

on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can

damage the fuel system compo-

nents and is not covered by the

NISSAN vehicle limited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) speci-

fications where it is available. Many of the

automobile manufacturers developed this spe-

cification to improve emission system and

vehicle performance. Ask your service station

manager if the gasoline meets the World-Wide

Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-

mulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-

nol with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels

of which the oxygenate content and the fuel

compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily

determined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

.The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

.If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a

methanol blend, is used, it should

contain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

.If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not

available to ensure that all methanol

blends are suitable for use in NISSAN

9-4 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (389,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

vehicles.

If any undesirable driveability problems such as

engine stalling or hard hot starting are experi-

enced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, im-

mediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a

fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during

refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-

ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square,

orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (Example: fuel injector

cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit

removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum,

varnish or deposit removal may contain active

solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful

to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended above can

cause persistent, heavy spark knock.

(Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.)

If severe, this can lead to engine damage.

If you detect a persistent heavy spark

knock even when using gasoline of the

stated octane rating, or if you hear steady

spark knock while holding a steady speed

on level roads, have a NISSAN dealer

correct the condition. Failure to correct

the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for

which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking,

after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause

excessive fuel consumption or damage to the

engine. If any of the above symptoms are

encountered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer or other competent service

facility.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is no

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

Information Provided by:

Black plate (390,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

STI0505

1. API certification mark

2. API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-

COMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance, see

“CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/

LUBRICANTS” earlier in this section. NISSAN

recommends the use of an energy conserving oil

in order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API

certification mark on the front of the container.

Oils which do not have the specified quality

label should not be used as they could cause

engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used and

maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has

been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

that the engine oil viscosity be selected based

on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be

operated before the next oil change. Choosing

an oil viscosity other than that recommended

could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality

genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use

the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the

reason described in change intervals.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the

specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals

longer than recommended could reduce engine

life. Damage to engines caused by improper

maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter

quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the

new NISSAN vehicle limited warranties.

Your engine was filled with a high quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under

the following conditions may require more

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (391,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

frequent oil and filter changes.

.repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures,

.driving in dusty conditions,

.extensive idling,

.stop and go “rush hour” traffic,

Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance

Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE-

FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-

COMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the

lubricant, NISSAN UV Luminous Oil Type

S or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or

lubricant will cause severe damage to

the air conditioning system and will

require the replacement of all air con-

ditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect

the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental

regulations require the recovery and recycling of

any refrigerant during automotive air condition-

ing system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the

trained technicians and equipment needed to

recover and recycle your air conditioning system

refrigerant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your

air conditioning system.

Technical and consumer information 9-7

Information Provided by:

Black plate (392,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

ENGINE

Model VQ37VHR

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 608

Bore 6Stroke in (mm) 3.760 63.385 (95.5 686.0)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 225.54 (3,696)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6

Idle speed rpm No adjustment is necessary.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

Spark plug Standard FXE24HR-11

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

STI0425

VQ37VHR engine

SPECIFICATIONS

9-8 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (393,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in (mm)

Conventional

Front: 18 68J 1.69 (43)

Rear: 18 69J 0.59 (15)

Front: 19 69J 1.85 (47)

Rear: 19 610J 1.18 (30)

NISMO models Front: 19 69.5J 1.57 (40)

Rear: 19 610.5J 0.90 (23)

Spare 17 64T*1 1.18 (30)

18 64T*1 0 (0)

*1: if so equipped

Technical and consumer information 9-9

Information Provided by:

Black plate (394,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Tire

Type Size Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]

Conventional

Front: 225/50R18 35 (240)*2

Rear: 245/45R18 38 (260)*3

Front: 245/40R19 35 (240)

Rear: 275/35R19

NISMO models Front: 245/40R19 35 (240)

Rear: 285/35R19

Spare (T-type)

T145/80D17*1 60 (420)

T145/70R18*1

—*3, *4

*1: if so equipped

*2: Coupe models

*3: Roadster models

*4: The emergency tire puncture repair kit is supplied.

DIMENSIONS

in (mm)

Overall length 167.2 (4,246)*1

167.4 (4,253)*2

173.4 (4,405)*1, *3

173.5 (4,407)*2, *3

Overall width 72.6 (1,845)

Overall height 51.8 (1,315)

52.2 (1,325)*4

Front tread 61.0 (1,550)*5

60.6 (1,540)*6

61.2 (1,555)*6, *3

Rear tread 62.8 (1,595)*5

61.6 (1,565)*6

62.2 (1,580)*6, *3

Wheelbase 100.4 (2,550)

*1: Without front license plate bracket

*2: With front license plate bracket

*3: NISMO models

*4: Roadster models

*5: 18-inch wheel models

*6: 19-inch wheel models

9-10 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (395,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

If you plan to travel in another country, you

should first find out if the fuel available is suitable

for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating may

cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline.

Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas

where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards vary

according to the country, state, province or

district; therefore, vehicle specifications may

differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into

another country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsi-

bility of the user. NISSAN is not

responsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

STI0612

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate is at-

tached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

STI0613

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown in the engine

compartment.

WHEN TRAVELING OR

REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN

ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Technical and consumer information 9-11

Information Provided by:

Black plate (396,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

STI0509

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

STI0616

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification

label is affixed as shown. This label contains

valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross

Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of

manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

STI0615

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached as shown.

9-12 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (397,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

STI0614

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as

illustrated.

STI0617

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is at-

tached as shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-13

Information Provided by:

Black plate (398,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

STI0618

EXCEPT FOR NISMO MODELS

Use the following steps to mount the license

plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the plastic

bag.

.License plate bracket

.J-nut 62

.Screw 62

.Screw grommet 62

1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground. Locate

the two dents *

Aon the front bumper.

Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39 in

(10 mm) drill bit. (Be sure that the drill

only goes through the bumper fascia.)

2. Insert grommets into the hole on the bumper

fascia.

3. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the

grommet hole to add 908turn onto the part

4. Make sure the side end surface of the

license plate bracket is aligned with the

bumper *

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

9-14 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (399,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

STI0629

Mark the center of the hole *

Don both

sides with a felt-tip pen. Remove the bracket

from the bumper, and then open 0.9 to 1.0

inch (22 to 25 mm) diameter holes on the

bumper using the marks *

Das a center.

5. Insert J-nuts into the license plate bracket

before placing the license plate bracket on

the fascia.

6. Install the license plate bracket with screws.

7. Install the license plate with bolts that are no

longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

STI0650

Technical and consumer information 9-15

Information Provided by:

Black plate (400,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

FOR NISMO MODELS

Use the following steps to mount the license

plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag.

.License plate bracket

.J-nut 62

.Screw 64

.Screw grommet 64

1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.

2. Temporarily place the license plate bracket

while aligning points *

Aof the front bumper

fascia with holes *

Bin the license plate

bracket.

3. Confirm that points *

Aand *

Bare aligned.

Hold the license plate bracket and mark the

points *

Con the bumper facia through the

center of the holes *

Dwith a felt-tip pen.

4. Remove the license plate bracket.

5. Carefully drill two shallow pilot holes *

and *

Cusing a 0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at

the marked locations. (Be sure that the

drill only goes through the fascia.)

6. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.

7. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the

grommet hole to add a 908turn onto the

part *

8. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

before placing the license plate bracket on

the fascia.

9. Install the license plate bracket with the

screws.

10. Install the license plate with bolts that are

not longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

When the recovery hook is used, you need to

temporarily remove the front license plate and

bracket from the vehicle. (See “VEHICLE

RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)” in the

“6. In case of emergency” section for further

details.)

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (401,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

STI0623

Left side

This vehicle is equipped with air deflectors in

front of the front wheels. The deflectors will

change the air flow to help improve aerodynamic

performance.

When transporting your vehicle on a trailer, the

air deflectors may interfere with a steep slope to

a trailer bed. In this case, remove the deflectors

from the undercover of the vehicle.

1. Loosen three screws as shown and remove

the left-side air deflector *

2. Tighten the removed screw *

Bin its

original position.

3. Perform the same procedure to remove the

right-side air deflector.

4. Store the two air deflectors and four screws

to reinstall in the reverse order.

5. When reinstalling, make sure all six screws

are firmly tightened on both air deflectors.

REMOVING AIR DEFLECTORS

(except for NISMO models)

Technical and consumer information 9-17

Information Provided by:

Black plate (402,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

.It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside the vehi-

cle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

.Do not allow people to ride in

any area of vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

.Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the

following terms before loading your vehicle:

.Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly. This

weight does not include passengers

and cargo.

.GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

optional equipment, passengers and

cargo.

.GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

- maximum total combined weight of the

unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,

hitch, trailer tongue load and any other

optional equipment. This information is

located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

label.

.GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.

S.S. label.

.GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rat-

ing) - The maximum total weight rating

of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and

trailer.

.Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle.

This is the maximum combined weight

of occupants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is

used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue

weight must be included as part of the

cargo load. This information is located

on the Tire and Loading Information

label.

.Cargo capacity - permissible weight of

cargo, the weight of total occupants

weight subtracted from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

9-18 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (403,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

STI0365

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle

shown as “The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading

Information label. Do not exceed the

number of occupants shown as “Seating

Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label.

To get “the combined weight of occupants

and cargo”, add the weight of all occu-

pants, then add the total luggage weight.

Examples are shown in the illustration.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on

your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding

in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the XXX

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will

be five 150 lb. passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 −750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs or

640 −340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity

of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

(See “MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS”

later in this section.)

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. See the Tire and Loading Information

label.

Technical and consumer information 9-19

Information Provided by:

Black plate (404,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

LOADING TIPS

.The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./

C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

.Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

.Properly secure all cargo to help

prevent it from sliding or shift-

ing. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden

stop or collision, unsecured car-

go could cause personal injury.

.Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

.Overloading could not only

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tires, but also could lead

to hazardous vehicle handling

and long braking distance. This

may cause a premature tire

malfunction, which could result

in a serious accident and perso-

nal injury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered by

the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts

that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle loads.

Individual axle loads should not exceed

either of the gross axle weight ratings

(GAWR). The total of the axle loads should

not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR). These ratings are given on the

vehicle certification label. If weight ratings

are exceeded, move or remove items to

bring all weights below the ratings.

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

TOWING A TRAILER

9-20 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (405,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a

vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a

motor home.

CAUTION

.Failure to follow these guidelines

can result in severe transmission

damage.

.Whenever flat towing your vehicle,

always tow forward, never back-

ward.

.DO NOT tow any automatic trans-

mission vehicle with all four wheels

on the ground (flat towing). Doing

so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-

sion parts due to lack of transmis-

sion lubrication.

.For emergency towing procedures

refer to “TOWING RECOMMENDED

BY NISSAN (except for NISMO

models)” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

To tow a vehicle equipped with an automatic

transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST

be placed under the towed vehicle’s drive

wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s

recommendations when using their product.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

.Always tow with the manual transmission in

Neutral.

.Your vehicle speed should never exceed 70

MPH (112 km/h) when flat towing your

vehicle.

.After towing 500 miles, start and idle the

engine with the transmission in Neutral for

two minutes. Failure to idle the engine after

every 500 miles of towing may cause

damage to the transmission’s internal parts.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

TREADWEAR

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified

government test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1

1/2) times as well on the government course as

a tire graded 100. The relative performance of

tires depends upon actual conditions of their

use, however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road char-

acteristics and climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as

measured under controlled conditions on spe-

cified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance.

FLAT TOWING UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 9-21

Information Provided by:

Black plate (406,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include

acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and

C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat and its ability to dissipate

heat when tested under controlled conditions on

a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-

tained high temperature can cause the material

of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of

performance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent

higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN is covered by the following

emission warranties.

For US:

.Emission Defects Warranty

.Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-

formation Booklet which comes with your

NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty

Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a

replacement by writing to:

.Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN. If you

did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet,

or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by

writing to:

.Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario,

L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

9-22 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (407,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Ad-

ministrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,

SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can

also obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately

inform Transport Canada in addition to

notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may request that NISSAN

conduct a recall campaign. However,

Transport Canada cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your

dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-

fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll

free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also

report safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/

PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

Additional information concerning motor

vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-

port Canada’s Road Safety Information

Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-

ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns

please contact our Consumer Information

Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Technical and consumer information 9-23

Information Provided by:

Black plate (408,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

should never be tested using a two wheel

dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used

by some states for emissions testing), or similar

equipment. Make sure you inform test facility

personnel that your vehicle is equipped with

AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may result in

transmission damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious vehicle

damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be

required to be in what is called the “ready

condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when

it is driven through certain driving patterns.

Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained

by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking

the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/

maintenance test readiness condition. Place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and

then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”.

Contact a NISSAN dealer to set “ready condi-

tion” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event

Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of

an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data

that will assist in understanding how a

vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

.How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

.Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fas-

tened;

.How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator and/or

brake pedal; and,

.How fast the vehicle was traveling.

.Sounds are not recorded.

Thesedatacanhelpprovideabetter

understanding of the circumstances in

which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only

if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no

data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

9-24 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (409,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash

location) are recorded. However, other

parties, such as law enforcement, could

combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely ac-

quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment, can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the

factory trained technicians working at a NISSAN

dealer. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can

also be purchased.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals contact:

1-800-450-9491

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals contact:

1-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this

model year and prior please contact a NISSAN

dealer. For the phone number and location of a

NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN

Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a

bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this

unlikely event, there is some important informa-

tion you should know. Many insurance compa-

nies routinely authorize the use of non-genuine

collision parts in order to cut costs, among other

reasons.

Insist on the use of Genuine NISSAN

Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using

parts made to NISSAN’s original exacting

specifications — if you want to help it to last

and hold its resale value, the solution is simple.

Tell your insurance agent and your repair

shop to only use Genuine NISSAN Colli-

sion Parts. NISSAN does not warrant non-

NISSAN parts, nor does NISSAN’s warranty

apply to damage caused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect

your personal safety, preserve your warranty

protection and maintain the resale value of your

vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit

unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at

the end of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones

to minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate

the windshield of your vehicle in an accident.

Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide

such built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine

parts often show premature wear, rust and

corrosion.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 9-25

Information Provided by:

Black plate (410,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be

advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair

your vehicle. And some states have enacted

laws that restrict insurance companies from

authorizing the use of non-genuine collision

parts during the new vehicle warranty. These

laws help protect you, so you can take action to

protect yourself.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

9-26 Technical and consumer information

Information Provided by:

Black plate (1,1)

10 Index

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).................. 5-26

Advanced air bag system ......................... 1-32

Air bag system

Advanced air bag system ..................... 1-32

Front passenger air bag and status light .... 1-33

Front-seat mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system.................. 1-36

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

supplemental air bag system.................. 1-36

Air bag warning labels............................. 1-38

Air bag warning light ....................... 1-38, 2-12

Air cleaner housing filter .......................... 8-18

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation ...................... 4-24

Air conditioner service......................... 4-30

Air conditioner specification label ............ 9-13

Air conditioning system refrigerant and

lubricant recommendations .............. 4-30, 9-7

In-cabin microfilter ............................. 4-29

Air deflectors ....................................... 9-17

Alarm, How to stop alarm

(see vehicle security system) ..................... 2-26

Alcohol, drugs and driving .......................... 5-7

Antenna............................................. 4-79

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................. 5-26

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light ..... 2-9

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care........................ 7-2

Interior appearance care ........................ 7-5

Audible reminders ................................. 2-15

Audio operation precautions ...................... 4-30

Audio system....................................... 4-30

Steering wheel audio controls ................ 4-77

Autochanger

Compact Disc (CD) ........................... 4-48

Autolight system ................................... 2-30

Automatic

Air conditioner (Type A) ....................... 4-25

Air conditioner (Type B) ....................... 4-27

Automatic adjusting function

(front windows) ................................ 2-43

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-12

Door locks........................................ 3-5

Driving with automatic transmission .......... 5-12

AUX (Auxiliary) button ...................... 4-45, 4-50

Auxiliary input jacks ................................ 4-75

Avoiding collision and rollover ...................... 5-5

Battery .............................................. 8-14

Battery saver system .......................... 2-31

Intelligent Key .................................. 8-23

Variable voltage control system............... 8-16

Before starting the engine ........................ 5-10

Belts (See drive belts)............................. 8-17

Bluetooth®hands-free phone system

(models with navigation system).................. 4-80

Bluetooth®hands-free phone system

(models without navigation system) .............. 4-91

Bluetooth®streaming audio ....................... 4-62

Booster seats ...................................... 1-23

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).............. 5-26

Brake and clutch fluid ......................... 8-13

Brake fluid ...................................... 8-13

Brake system................................... 5-25

Parking brake operation ....................... 5-20

Warning light ..................................... 2-9

Break-in schedule.................................. 5-23

Brightness control

Display ON/OFF button ......................... 4-6

Instrument panel ............................... 2-32

Bulb check/instrument panel........................ 2-8

Bulb replacement .................................. 8-25

Cabin air filter ...................................... 4-29

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ..... 9-2

Car phone or CB radio............................ 4-80

Cargo cover ........................................ 2-41

Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ............ 5-2

CD/CF/USB memory care and cleaning......... 4-76

Center multi-function control panel

(models with navigation system).................... 4-2

Child restraints ..................................... 1-17

Booster seats .................................. 1-23

Precautions on child restraints................ 1-17

Top tether strap ................................ 1-18

Child safety......................................... 1-15

Chimes

Audible reminders ............................. 2-15

Seat belt warning light and chime............ 2-11

Circuit breaker, Fusible link ....................... 8-21

Cleaning exterior and interior ................. 7-2, 7-5

Clock ..........................................2-7, 2-23

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Information Provided by:

Black plate (2,1)

10-2

Clutch fluid ......................................... 8-13

Cockpit ............................................... 2-2

Cold weather driving .............................. 5-31

Compact Disc (CD) changer

(See audio system) ................................ 4-48

Compact Disc (CD) player

(See audio system) ......................... 4-44, 4-54

Compact spare tire ................................ 8-37

Console box........................................ 2-40

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................................... 9-2

Changing engine coolant........................ 8-9

Checking engine coolant level .................. 8-9

Corrosion protection................................. 7-7

Cover, Cargo cover................................ 2-41

Cruise control ...................................... 5-21

Cup holders ........................................ 2-38

Dampers, Performance dampers ................. 5-30

Daytime running light system ..................... 2-32

Defroster switch, Rear window defroster

switch............................................... 2-29

Dimensions ......................................... 9-10

Drive belts .......................................... 8-17

Driving

Cold weather driving .......................... 5-31

Driving with automatic transmission .......... 5-12

Driving with manual transmission ............. 5-16

Precautions when starting and driving ......... 5-2

DVD player operation.............................. 4-55

Economy, Fuel ..................................... 5-23

Elapsed time ....................................... 2-21

Emergency tire puncture repair kit.................. 6-7

Emission control information label ................ 9-12

Emission control system warranty ................ 9-22

Engine

Before starting the engine .................... 5-10

Break-in schedule.............................. 5-23

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................................... 9-2

Changing engine coolant........................ 8-9

Changing engine oil and filter................. 8-10

Checking engine coolant level .................. 8-9

Checking engine oil level........................ 8-9

Coolant temperature gauge ..................... 2-6

Emergency engine shut off...................... 5-9

Engine block heater ........................... 5-32

Engine compartment check locations .......... 8-7

Engine cooling system .......................... 8-8

Engine oil ......................................... 8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ....... 9-6

Engine oil replacement indicator.............. 2-19

Engine oil temperature gauge................... 2-7

Engine oil viscosity .............................. 9-6

Engine serial number .......................... 9-12

Engine specifications ............................ 9-8

Engine start operation indicator .............. 2-16

Engine start operation indicator

(Manual Transmission models) ................ 2-17

If your vehicle overheats....................... 6-15

Starting the engine ............................ 5-11

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ..................... 9-24

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .................... 5-2

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ......... 9-12

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter ...................... 8-18

Changing engine oil and filter................. 8-10

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . 2-33

Flat tire................................................ 6-2

Repairing flat tire

(with emergency tire puncture repair kit)....... 6-7

Flat towing.......................................... 9-21

Floor mat cleaning ................................... 7-6

Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-12

Brake and clutch fluid ......................... 8-13

Brake fluid ...................................... 8-13

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................................... 9-2

Engine coolant ................................... 8-8

Engine oil ......................................... 8-9

Power steering fluid ........................... 8-12

Window washer fluid .......................... 8-14

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player ............................................... 4-42

FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

changer (models without navigation system) .... 4-47

FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player (models with navigation system) .......... 4-51

Fog light switch .................................... 2-33

Front manual seat adjustment. ...................... 1-4

Front passenger air bag and status light ........ 1-33

Front power seat adjustment ....................... 1-3

Front seat, Front seat adjustment .................. 1-3

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Information Provided by:

Black plate (3,1)

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................................... 9-2

Fuel economy .................................. 5-23

Fuel economy information (display)............. 4-8

Fuel octane rating................................ 9-4

Fuel recommendation............................ 9-4

Fuel-filler cap................................... 3-34

Fuel-filler door.................................. 3-34

Gauge ............................................ 2-6

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning .................. 3-35

Fuses ............................................... 8-21

Fusible links ........................................ 8-21

Garage door opener, HomeLink®Universal

Transceiver ......................................... 2-47

Gas cap ............................................ 3-34

Gauge ................................................ 2-4

Engine coolant temperature gauge ............. 2-6

Fuel gauge ....................................... 2-6

Odometer......................................... 2-5

Speedometer..................................... 2-5

Tachometer ....................................... 2-5

Trip computer .................................. 2-20

General maintenance ................................ 8-2

Glove box. .......................................... 2-39

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth®

(models with navigation system).................. 4-80

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth®

(models without navigation system) .............. 4-91

Hatch, Rear hatch ................................. 3-17

Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 2-33

Head restraints....................................... 1-5

Headlights

Bulb replacement .............................. 8-27

Headlight switch ............................... 2-30

Xenon headlights .............................. 2-29

Heated seats ....................................... 2-34

Heater

Engine block heater ........................... 5-32

Heater and air conditioner operation ......... 4-24

HomeLink®Universal Transceiver................. 2-47

Hood release....................................... 3-16

Horn ................................................ 2-34

Ignition switch

(Push-button) .................................... 5-7

Manual transmission models .................. 5-16

Immobilizer system................................. 2-26

In-cabin microfilter ................................. 4-29

Indicator lights ..................................... 2-12

INFO button .......................................... 4-6

Inside mirror ........................................ 3-37

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ................ 9-24

Instrument brightness control ..................... 2-32

Instrument panel ..................................... 2-3

Instrument pocket.................................. 2-38

Intelligent Key ........................................ 3-2

Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator ....... 2-17

Intelligent Key removal indicator .................. 2-17

Intelligent Key system ............................... 3-6

Battery replacement ........................... 8-23

Intelligent Key system warning light .......... 2-10

Key operating range ............................. 3-8

Key operation .................................... 3-9

Warning signals................................ 3-11

Interior light control switch ........................ 2-44

Interior light replacement .......................... 8-27

Interior lights ....................................... 2-44

Interior trunk lid release ........................... 3-20

iPod®player operation............................. 4-67

Jump starting ....................................... 6-13

Keyless entry

(See remote keyless entry system) ............... 3-13

Keys................................................... 3-2

For Intelligent Key system ....................... 3-6

Labels

Air bag warning labels......................... 1-38

Air conditioner specification label ............ 9-13

Emission control information label ............ 9-12

Engine serial number .......................... 9-12

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. ..... 9-12

Tire and Loading information label .... 8-30, 9-13

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ........... 9-11

License plate, Installing front license plate. ...... 9-14

Light

Air bag warning light .......................... 1-38

Bulb replacement .............................. 8-25

Cargo area courtesy light ..................... 2-46

Cargo light ..................................... 2-46

Fog light switch ................................ 2-33

10-3

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Information Provided by:

Black plate (4,1)

10-4

Headlight switch ............................... 2-30

Headlights bulb replacement ................. 8-27

Indicator lights ................................. 2-12

Interior light control switch .................... 2-44

Interior lights ................................... 2-44

Map lights ...................................... 2-44

Replacement ................................... 8-25

Trunk light ...................................... 2-46

Vanity mirror lights ............................. 2-45

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ......................................... 2-9

Xenon headlights .............................. 2-29

Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement . . . 8-27

Loading information

(See vehicle loading information) ................. 9-18

Lock

Automatic door locks ............................ 3-5

Door locks........................................ 3-4

Power door lock ................................. 3-4

Rear hatch lock ................................ 3-17

Trunk lid ........................................ 3-19

Locking with mechanical key........................ 3-4

Low tire pressure warning light ................... 2-10

Low tire pressure warning system (See tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) .............. 5-3

Maintenance

Battery .......................................... 8-14

General maintenance ............................ 8-2

Indicators for maintenance .................... 2-19

Inside the vehicle ................................ 8-3

Maintenance precautions........................ 8-5

Maintenance requirements ...................... 8-2

Outside the vehicle .............................. 8-2

Seat belt maintenance......................... 1-14

Malfunction indicator light (MIL) .................. 2-13

Manual front seat adjustment ....................... 1-4

Map lights .......................................... 2-44

Master warning light ............................... 2-11

Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system)............ 3-3

Meter

Trip computer .................................. 2-20

Meters and gauges .................................. 2-4

Instrument brightness control ................. 2-32

Mirror

Inside mirror .................................... 3-37

Outside mirrors ................................ 3-38

Vanity mirror .................................... 3-39

Multi-function controller ............................. 4-3

New vehicle break-in .............................. 5-23

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ............. 2-26

NISSAN voice recognition system............... 4-104

No key warning .................................... 2-17

Odometer............................................. 2-5

Off-road recovery .................................... 5-6

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants .................................... 9-2

Changing engine oil and filter................. 8-10

Checking engine oil level........................ 8-9

Engine oil ......................................... 8-9

Engine oil viscosity .............................. 9-6

Oil filter replacement indicator ................ 2-19

Opening the soft top .............................. 3-21

Operation, Indicators for operation ............... 2-16

Outside mirrors .................................... 3-38

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ............... 6-15

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information.......................................... 9-25

Panic alarm......................................... 3-14

Parking

Brake break-in.................................. 5-26

Parking brake operation ....................... 5-20

Parking on hills................................. 5-24

Performance dampers ............................. 5-30

Phone

Bluetooth®hands-free phone system

(models with navigation system).............. 4-80

Bluetooth®hands-free phone system

(models without navigation system) .......... 4-91

Car phone or CB radio........................ 4-80

Power

Front seat adjustment ........................... 1-3

Power door lock ................................. 3-4

Power outlet.................................... 2-37

Power steering fluid ........................... 8-12

Power steering system ........................ 5-25

Power windows ................................ 2-42

Precautions

Audio operation ................................ 4-30

Braking precautions ........................... 5-25

Child restraints ................................. 1-17

Cruise control .................................. 5-21

Cruise control operations ..................... 5-17

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Information Provided by:

Black plate (5,1)

Maintenance...................................... 8-5

Seat belt usage .................................. 1-8

Supplemental restraint system ................ 1-26

When starting and driving....................... 5-2

Push starting ....................................... 6-15

Push warning

(Automatic Transmission models)................. 2-17

Push-button ignition switch ................... 5-7, 5-8

Radio ............................................... 4-30

Car phone or CB radio........................ 4-80

FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)

player ........................................... 4-42

FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) changer (models without navigation

system) ......................................... 4-47

FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player (models with navigation

system) ......................................... 4-51

Rapid air pressure loss .............................. 5-6

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)

test.................................................. 9-24

Rear hatch.......................................... 3-17

Rear hatch opener ................................. 3-17

Rear hatch opener switch......................... 3-17

Rear parcel box .................................... 2-40

Rear window defroster switch .................... 2-29

RearView monitor

(models with navigation system).................. 4-17

Recorders, Event data............................. 9-24

Registering your vehicle in another country...... 9-11

Remote keyless entry system ..................... 3-13

Repairing flat tire

(with emergency tire puncture repair kit)........... 6-7

Reporting safety defects .......................... 9-23

Rollover ............................................... 5-5

Roof, Soft top ...................................... 3-21

Safety, Child seat belts............................ 1-15

Satellite radio operation .................... 4-47, 4-52

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment. .................. 1-4

Front power seat adjustment ................... 1-3

Front seats ....................................... 1-3

Seat belt(s)

Child safety..................................... 1-15

Infants........................................... 1-15

Injured persons................................. 1-11

Larger children ................................. 1-15

Precautions on seat belt usage................. 1-8

Pregnant women ............................... 1-11

Seat belt cleaning ............................... 7-7

Seat belt extenders ............................ 1-14

Seat belt maintenance......................... 1-14

Seat belt warning light and chime............ 2-11

Seat belts ........................................ 1-8

Seat belts with pretensioners................. 1-37

Three-point type ............................... 1-11

Seat(s)

Climate controlled seats. ...................... 2-36

Heated seats ................................... 2-34

Seats.............................................. 1-2

Secondary rear hatch release..................... 3-18

Secondary trunk lid release ....................... 3-21

Security system, Vehicle security system ........ 2-25

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), Engine start.............................. 2-26

Selector lever, Shift lock release ................. 5-15

Servicing air conditioner........................... 4-30

SETTING button ................................... 4-10

Shift “P” warning

(Automatic Transmission models)................. 2-17

Shift lock release, Transmission .................. 5-15

Shifting

Automatic transmission........................ 5-12

Manual transmission ........................... 5-16

Soft top

Care and cleaning ............................... 7-3

If the top does not open or close ............ 3-28

Opening using the Intelligent Key ............ 3-26

Soft top indicator light.................. 2-14, 3-24

Soft top operation ............................. 3-21

Spare tire ............................................. 9-9

Spark plugs ........................................ 8-17

Speedometer......................................... 2-5

Starting

Before starting the engine .................... 5-10

Jump starting ................................... 6-13

Precautions when starting and driving ......... 5-2

Push starting ................................... 6-15

Starting the engine ............................ 5-11

STATUS button ...................................... 4-6

Status light, Front passenger air bag ............ 1-33

Steering

Power steering fluid ........................... 8-12

Power steering system ........................ 5-25

Steering lock ..................................... 5-9

Steering lock release malfunction

indicator ........................................ 2-16

Steering-wheel-mounted controls for

audio ............................................ 4-77

Storage ............................................. 2-38

10-5

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Information Provided by:

Black plate (6,1)

10-6

Sun visors .......................................... 3-36

Supplemental air bag warning labels............. 1-38

Supplemental air bag warning light ....... 1-38, 2-12

Supplemental restraint system .................... 1-26

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system .......................................... 1-26

Switch

Autolight switch ................................ 2-30

Fog light switch ................................ 2-33

Hazard warning flasher switch ................ 2-33

Headlight switch ............................... 2-30

Ignition switch.................................. 5-12

Ignition switch manual transmission

models .......................................... 5-16

Power door lock switch ......................... 3-5

Rear window defroster switch ................ 2-29

Turn signal switch.............................. 2-33

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . . 2-37

SynchroRev Match mode (S-MODE) ............ 5-17

Tachometer ........................................... 2-5

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant

temperature gauge................................... 2-6

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

Engine start ........................................ 2-26

Three-way catalyst ................................... 5-2

Tilt steering......................................... 3-36

Tire

Pressure, Low tire pressure warning light . . . 2-10

Sealant............................................ 6-7

Tire replacement indicator..................... 2-19

Tires

Emergency tire puncture repair kit.............. 6-7

Flat tire............................................ 6-2

Low tire pressure warning system.............. 5-3

Spare tire ....................................... 8-37

Tire and Loading information label .... 8-30, 9-13

Tire chains...................................... 8-35

Tire dressing ..................................... 7-5

Tire pressure ................................... 8-29

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) ..................................... 5-3, 6-2

Tire rotation .................................... 8-36

Types of tires ................................... 8-34

Uniform tire quality grading ................... 9-21

Wheel/tire size ................................... 9-9

Wheels and tires............................... 8-29

Tonneau cover (see cargo cover)................. 2-41

Top, Soft top ....................................... 3-21

Touch screen......................................... 4-3

Towing

Flat towing...................................... 9-21

Tow truck towing............................... 6-16

Towing a trailer................................. 9-20

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system ........... 5-3

TPMS, Tire pressure warning system .............. 6-2

Trailer towing ....................................... 9-20

Transceiver, HomeLink®Universal

Transceiver ......................................... 2-47

Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ........... 8-12

Driving with automatic transmission .......... 5-12

Driving with manual transmission ............. 5-16

Transmission selector lever lock release ..... 5-15

Transmitter (See remote keyless entry

system) ............................................. 3-13

Traveling or registering your vehicle in another

country.............................................. 9-11

Trip computer ...................................... 2-20

Trip odometer ...................................... 2-21

Triple meter........................................... 2-7

Trunk

Interior trunk lid release ....................... 3-20

Light ............................................ 2-46

Secondary trunk lid release ................... 3-21

Trunk lid ........................................ 3-19

Trunk release power cancel switch........... 3-19

Turn signal switch.................................. 2-33

Underbody cleaning ................................. 7-4

Uniform tire quality grading ....................... 9-21

USB memory operation ........................... 4-58

Vanity mirror ........................................ 3-39

Vanity mirror lights ................................. 2-45

Variable voltage control system................... 8-16

Vehicle

Dimensions ..................................... 9-10

Identification number (VIN).................... 9-11

Information and settings

(models with navigation system)................ 4-6

Information display ............................. 2-16

Loading information............................ 9-18

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)............ 6-19

Security system ................................ 2-25

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . . 2-37

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system ...... 5-28

Ventilators .......................................... 4-23

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Information Provided by:

Black plate (7,1)

Voice command

(Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System)......... 4-97

Voice command

(NISSAN voice recognition system) ............. 4-109

Voltmeter ............................................. 2-7

Warning

Hazard warning flasher switch ................ 2-33

Lights ............................................. 2-9

Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) ..................................... 5-3, 6-2

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ......................................... 2-8

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .......... 1-38

Warning light

Air bag warning light ................... 1-38, 2-12

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning

light ............................................... 2-9

Brake warning light .............................. 2-9

Intelligent Key system warning light .......... 2-10

Low tire pressure warning light ............... 2-10

Seat belt warning light and chime............ 2-11

Warnings and alerts

(vehicle information display)....................... 2-18

Warranty, Emission control system warranty..... 9-22

Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washer

switch............................................... 2-27

Washing .............................................. 7-2

Waxing................................................ 7-3

Wheel/tire size ....................................... 9-9

Wheels and tires................................... 8-29

Care of wheels................................... 7-4

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ................ 7-4

Window washer fluid .............................. 8-14

Window(s)

Automatic adjusting function.................. 2-43

Cleaning .......................................... 7-4

Power windows ................................ 2-42

Windshield wiper and washer switch ............ 2-27

Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-27

Wiper blades................................... 8-19

Xenon headlights .................................. 2-29

10-7

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 28

Information Provided by:

Black plate (2,1)

Model "Z34-D" EDITED: 2010/ 7/ 27

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

VQ37VHR engine

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)

number (Research octane number 96).

If premium gasoline is not available, unleaded

regular gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI

number (Research octane number 91) may be

temporarily used, but only under the following

precautions:

.Have the fuel tank filled only partially with

unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with

unleaded premium gasoline as soon as

possible.

.Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt accel-

eration.

However, for maximum vehicle perfor-

mance, the use of unleaded premium

gasoline is recommended.

CAUTION

.Using a fuel other than that speci-

fied could adversely affect the emis-

sion control systems, and may also

affect warranty coverage.

.Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, since this

will damage the three way catalyst.

.Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is not designed to run

on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can

damage the fuel system compo-

nents and is not covered by the

NISSAN vehicle limited warranty.

For additional information, see “CAPACITIES

AND RECOMMENDED FUEL/LUBRICANTS”

in the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

.Engine oil with API Certification Mark

.Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS” in the “9. Technical and

consumer information” section for engine oil and

oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, see “WHEELS AND

TIRES” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-

DURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of

vehicle use, follow the recommendations out-

lined in the “BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s

Manual. Follow these recommendations for the

future reliability and economy of your new

vehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Information Provided by:

2011 Nissan 370Z Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation